®

SV9100
Programming Manual

NDA-31579
Issue 4.0
(Version 5000)
NEC Corporation of America reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.

NEC Corporation of America has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers.
The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America.

Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a registered trademark of NEC

Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright 2016

NEC Corporation of America

3929 W. John Carpenter Freeway
Irving, TX 75063-2909

Communications Technology Group

 PREFACE
THIS MANUAL

The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary information for programming
the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.

Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a multiline terminal.

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

UNIVERGE SV9100 General Description Manual

This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV9100 system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.

UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual

The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed instructions
for installing the SV9100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment.

UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual

This manual provides detailed information for each of the system features. If you are not familiar with the
features, the Table of Contents lists each of the features and where to find the feature within the manual.

UNIVERGE SV9100 Networking Manual

This manual provides information on networking the SV9100 using K-CCIS, IP K-CCIS, and NetLink.

UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual

This manual provides information on installing and using the application that allows programming the
SV9100 system via a computer.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 2 Programming the UNIVERGE SV9100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-3
10-02 : Location Setup ........................................................................... 2-4
10-03 : ETU Setup ................................................................................. 2-5
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup ............................................................... 2-17
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup ................................................. 2-19
10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup ...................................................................... 2-20
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup ................................................................... 2-21
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup .......................................... 2-22
10-12 : GCD-CP10 Network Setup ...................................................... 2-24
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup ............................................................ 2-28
10-14 : Managed Network Setup ......................................................... 2-29
10-15 : Client Information Setup .......................................................... 2-30
10-16 : Option Information Setup ......................................................... 2-31
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup ......................................................... 2-35
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup ...................................................... 2-36
10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection ................................................ 2-37
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment .......................................... 2-38
10-21 : GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup ................................................... 2-40
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup .......................................... 2-42
10-24 : Daylight Saving Setup ............................................................. 2-44
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup ................................................... 2-46
10-27 : IP System ID ............................................................................ 2-47
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup ................................................ 2-48

SV9100 Programming Manual i

Issue 4.0

10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup .................................................. 2-50

10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup ....................................................... 2-54
10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation ......................................... 2-56
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-57
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup ............................... 2-58
10-37 : UPnP Setup ............................................................................. 2-59
10-38 : BGM Resource Setup ............................................................. 2-60
10-39 : Fractional Setup ...................................................................... 2-61
10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector ......................................... 2-62
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting ................................................ 2-63
10-46 : DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup ................................. 2-64
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup ............................ 2-68
10-48 : License Activation ................................................................... 2-69
10-49 : License File Activation ............................................................. 2-70
10-50 : License Information ................................................................. 2-71
10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA ................................................ 2-76
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information .............................................. 2-77
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package ................................ 2-78
10-55 : Package Network Setup .......................................................... 2-79
10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone ............................................................... 2-81
10-58 : DT800/DT700 Network Setup ................................................. 2-82
10-62 : NetBIOS Setting ..................................................................... 2-83
10-65 : NTP Server .............................................................................. 2-84
10-67 : SIP Stack Configuration Setup ................................................ 2-85
10-68 : IP Trunk Availability ................................................................. 2-87
10-69 : UC Server General Settings .................................................... 2-88
10-70 : UC Server VoiceMail Interface Settings .................................. 2-90
10-71 : UC Server Contact Center Settings ........................................ 2-91
10-72 : Network Security Setup ........................................................... 2-92

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-01 : System Numbering .................................................................. 2-95
11-02 : Extension Numbering ............................................................ 2-103

ii Table of Contents
 Issue 4.0

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering ................................................. 2-105

11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering ..................................................... 2-107
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers ......................................... 2-108
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number ........................................................ 2-110
11-09 : Trunk Access Code ............................................................... 2-111
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) .................... 2-113
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) .................. 2-116
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) ............................. 2-120
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) .............................. 2-124
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) .............................................. 2-126
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) ..... 2-128
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup ........................................... 2-130
11-17 : Group Pilot Number ............................................................... 2-132
11-19 : Remote Conference Group Pilot Number .............................. 2-133
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table ................................................ 2-134

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup ................................................... 2-135
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns .......................................... 2-136
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-138
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-140
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions ...................... 2-141
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks ............................ 2-142
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode ...................................................... 2-143
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range .................................................... 2-145

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup ............................................... 2-147
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins ..................................................... 2-148
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions .................. 2-149
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name ......................................... 2-150
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group ........................................................ 2-153
13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name .............................. 2-154

SV9100 Programming Manual iii

Issue 4.0

13-08 : Telephone Book System Name ............................................. 2-155

13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name ............................................... 2-156
13-10 : Telephone Book Routing ....................................................... 2-157

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup ........................................................ 2-159
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup ...................................................... 2-165
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup ................................................................. 2-168
14-05 : Trunk Group .......................................................................... 2-169
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing ............................................................. 2-170
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup ...................................................... 2-172
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks .......................................... 2-174
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks .................... 2-175
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk ............................................................. 2-176
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk ....................................... 2-177
14-13 : CCIS System Route ID .......................................................... 2-178
14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment ................................................. 2-179
14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup .............................................................. 2-180

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup .................................................. 2-183
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup .................................. 2-186
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup .............................. 2-195
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup ............................. 2-199
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions ......................................... 2-205
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys ............................................... 2-206
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup ........................ 2-216
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment ....................................... 2-218
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup .............. 2-219
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment ......................... 2-221
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ............. 2-222
15-13 : Loop Key Data ....................................................................... 2-223
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ........................................... 2-224

iv Table of Contents
 Issue 4.0

15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension ..................................... 2-225

15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication ............................................ 2-226
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options .............................. 2-227
15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension ....................... 2-229
15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment .......................................... 2-230
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup ......................................................... 2-231
15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup ...................... 2-233
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal ................................. 2-234
15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup ........................................................... 2-236
15-27 : Power Saving Setup .............................................................. 2-237
15-29 : Setting of Function Key for BTH Handset .............................. 2-238

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup .................................... 2-241
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions ..................... 2-243
16-03 : Secondary Department Group ............................................... 2-244
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups ....................... 2-245

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-01 : System Options ..................................................................... 2-247
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones .............................. 2-249
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones ......................... 2-252
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions .................................. 2-254
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions ............................................. 2-255
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) ..................... 2-256
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) ................. 2-259
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) ................. 2-262
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) ........................... 2-264
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) ................. 2-266
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) ................ 2-270
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) ............... 2-271
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M ................................ 2-276
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup ................................................................... 2-278

SV9100 Programming Manual v

Issue 4.0

20-16 : Selectable Display Messages ............................................... 2-280

20-17 : Operator Extension ............................................................... 2-283
20-18 : Service Tone Timers ............................................................. 2-284
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID ................................................. 2-286
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data ................................. 2-288
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation ................................. 2-289
20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service ...................... 2-290
20-23 : System Options for CTI ......................................................... 2-291
20-25 : ISDN Options ........................................................................ 2-292
20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO ......................................................... 2-294
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation ................................................. 2-295
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension ..................................................... 2-296
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks .......................................................... 2-297
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment ............................................. 2-298
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setting ....................................... 2-302
20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting ................................................. 2-304
20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting ....................................................... 2-305
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup .......................................... 2-306
20-38 : Operator Group Setting ......................................................... 2-307
20-44 : Watch Mode Setup ................................................................ 2-308
20-45 : Remote Watch Setup ............................................................ 2-309
20-46 : Security Sensor Setup ........................................................... 2-310
20-47 : Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode ................................... 2-312
20-48 : Time Pattern Setting for Security Sensor .............................. 2-313
20-53 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Save Group ......... 2-314
20-54 : Power Supply Mode for each Power Save Group ................. 2-315
20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor ........................................... 2-316
20-57 : UC User Information Settings ................................................ 2-317
20-58 : UC Server Presence Settings ............................................... 2-318
20-59 : UC Server User Settings ....................................................... 2-320
20-60 : UC Server Telephony Settings .............................................. 2-322
20-61 : UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings ................................. 2-323

vi Table of Contents
 Issue 4.0

20-62 : UC Exception Table ............................................................... 2-324

20-64 : UC Web Application Setting .................................................. 2-325
20-65 : Multi-Device Group Setup (Terminal Information) ................. 2-326
20-66 : STUN/TURN Server Setting ................................................. 2-327

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls ....................................... 2-329
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................................... 2-333
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks ............................................ 2-334
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions ..................................... 2-335
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class ............................................................. 2-336
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup .......................................... 2-339
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup ............................. 2-342
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup ................................................................. 2-343
21-09 : Dial Block Setup .................................................................... 2-344
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension ........................... 2-345
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment ........................... 2-346
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks ....................... 2-347
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions ................. 2-348
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup .............................. 2-349
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................... 2-350
21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking ..................................... 2-351
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk ........... 2-352
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension .............................................................................. 2-353
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension .... 2-354
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) ....... 2-355
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings ........... 2-356
21-25 : Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension ........................ 2-357

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls ....................................... 2-359
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup .................................................... 2-361
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range ........................................................ 2-363

SV9100 Programming Manual vii

Issue 4.0

22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment ........................ 2-365

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment .............................. 2-366
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode ................................................. 2-367
22-07 : DIL Assignment ..................................................................... 2-368
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination ............................................ 2-369
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup ........................................................... 2-370
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup ................................................. 2-372
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion .................................... 2-374
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group ...................................................... 2-378
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment .............. 2-380
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG ............................................. 2-381
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group ..................... 2-383
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup ................................. 2-385
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern ......... 2-386
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup .............................................. 2-387
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup ....................................... 2-388

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-02 : Call Pickup Groups ................................................................ 2-389
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer ............................................. 2-390
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions ..................... 2-392

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-01 : System Options for Hold ....................................................... 2-393
24-02 : System Options for Transfer ................................................. 2-395
24-03 : Park Group ............................................................................ 2-397
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup ................. 2-398
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup ............................ 2-399
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings .................................................... 2-400

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup ......................................... 2-403
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message ....................................................... 2-404
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing ......... 2-405

viii Table of Contents

 Issue 4.0

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy ........ 2-406

25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment ................................. 2-407
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup ......................... 2-408
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA ................................................ 2-410
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup ............................................................... 2-412
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users ............................................ 2-413
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA .............................................. 2-414
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class ................................................... 2-415
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA ............................... 2-416
25-13 : System Option for DISA ........................................................ 2-417
25-15 : VRS/DISA Transfer Target Setup .......................................... 2-418
25-16 : VRS/DISA Talkie Base Setup ................................................ 2-419
25-17 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Service Setup ...................... 2-421
25-18 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Timer Setup ......................... 2-423

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service ....................................... 2-425
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR .......................................... 2-427
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments ............................................................. 2-429
26-04 : ARS Class of Service ............................................................ 2-431
26-05 : LCR Carrier Table ................................................................. 2-432
26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table .............................................. 2-433
26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table ................................................ 2-434
26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table ............................ 2-435
26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table ................................ 2-436
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table ....................................................... 2-437
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS .......................... 2-438
26-13 : ARS Class of Service for NetLink (DT700) ............................ 2-439

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode .............................................. 2-441
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment .................................... 2-442
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment .............................................. 2-443

SV9100 Programming Manual ix

Issue 4.0

30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer ............................................ 2-450

30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table ..................................................... 2-451
30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup ........................................... 2-454

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging ........................ 2-455
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment ....................................... 2-457
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings ............................................. 2-458
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group ................................................. 2-461
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page .............................. 2-462
31-06 : External Speaker Control ...................................................... 2-463
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments ............................................ 2-465
31-08 : BGM on External Paging ....................................................... 2-466

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup ......................................................... 2-467
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment ................................................... 2-468
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup ........................................................... 2-469
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup .......................................................... 2-470

Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup ............................................................. 2-471
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group .............................................. 2-472

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup ..................................................... 2-473
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service .............................................. 2-475
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines ............................... 2-476
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class ...................................... 2-477
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction ......................................... 2-478
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line ......................................... 2-479
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer ............................................................... 2-480
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines ................................ 2-481
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options .................................................... 2-482
34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment ..................................... 2-485

x Table of Contents
 Issue 4.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-01 : SMDR Options ....................................................................... 2-487
35-02 : SMDR Output Options ........................................................... 2-489
35-05 : Account Code Setup .............................................................. 2-492
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table ................................................. 2-494

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS ....................... 2-495
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option .................................... 2-497
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment ............................................ 2-499

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-01 : System Options for Contact Center ....................................... 2-501
41-02 : Group and Agent Assignments .............................................. 2-503
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Group ......................... 2-504
41-04 : Group Supervisor .................................................................. 2-506
41-05 : Agent Work Schedules .......................................................... 2-507
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules .......................................................... 2-508
41-07 : Weekly Schedule Setup ....................................................... 2-509
41-08 : Overflow Options .................................................................. 2-510
41-09 : Overflow Table Setting ......................................................... 2-512
41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement ..................................................... 2-513
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement .................................................... 2-514
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup ................................................... 2-516
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement .................. 2-517
41-14 : Options Setup ........................................................................ 2-518
41-15 : Queue Alarm Information ...................................................... 2-521
41-16 : Threshold Overflow ............................................................... 2-523
41-17 : Login Mode Setup ................................................................. 2-524
41-18 : Agent Identity Code Setup ..................................................... 2-525
41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement ........................................... 2-527
41-20 : Queue Display Settings ......................................................... 2-529
41-21 : Login ID Setup ....................................................................... 2-531

SV9100 Programming Manual xi

Issue 4.0

41-22 : Skill Based Routing Setup ..................................................... 2-532

41-23 : Skill Table Setup ................................................................... 2-533
41-24 : Caller ID Marking Setup ........................................................ 2-534

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel ............................................. 2-535
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup ................................................ 2-538
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) ................................. 2-540
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes ................................... 2-542
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer ..................................................... 2-543
42-06 : PMS Service Setting ............................................................. 2-544
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table .............................. 2-546
42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status ............................................. 2-547

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route ......................................... 2-549
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access ........................ 2-550
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table ............................................... 2-552
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ........................... 2-554
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table ............................................................... 2-555
44-06 : Additional Dial Table ............................................................. 2-557
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access ..................................... 2-558
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route ........................................... 2-560
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-562
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-563

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options .............................................. 2-565
45-02 : NSL Option Setup ................................................................. 2-568
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment .......................................... 2-569
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits ... 2-570

Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options ............................................. 2-571
47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options ................................ 2-577

xii Table of Contents

 Issue 4.0

47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options ................................. 2-583

47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options ........................................ 2-584
47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options ............................... 2-590
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options ................................................ 2-593
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options ............................................ 2-595
47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options ................................................ 2-597
47-11 :VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options ................................... 2-600
47-12 :VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules ......................................... 2-604
47-13 :VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables .......................................... 2-613
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options ........................................ 2-619
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options .................................... 2-620
47-18 :VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup .................................................. 2-621
47-19 :VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup ................................................... 2-622
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification .................................... 2-623
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options ......................... 2-625
47-22 : Group Mailbox Notification Options ....................................... 2-627
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options .......................... 2-629

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-01 : CCIS System Setting ............................................................. 2-631
50-02 : Connecting System Settings ................................................. 2-632
50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings ........................................ 2-634
50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment .............................................. 2-635
50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter ...................... 2-636
50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability ....................................................... 2-637
50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office .................................. 2-638
50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment .............. 2-639
50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-640
50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment .................. 2-642
50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-643
50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-644

SV9100 Programming Manual xiii

Issue 4.0

50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment ................ 2-645

50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return ...................... 2-646
50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting ................................ 2-647

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting .......................................... 2-649
51-02 : NetLink System Basic Setup ................................................. 2-651
51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting ...................... 2-652
51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of
NetLink .................................................................................. 2-653
51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings .......................................................... 2-654
51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting ...................... 2-656
51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting ............... 2-657
51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting ......................................................... 2-658
51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings ................................... 2-659
51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting ................................................................. 2-661
51-11 : NetLink System Information .................................................. 2-662
51-12 : Primary System Information .................................................. 2-663
51-13 : NetLink Options ..................................................................... 2-664
51-14 : NetLink System Control ......................................................... 2-665
51-15 : Demonstration Setting ........................................................... 2-666
51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting .................... 2-667
51-17 : NetLink DT80/DT700 Server Individual Information Setup ... 2-669
51-18 : NetLink Configuration Options .............................................. 2-670
51-19 : NetLink IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension .............................................................................. 2-671

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-01 : Service Tone Setup ............................................................... 2-673
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup ................................................................. 2-680
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup .................................................. 2-682
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ....................................... 2-685
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System ...................................... 2-688
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup ..................... 2-689

xiv Table of Contents

 Issue 4.0

80-09 : Short Ring Setup ................................................................... 2-690

80-10 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup .................................................. 2-693
80-13 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup - 2 ............................................. 2-695
80-14 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup - 3 ............................................. 2-696

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-697
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup ....................................................... 2-700
81-03 : TLI Initial Data Setup ............................................................. 2-702
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ....................... 2-704
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ............ 2-705
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup .................... 2-706
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port ........................... 2-708
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup ............................................................ 2-709
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting .................................... 2-714
81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ....... 2-717
81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ..................... 2-720
81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ..................... 2-723
81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup ................................. 2-726

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone .............................................................. 2-727
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup .......................................... 2-730
82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-732
82-05 : ISDN BRI Layer 2 Initial Setup .............................................. 2-734
82-06 : ISDN BRI Layer 3 Timer Setup ............................................. 2-735
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port ......................... 2-737
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup ......................................................... 2-738
82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup .............................................. 2-739
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone ..................... 2-742
82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ............................. 2-743
82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ................................ 2-746
82-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup ................................. 2-749

SV9100 Programming Manual xv

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup ................................... 2-751
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup ............................ 2-753
84-06 : PVA Data Setting .................................................................. 2-755
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup .................................................... 2-756
84-09 : VLAN Setup ........................................................................... 2-757
84-10 : ToS Setup ............................................................................. 2-758
84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup ....................... 2-760
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup ......................... 2-762
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup ....................................... 2-767
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup ...................................... 2-770
84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup ........................................... 2-771
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup ................... 2-772
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup ................................. 2-776
84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .................... 2-777
84-22 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup ................. 2-780
84-23 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup .................. 2-782
84-24 : DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup .... 2-784
84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup ............................. 2-787
84-26 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-790
84-27 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-791
84-28 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup ..................... 2-794
84-29 : DT800/DT700 CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup ......... 2-795
84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup ......................................... 2-796
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceler Setup ............................................... 2-799
84-33 : Fax Over IP Setup ................................................................. 2-803
84-34 : VoIPDB DTMF Setup ............................................................ 2-805
84-35 : VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup .......................................... 2-806
84-36 : VoIPDB DTMF Transmit Setup ............................................. 2-807
84-37 : VoIPDB DTMF Detection Setup ............................................ 2-808
84-38 : VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceler Setup ........................ 2-809
84-39 : SIP Trunk Message Customization ....................................... 2-812

xvi Table of Contents

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-01 : Installation Date ..................................................................... 2-813
90-02 : Programming Password Setup .............................................. 2-814
90-03 : Save Data .............................................................................. 2-816
90-04 : Load Data .............................................................................. 2-817
90-05 : Slot Control ............................................................................ 2-818
90-06 : Trunk Control ......................................................................... 2-820
90-07 : Station Control ....................................................................... 2-821
90-08 : System Reset ........................................................................ 2-822
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup .................................... 2-823
90-10 : System Alarm Setup .............................................................. 2-824
90-11 : System Alarm Report ............................................................ 2-837
90-12 : System Alarm Output ............................................................ 2-839
90-13 : System Information Output .................................................... 2-840
90-16 : Main Software Information ..................................................... 2-841
90-17 : Firmware Information ............................................................. 2-842
90-19 : Dial Block Release ................................................................ 2-843
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup ...................................................... 2-844
90-21 : Traffic Report Output ............................................................. 2-846
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones ................................. 2-847
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup ...................... 2-848
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup .................................... 2-849
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup ................................................ 2-850
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup ..................................... 2-851
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet ..................................................... 2-852
90-34 : Firmware Information ............................................................. 2-853
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup ......................................... 2-854
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting .............................................. 2-855
90-37 : Set Temporary License ......................................................... 2-857
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup .................................... 2-858
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset ................................................ 2-861
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data ...................... 2-862

SV9100 Programming Manual xvii

Issue 4.0

90-42 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information .......... 2-863

90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT800/DT700 ......................... 2-864
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface .......................... 2-865
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for DT800/DT700 .................. 2-866
90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone ........................ 2-867
90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone .................... 2-868
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup ................................................. 2-869
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange ............................... 2-870
90-52 : System Alarm Save ............................................................... 2-872
90-53 : System Alarm Clear .............................................................. 2-873
90-54 : PC/Web Programming .......................................................... 2-874
90-55 : Free License Select ............................................................... 2-875
90-56 : NTP Setup ............................................................................. 2-876
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data .......................................................... 2-877
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data ......................................................... 2-878
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data ........................................................... 2-879
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information ........................................ 2-880
90-61 : Manual Slot Install ................................................................. 2-881
90-62 : Security ID Information .......................................................... 2-882
90-63 : DT800/DT700 Control ........................................................... 2-883
90-64 : SNMP Setup .......................................................................... 2-884
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup ...................... 2-885
90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup ........................................................... 2-886
90-69 : Outbound IP Connection Setup ............................................. 2-887
90-73 : Line Load Control .................................................................. 2-888
90-77 : LAN Link Speed Information ................................................. 2-889

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-01 : Copy Program ....................................................................... 2-891
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers ............................................... 2-895
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number ............................................. 2-896
92-04 : Extension Data Swap ............................................................ 2-897
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password ........................................... 2-900

xviii Table of Contents

 Issue 4.0

92-06 : Fill Command ........................................................................ 2-901

92-07 : Delete Command ................................................................... 2-903

Program 93: System Information

93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information .................................................. 3-905
93-02 : Trunk Information .................................................................. 3-906
93-03 : Extension Information ............................................................ 3-907
93-04 : Redial List .............................................................................. 3-910
93-05 : Department Group Information .............................................. 3-911
93-06 : IP Address List for 1st Party CTI Connection ........................ 3-912

SV9100 Programming Manual xix

Issue 4.0

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

xx Table of Contents
 LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1 SV9100 Terminal Keys for Entering Data ......................................................... 1-4

Table 1-2 UX5000 Terminal Keys for Entering Data ......................................................... 1-5

Table 1-3 Keys for Entering Names .................................................................................. 1-6

Table 1-4 Softkey Display Prompts ................................................................................... 1-7

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................................... 1-8

Table 2-1 Programming Modes ......................................................................................... 2-1

Table 2-2 License Information ......................................................................................... 2-71

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings ............................................................... 2-97

Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern ............................................................... 2-193

Table 2-5 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-194

Table 2-6 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-217

Table 2-7 Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-280

Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-363

Table 2-9 Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-374

Table 2-10 ED Patterns for DSS Console ....................................................................... 2-452

Table 2-11 Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-455

Table 2-12 Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-458

Table 2-13 47-02-16 Default Table ................................................................................ 2-581

Table 2-14 47-06-14 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-588

Table 2-15 47-07-03 Default Table ................................................................................. 2-591

Table 2-16 47-10-03 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-598

Table 2-17 Basic Tones ................................................................................................... 2-674

Table 2-18 Frequency 1/2 Table ..................................................................................... 2-690

SV9100 Programming Manual xxi

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-19 Ring Cycle Table ........................................................................................... 2-691

Table 2-20 Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-694

xxii List of Tables

 UNIVERGE® SV9100

Introduction
Chapter 1
SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING

Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first.

This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By
changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program
works. In this chapter, you find out about each program, the features that the
program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory.

SECTION 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at
the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on
each program is subdivided into the following headings:

Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for
each program are also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default
Setting for all programs. Along with the Description are the Conditions which
describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program.

The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the
program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or
exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to Section 3 How to Enter
Programming Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system access levels and
passwords.

Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by
the program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change
a program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did
not intend.

Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into
system memory. For example:

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-1

 Issue 4.0

1. Enter the programming mode.

2. 15-07-01

15-07-01 TEL
KY01 = *01

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial
pad. After you do, you will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of
the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number
(01), and that the options are being set for the extension. The second row of the
display “KY01 = 01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry
of 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right,
depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming
mode, refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below.

SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE

To enter programming mode:

1. Go to any working display telephone.

In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
2. Do not lift the handset.

3. Press Speaker.

4. ##.

Password

5. Dial the system password + Transfer.

Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the
passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup.

1-2 Introduction
Issue 4.0

User
Password Level Programs at this Level
Name

47544 necii 1 (MF) Manufacturer (MF):

All programs
12345678 tech 2 (IN) Installation (IN):
All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB
0000 ADMIN1 3 (SA) System Administrator – Level 1 (SA):
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17,
10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09,
15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08,
30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06,
41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14,
41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07,
90-18, 90-19
9999 ADMIN2 4 (SB) System Administrator – Level 2 (SB):
13-04, 13-05, 13-06

SECTION 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

To exit the programming mode:

When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit
(pressing the Answer key will exit the program option).

1. Press Answer key to exit the program options, if needed.

Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

2. Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System

Data" is displayed.

3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the
telephone to an idle mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank USB Drive is required. Insert the USB
Drive into the GCD-CP10 and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the USB
Drive. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that
a USB Drive can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved
requires a separate drive.

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-3

 Issue 4.0

SECTION 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS

Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter
data, edit data and move around in the menus.

Table 1-1 SV9100 Terminal Keys for Entering Data

SV9100 Terminal Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to...

0~9 and  Enter data into a program.

Transfer Complete the programming step you just made (e.g., pressing Enter on a
PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press Transfer to bypass
the entry without changing it.
Recall Delete the entry to the left (e.g., pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard).
Hold Delete or clear all characters to the right of the cursor.
Answer Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being viewed.
For example, if programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing Answer allows
you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing Answer again
allows you to select a new program in the 15-XX series. Pressing
Answer a third time allows you to enter a new program beginning with 1.
Pressing Answer one last time brings you to the beginning program
display, allowing you to enter any program number.
MIC Switch between the different input data fields by pressing MIC. The cursor
moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing MIC again moves the
cursor back to the middle row.
LINE KEYS Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These
settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1 (on)
to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE 3 = 15,
etc.
For programs with this option, the line key, which currently matches the
programmed setting, lights steady.
The display can also indicate Softkey, which will allow you to select the
values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed
settings.)
LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/flash into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3 Program an @ into a Speed Dialing bin.
VOL ▲ Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension etc.)
or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling forward.
VOL ▼ Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension etc.)
or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling backward.

1-4 Introduction
Issue 4.0

Table 1-2 UX5000 Terminal Keys for Entering Data

UX5000 Terminal Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to . . .

0~9 and  Enter data into a program.

HOLD Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing Enter on a
PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press HOLD to bypass
the entry without changing it.
CONF Delete the entry to the left (like pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard).
MIC Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being viewed.
For example, if you’re programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing MIC will
allow you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing MIC again
will allow you to select a new program in the 15- series. Pressing MIC a
third time will allow you to enter a new program beginning with ‘1’.
Pressing MIC one last time will bring you to the beginning program
display, allowing you to enter any program number.
FLASH Switch extension, line, etc. being programmed by pressing FLASH. The
cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing FLASH again
moves the cursor back to the middle row.
LINE KEYS Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These
settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1 (on)
to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE 3 = 15,
etc.
For programs with this option, the line key which currently matches the
programmed setting will light steady.
The display may also indicate Soft Keys which will allow you to select the
values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed
settings.)
LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/flash into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3 Program a @ into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
VOL ▲ Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 301
to 302, 303, etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit
Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the SV9100 accepts the data
before scrolling forward.
VOL ▼ Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 301 to
302, 303, etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the SV9100 accepts the data
before scrolling backward

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-5

 Issue 4.0

SECTION 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES

Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you
to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the
keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second
character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key
six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.

Table 1-3 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }  Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
 Enter characters:
 + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ  Ω ∞ ¢ £
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

1-6 Introduction
Issue 4.0

SECTION 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING

Each UNIVERGE SV9100 display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for

intuitive feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change
depending on where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey
located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.

_
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2


Pressing the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ scrolls between the menus.

_
Program Mode
CCIS Hard Mtnance


SECTION 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN

When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are
displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the
programs.

Table 1-4 Softkey Display Prompts

Softkey Display Prompts

If you press this

The system will. . .
Softkey . . .

back Go back one step in the program display.

You can press VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ to scroll forward or
backward through a list of programs.

 Scroll down through the available programs.

 Scroll up through the available programs.

select Select the currently displayed program.

 Move the cursor to the left.

 Move the cursor to the right.

-1 Move back through the available program options.

+1 Move forward through the available program options.

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-7

 Issue 4.0

SECTION 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES

The following table provides the capacities for the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

System

Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP) 80/144 channels

Classes of Service 15
Day/Night Mode Numbers 8
Day/Night Service Patterns 32
Dial Tone Detector 64
DTMF Receiver
Toll Restriction Classes 15
Verifiable Account Code Table 2000

Trunk

Trunk Port Number 400

Trunk Ports (Total): 400
 Analog Trunks 176
 BRI Trunk Ports 176
 T1/PRI Trunk Ports 400
 E&M Analog Trunk Ports 44
 DID Analog Trunk Ports 88
 VoIP Trunk Ports 400
DID Translation Tables 20
DID Translation Table Entries 4000
DISA:
 Classes of Service 15
 Users 15
Ring Groups 100
Tie Line Classes of Service 15
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15
Trunk Access Maps 400
Trunk Group Numbers 100
Trunk Routes 100

1-8 Introduction
Issue 4.0

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Extension

Telephone Extension Ports 960

 Multiline Terminals 256
 Single Line Phones/Analog Devices 256
 VoIP Extensions 512
 SIP DECT Wireless 504
DLCA:
 Physical Ports 01~16
LCA:
 Physical Ports 01~16
Telephone Extension Number Range 1~89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)

Virtual Extension Ports 512

Virtual Extension Number Range 1~89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)

PGD(2)-U10 ADP 56
ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters 240
UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless – SIP DECT Access Points Unlimited
Door Boxes 8
Door Box Numbers 1~8
DSS Consoles Numbers:
 60 Button DSS Console 32
Operator Access Number 0 (Default)
Operator Extension 15
Ringdown Assignments 960
SLT Adapters 16
HF-R Adapters 240

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-9

 Issue 4.0

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Speed Dialing

Speed Dialing Groups 64

Speed Dialing Bins 0~9999
Speed Dialing Table-Common 1000

Contact Center

Contact Center Groups 64

Contact Center Agent Extensions 960

ACI

ACI Groups 16
ACI Ports 96

Automated Attendant

VRS Message Numbers 1~100

Conference

Conference Circuits 64 - maximum

(32 Parties Per Conference)
96 - when the analog modem
function is not used.

Data Communication Interfaces

APR Software Port Numbers 449~512

APA Adapters 240
APR Adapters 240

Department and Pickup Groups

Department (Extension) Group Numbers 1~64

Call Pickup Group Numbers 1~64

Hotline

Internal Hotline 960

External Hotline 960

1-10 Introduction
Issue 4.0

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Paging and Park

Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 01~64

External Page Group Numbers 0, 1~8
External Speakers 9
 GCD-CP10 (1)
 PGD(2)-U10 ADP (1~8)
Park Group Numbers 1~64
Park Orbits 1~64

SMDR

SMDR Ports 1~8

VRS/VM8000 InMail

VRS/VM8000 InMail 1
VRS/VM8000 InMail Channels 16 (Note 1)
VRS Attendant Messages 3
VRS Recordable Messages 100
VM8000 InMail Ports 8 (Note 1)

VoIP

ADA2 (Recording Jack) Adapters 240

PSA (Power Failure) Adapters 256
RTP Ports 0~65535
RTCP Ports 0~65535
DSP Resources 256 (Note 2)
Note 1: The VRS/InMail supports up to 16 ports and they are shared by the VM8000 InMail and VRS.
Note 2: The maximum number of VOIP DSP Resources depend on which license is installed.

Passwords

Programming Passwords:
Level 1 (MF) 47544
PCPro/WebPro User Name: necii
Level 2 (IN) 12345678
PCPro/WebPro User Name: tech
Level 3 (SA) 0000
PCPro/WebPro User Name: ADMIN1

SV9100 Programming Manual 1-11

 Issue 4.0

Table 1-5 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Level 4 (SB) 9999

PCPro/WebPro User Name: ADMIN2
Programming Password Users 8

Footnotes

Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering
feature in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual.

1-12 Introduction
 UNIVERGE® SV9100

Programming the UNIVERGE SV9100 Chapter 2

SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM

The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to

properly program your UNIVERGE UNIVERGE SV9100 system.

The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes.

Table 2-1 Programming Modes

Program Number : Program Name

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
Program 31 : Paging Setup
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-1

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-1 Programming Modes (Continued)

Program Number : Program Name

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

Program 41 : ACD Setup
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : InMail
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service (CCIS)
Program 51 : NetLink Service
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Program 92 : Copy Program
Program 93: System Information

2-2 Programming the UNIVERGE SV9100

 Program: 10
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming.
Extension users can also dial Service Code 828 to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of
Service.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Year 13~97 No Setting Enter 2 digits for year (13~97).

02 Month 01~12 No Setting Enter 2 digits (01~12) for the month.

03 Day 01~31 No Setting Enter 2 digits (01~31) for the day.

04 Week 1~7 No Setting Enter digit for the day of the week
(Sun~Sat) (1=Sunday, 7=Saturday).

05 Hour 00~23 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the hour (00~23).

06 Minute 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the minute (00~59).

07 Second 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the second

(00~59).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Clock/Calendar Display

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-3

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Country Code Dial (up to 1 Enter the country code.

four digits):
0~9, , #

02 International Dial (up to No setting Enter the international access

Access Code four digits): code.
0~9, , #

03 Other Area Dial (up to two 9 Enter the other area access
Access Code digits): code
0~9, , #

04 Area Code Dial (up to six No setting Enter the local area code.
digits):
0~9, , #

05 Trunk Access Dial (up to No setting Enter the trunk access code
Code eight digits): digits required to place an
0~9, , # outgoing call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-4 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each blade.
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have
the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the blade.


NOTE
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.

For CNF PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Logical Port Number 0~960 0

For DLCA PKG Setup s

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~16

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-5

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Terminal Type (B1) 0 = Not set 0

1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH)
4 = --- Not Used ---
5 = --- Not Used ---
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = --- Not Used ---

02 Logical Port Number (B1) 0 = Not set 0

1 = Multiline Terminal (1~960)
2 = SLT Adapter (1~960)
3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) (1~960)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = --- Not Used ---

03 Additional Data 0 = No Setting 0

3 = BCH: 01 ~16

04 --- Not Used ---

05 --- Not Used ---

B-Channel 2

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 Terminal Type (B2) 0 = Not set 0

6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)

2-6 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

B-Channel 2

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Logical Port Number (B2) 0 = Not set 0

6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/Tone Ringer)
= (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) = (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) = (1~96)
12 = APR (for B2 mode) (193~512)

08 Multiline Telephone Type 0 = DT3** 0

1 = Dterm 8
2 = Dterm 7

09 Side Option Information 0 = No option 0

1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM

10 Bottom Option Information 0 = No option 0

(Only applies to DTL–style
telephones)
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
4 = ---Not Used ---
5 = BCA

11 Handset Option 0 = No option 0

Information 1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH)

For LCA PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~960 0

03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1~57 (-15.5 +12.5dB) 32 (0dB)

04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1~57 (-15.5 +12.5dB) 32 (0dB)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-7

 Issue 4.0

For COTA Unit Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~400 0

For GCD-PVAA Unit Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~400 0

For ODTA PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~400 0

02 2/4 Wire 0 = 2 Wire 1

1 = 4 Wire

03 E&M Line Control Method 0 = TYPE I 0

1 = TYPE V

2-8 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

For DIOP PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 LD/OPX Specification 0 = LD Trunk 0

1 = OPX

02 Logical Port Number 0 = 1~400 (LD Trunk) 0

1 = 1~960 (OPX)

For BRIA PKG Setup

Input Data
ISDN Line Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No

01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not Used 1

1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point (Not used)
3 = NW Mode (Leased Line)
4 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line,
Fixed Layer1 = NT)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line) (Not used)

02 Logical Port Number 0 = Not Used 0

 The starting port number of 1 = T-Point (1~400)
a BRI line is displayed. Two logic 2 = S-Point (1~960) (Not used)
ports are automatically assigned to 3 = NW Mode (Leased Line) (1~256)
a BRI line. 4 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line)
(1~256)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line,
Fixed Layer1 = NT) (1~256)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line) (1~960)
(Not used)

03 Connection Type 0 = Point-to-Multipoint 0

1 = Point-to-Point

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-9

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1

 Each timer value of Layer 3
is set up for every type using
Program 81-06 (T-Bus).
05 CLIP Information Announcement 0 = Disable 1
Based on this setting, the system 1 = Enable
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.

06 Connection Bus Mode 0 = Extended Passive Bus 0

1 = Short Passive Bus

07 S-point DDI digits 0~4 0

08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enblock Sending 1

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Overlap Sending

09 Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Called Party Number
[Only when Dialing Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending]

10 Master/Slave System 0 = Slave System 0

If set to 0, system is synchronized to the 1 = Master System
network clock. If set to 1, system is not
synchronized to the network clock. (For
NW Mode)

11 Networking System No. (for NW 0~50 0

Mode)

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

17 ISDN Line Ringback Tone 0 = Disable 0

If Telco does not provide ringback tone, 1 = Enable
SV9100 can if set to 1 (Enable).

18 Type of Number 0 = Unknown 2

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = International number
2 = National number
3 = Network specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number

2-10 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No

19 Numbering Plan Identification 0 = Unknown 1

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = ISDN numbering plan
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan

23 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

24 --- Not Used ---

25 Layer 1 Supervision 0 = Disable 0

When set to 0, Layer 1 deactivation is 1 = Enable
not considered to be a fault, so the
channel can be usable and alarm #10
not issued. When set to 1, Layer 1
deactivation is considered to be a fault,
so the channel will be skipped and
alarm #10 issued.

For PRTA PKG Setup

Input Data
ISDN Line Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not Used 1

1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point (Not used)
3 = NW Mode (Leased Line)
4 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line,
Fixed Layer1 = NT)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line) (Not used)

02 Logical Port Number 0 = Not used 0

 The start port number of a 1 = T-Point (1~400)
PRI line is displayed. 2 = S-Point (1~960) (Not used)
3 = NW Mode (Leased Line) (1~256)
4 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line)
(1~256)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected Line,
Fixed Layer1 = NT) (1~256)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line) (Not used)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-11

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1

 Each timer value of Layer 3
is set up for each type in
Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
05 CLIP Information 0 = Disable 1
Based on this setting, the system 1 = Enable
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.

06 Length of Cable 0 = Level 1 (0~40m) 2

1 = Level 2 (40~81m)
2 = Level 3 (81~122m)
3 = Level 4 (122~162m)
4 = Level 5 (162~200m)

07 --- Not Used ---

08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enbloc Sending 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Overlap Sending

09 Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility 0

ISDN Protocol definition (Only when 1 = Called Party Number
Dialing Sending Mode (10-03-08) is set
for 1 (Overlap Sending)

10 Master/Slave System 0 = Slave System 0

If set to 0, system is synchronized to the 1 = Master System
network clock. If set to 1, system is not
synchronized to the network clock. (For
NW Mode)

11 Networking System No. (for NW 0~50 0

Mode)

13 Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit 0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity) 2

If the transmit/receive voltage is less 1 = Level 1
than the setting in 10-03-13, the system 2 = Level 2
considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and 3 = Level 3
the PRTA does not come up. 4 = Level 4
5 = Level 5
6 = Level 6
7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity)

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

2-12 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

16 PRI Service Two B-Channel Transfer 0 = Off 0

Turn On or Off the ability to use the 1 = On
ISDN-PRI 2 B-Channel Transfer
service.

17 ISDN Ringback Tone 0 = Disable 1

If Telco does not provide ringback tone, 1 = Enable
SV9100 can if 10-03-17 is set
to 1 (Enable).

18 Type of Number 0 = Unknown 2

ISDN Protocol definition. 1 = International number
Select the number type for the ISDN 2 = National number
circuit. 3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number

19 Numbering Plan Identification 0 = Unknown 1

ISDN Protocol definition. 1 = ISDN numbering plan
Select the Numbering Plan used for the 2 = Data numbering plan
ISDN circuit. 3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan

20 Network Exchange Selection 0 = Standard (same as NI-2) 0

Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN 1 = reserved
circuit. 2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2

21 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

23 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-13

 Issue 4.0

For DTI (T1) PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~400 0

The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.

02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1

1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)

03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 0

1 = AMI/ZCS

04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0

1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet

05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1

1 = External

06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

2-14 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

For IPLE PKG Setup

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 VoIP Type IPLE

02 Number of Channel 256

03 Number of Voice Channels 256

For GCD-VM00 PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~480 0

For GCD-CCTA PKG Setup

Input Data
Physical Port Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~400 0

The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.

02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1

1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)

03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 0

1 = AMI/ZCS

04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0

1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet

05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1

1 = External

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-15

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

Conditions

 When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have
the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually.

 The system must have a blade installed to view/change the options for that type of blade.

Feature Cross Reference

 Universal Slots

2-16 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal Music
on Hold, the system can provide a service tone to callers on hold, or one of eleven synthesized
selections.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Music on Hold 0 = Internal MOH 2 The Music on Hold (MOH)

Source Selection source can be internal
1 = External MOH
2 = Service Tone (synthesized) or from a
customer-provided music
3 = VMDB
source.
The customer-provided source
can connect to a PGD(2)-U10
ADP or the connector on the
side of the Base Cabinet MOH/
IN connection.
Trunk MOH and Extension
MOH music source use the
same Music on Hold source.

02 Music on Hold [If Item 1 is 0] 1

Tone Selection
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[If Item 1 is 1, 2, or 3]
1~100 = VRS Message
Number

03 Audio Gain Setup 1~57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) 32

(0dB)

04 Sub-Music on Hold 0 = Follow PRG10-04- 0

Source Selection 01
1 = Internal MOH
2 = External MOH
3 = VMDB

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-17

 Issue 4.0

Input Data

05 Sub-Music on Hold [If Item 4 is 1]

Tone Selection
0 = No Tone
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[If Item 4 is 3]
0 = No Tone
1~100 = VRS Message
Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

 Background Music

 Music on Hold

2-18 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits (5~8) on PGD(2)-
U10 ADP are used for General Purpose Relay.
Input Data

Input Data
General Purpose Relay No. 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Slot No. Slot No: 0~24 0-0-0

Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No. DLCA Port: 0~16
Relay No: 0, 5~8
 After each entry,
press the Transfer Key
to advance to the next
entry.
02 Drive Timer Setup 0~64800 0
0 = No Setting
1 = 0.1s
2 = 0.2s
3 = 0.3s
:
10 = 1.0s
:
64800 = 6480s

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-19

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-06 : ISDN - BRI Setup to configure the ISDN - BRI Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI),
mode of operation, and Service Profile Identifier (SPID) number for each circuit B-Channels.

Input Data
SLOT Number 1 ~ 24

ISDN - BRI Circuit 1~4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 TEI Selection 0 = Select by SPID number 0

Select the method the system 1 = Select by Channel ID number
uses when assigning Terminal
Endpoint Identifier (TEI) values
to BRI ports.

02 DID Mode 0 = Route by Called Party Number 0

1 = Route by Redirecting Number

03 SPID 1 Dial up to 20 digits No Setting

04 SPID 2 Dial up to 20 digits No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 ISDN Compatibility

2-20 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how
a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED
flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call
starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending
on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.

Input Data

Item No. Description Input Data Default

01 Pre-Ringing 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

Conditions

 Used with Analog Trunks only.

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

 Synchronous Ringing

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-21

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the GCD-CP10 for
either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The GCD-CP10 has 80 circuits initially, and an addition 64
circuits are added when a GPZ-BS10 is installed. These are used as follows:
 Extension DTMF receiver for single line telephone
 Trunk DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection for analog trunks

Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number 01~144

Item
Input Data Default Setting
No.

01 0 = Common Use Circuit/Resource 01~32 = 1 (Extensions)

1 = Extension Only Circuit/Resource 33~80 = 2 (Trunks)
2 = Trunk Only Circuit/Resource 81~144 = 0
 The GCD-CP10 has 80
channel DSP resources
(receivers) only for basic
chassis. When a GPZ-BS10 is
installed there are 64 DSP
resources (receivers) available.
 In case 0 = Common is
selected and if 14-02-10 (Caller
ID receive ability) is set to
“Yes”, DSP resources are always
allocated to analog trunks not
analog extensions. If 14-02-10 is
set to “No”, DSP resources can
be used for both analog trunks
and analog extensions.

2-22 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Caller ID

 Central Office Calls, Placing

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-23

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-12 : GCD-CP10 Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-12 : GCD-CP10 Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default
Gateway addresses.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 192.168.0.10 Set for

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 GCD-CP10.
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 The setting of

Mask 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 Subnet Mask is
invalid when all
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
Host Addresses
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 are 0.
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
If the network
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 section is:
255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0
0,
255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
127,
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224
128.0,
255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
191.255,
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of
Subnet Mask is
invalid.

03 Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 IP Address for

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 Router.
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

2-24 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

04 Time Zone 0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours) +7 Determine the
(-5 hours) offset from
Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its
respective value.
For example,
Eastern Time (US
and Canada) has
a GMT offset of -5.
The program data
would then be 7
(0= -12, 1= -11,
2= -10, 3= -9, 4= -
8, 5= -7, 6= -6, 7=
-5, ……24= +12)

05 NIC 0 = Auto Detect 0 NIC Auto

Interface Negotiate
1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex (GCD-CP10)
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 1Gbps, Full Duplex

07 NAPT 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Set the IP address

Router IP on the WAN side
Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
of router.
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
(Default
Gateway
[WAN])

08 ICMP 0 = Enable 0 0 = signaling

Redirect packets WILL
1 = Disable
follow ICMP
redirect
messages.
1 = signaling
packets WILL
NOT follow ICMP
redirect
messages.
 for voice packets
and ICMP refer
to PRG 84-27-
14.

09 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 172.16.0.10

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-25

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

10 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

Mask
240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255

11 NIC Setup 0 = Auto Detect 0 Set for GPZ-IPLE

1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex

13 DNS 0.0.0.0
Primary
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
Address Set for adding a
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
14 DNS function for DNS.
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Secondary
Address

15 DNS Port 0~65535 53

17 IPL NIC Port 0 = MDI 0

Setting
1 = MDI-X

18 GCD-CP10 1000~1500 1450 Define the MTU

Network size for the
Setup -
CCPU MTU packets sent from
IP address
defined in PRG
10-12-01.

19 GCD-CP10 1000~1500 1450 Define the MTU

Network size for the
Setup - IPL
MTU packets sent from
IP address
defined in PRG
10-12-09.

2-26 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

20 SSLv3 0 = Disable 0 Set whether to

Setting use the SSLv3 in
1 = Enable
SMTP.
0 (Disable) is
encrypted with
TLSv1.
This data
requires a reset
to apply changed
data to the
system.

21 Default 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00-00-00-00-00-00

Gateway
MAC
Address
(Read Only)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-27

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the GCD-CP10 blade.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 DHCP Server 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the built-in DHCP

Mode Server.
1 = Enable

02 Lease Time Days 0~255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to a

client.
Hour 0~23 0 hour
 Press the Transfer Key
Minutes 1~59 30 minutes to increment to the next
setting data.
05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable 1 If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting
1 = Enable determines if DHCP resource is
enabled or disabled.
When enabled, the system does
not update DHCP (Option 54
DHCP Server info) if 10-12-09 IP
Address is changed.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-28 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP
Server leases to a client.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 The Range of the IP address Minimum: 172.16.0.100

to Lease.
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
When Maximum has not been 128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
entered, the maximum value
equals the minimum value. 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254

When Single is selected in Maximum: 172.16.5.254

10-13-04, only 1 scope range
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
can be entered.
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
When Divide Same Network is
selected in 10-13-04, a 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
maximum of 10 scope ranges
can be entered.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-29

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server
needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.

Input Data
Client Number 1~960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
The IP address should be
01 assigned out of the scope range 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
set up in Program 10-14.
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-30 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to
each client.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Router Code number 0~255 3 (Fixed)

Set the Router IP address.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 DNS Server Code number 0~255 6 (Fixed)

Set IP address of DNS Server.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 TFTP Server Code number 0~255 66 (Fixed)

Set the name for the TFTP
Maximum 64 character strings No setting
Server.

04 DRS Code number 0~255 161 (Fixed)

IP address 172.16.0.10
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

05 MGC Code number 0~255 129 (Fixed)

IP address 172.16.0.10
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

06 Client Host Name Code number 0~255 12 (Fixed)

Set the Client Host Name.
Maximum 64 character strings No setting

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-31

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 DNS Domain Name Code number 0~255 15 (Fixed)

Set the DNS Domain Name.
Maximum 20 character strings No setting

08 Download Protocol Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set Download Protocol used
Sub code number 163
for AutoConfig (for DT700
Series). 1 = FTP 1
2 = HTTP

09 Encryption Information Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set an Encryption Information
Sub code number 164
used for AutoConfig (for DT700
series). Maximum 128 character No setting
strings

10 FTP Server Address Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set a FTP Server Address
Sub code number 141
used for AutoConfig.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

11 Config File Name Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set a File Name used for
Sub code number 151
AutoConfig.
Maximum 15 character strings No setting

12 Vender Class ID Code number 0~255 60 (Fixed)

Maximum 256 character NECDT700

strings

13 SNMP Server Code number 0~255 69 (Fixed)

IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

14 POP3 Server Code number 0~255 70 (Fixed)

IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

2-32 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

16 SIP Server (IP Address) Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

17 SIP Server (Domain Name) Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed)

Maximum 20 character strings No setting

18 FTP Server Code number 0~255 141 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

19 Config File Name Code number 0~255 151 (Fixed)

Maximum 15 character strings No setting

20 LDS Server 1 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

21 LDS Server 2 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

22 LDS Server 3 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

23 LDS Server 4 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

24 Next Server IP Address IP address

0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-33

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

27 SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0~255 168 (Fixed)

Port: 1~65535 5080

28 Config File Name Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Sub-Code number 0~255 152

Up to 15 characters No setting

29 Config File Name Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Sub-Code number 0~255 153

Up to 15 characters No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-34 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper information.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Gatekeeper Mode 0 = No Gatekeeper 0

Set IP Address either 1 = Automatic
automatically or manually if 2 = Manual
using an external
Gatekeeper.

02 Gatekeeper IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

04 Preferred Gatekeeper Maximum 124 characters No setting

When 10-17-01 is set to 1,
use this to set the preferred
ID of multiple Gatekeepers.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 IP Trunk – H.323

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-35

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered to the outside
H.323 Gatekeeper.

Input Data
Number of Alias 1~6

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Alias Address Dial up to 12 digits No setting

Set the telephone number (0~9, , #)
(Alias Address) to external
gatekeeper.

02 Alias Address Type 0 = E164 0

Set the Alias Address Type
to external gatekeeper.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 IP Trunk – H.323

2-36 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource on
the VoIP blade.

Input Data
Slot Number 1

DSP Resource Number 01~256

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 0 = Common use for both IP Resource 1 = 1

extensions and trunks Resource 2~256 = 0
1 = IP Extension
2 = SIP Trunk
3 = CCIS/Networking
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
6 = Common without Unicast
Paging
7 = Multicast Paging
8 = Unicast Paging

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-37

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for
communicating to external equipment.

Input Data
Type of External Equipment 1 = CTI Server
2 = Contact Center
3 = Not Used
4 = Networking System
5 = SMDR Output
6 = DIM Output
7 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
9 = 1st Party CTI
10 = Contact Center Agent Control
11 = O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service
14 = IP-DECT Directory Access
15 = Presense

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 TCP Port 0~65535 External Device 1 (CTI Server) = 0

External Device 2 (Contact Center) = 4000
External Device 4 (Networking System) =
30000
External Device 5 (SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM Output) = 0
External Device 11 (O&M Server) = 8010
External Device 12 (Traffic Report Output) = 0
External Device 13 (Room Data Output for
Hotel Service) = 0
External Device 14 (IP-DECT Directory
Access) = 0
External Device 15 (Presense) = 0

03 Keep Alive Time 1~255 (sec) 30

2-38 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-39

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-21 : GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-21 : GCD-CP10 Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such as the baud rate of
COM port and the switch for control on GCD-CP10 blade.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 External Source 0 = External MOH (AUX2)/ 1

I/O Selection on External Speaker(AUX1)
GCD-CP10
1 = BGM source (AUX2)/ External
Determines the Speaker(AUX1)
external music
2 = External MOH (AUX2)/BGM
source input/
output selection source (AUX1)
for GCD-CP10  Relationships between CN
CN8 and CN9.
number and Relay number are as
follows:
AUX2 = Relay2
AUX1 = Relay1

05 General 0 = Off 0
Purpose Relay
Switch
1 = Relay 1 on GCD-CP10
Selection on 2 = Relay 2 on GCD-CP10
GCD-CP10

06 Drive Timer 0~64800 0

Setup
0 = No Setting
1 = 0.1s
2 = 0.2s
3 = 0.3s
:
10 = 1.0s
:
64800 = 6480s

07 Modem Support 0 = Off 0

1 = On

2-40 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-41

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected
and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for SV9100
system interconnection.

Input Data
System Number 001~1000

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 System 0 = No (Disable) 0
Interconnection
1 = Yes (Enable)

02 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 Call Control Port 1~65535 1720

04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits (0~9) None

05 Keep Alive Mode 0 = Disable 0

for SIP
1 = Enable

06 SIP Profile 1 = Profile 1 1

2 = Profile 2
3 = Profile 3
4 = Profile 4
5 = Profile 5
6 = Profile 6
 With Version 2000 or lower CPU
Software only two SIP Profiles are
supported.

Conditions
None

2-42 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-43

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-24 : Daylight Saving Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Saving Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the telephone
system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight
savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Daylight Saving Mode 0 = Disable 1

Enable/Disable the system ability to adjust the 1 = Enable
time for daylight savings/standard time.

02 Time for Daylight Saving 00:00~23:59 02:00

Enter the time of day when the system should
adjust for daylight savings time.

03 Start Month (Summer Time) 1~12 3

Enter the month when the system should (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01~12).

04 Start of Week 0 = Last Week of Month 2

Enter the week of the month when the system 0~5
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time. The week will start on the day listed in
10-24-05.

05 Start of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week when the system (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).

06 End of Month 1~12 11

Enter the month when the system should (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
adjust the time for standard time (01~12).

07 End of Week 0 = Last Week of Month 1

Enter the week of the month when the system 0~5
should adjust the time for standard time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.

2-44 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 End of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week when the system (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Clock/Calendar Display

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-45

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix registered to the outside
gatekeeper.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Gateway Prefix Entry 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Gateway Prefix Value Up to 12 digits (0~9, , #) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-46 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-27 : IP System ID
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

System ID is related with the System ID 128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
in the Numbering Plan (Program 192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254
11-01-03). When the digits are analyzed
and the system ID is determined from
the SV9100 data set in the Numbering
Plan, the networking call is sent to the
IP Address set in this program.
The IP Address should be the IP
Address of the peer CPU (Program
10-12-01).

02 Call Procedure Port 1~65535 1730

The Port Number should be set with the
same value as the H.225 setup port in
Program 84-02-33.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-47

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking.

Input Data

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

01 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None

Set the domain name of (ex.:[email protected])
the SIP-URL.

02 Host Name Up to 48 Characters None

Set the host name of (ex.:[email protected])
the SIP-URL.

03 Transport Protocol 0 = UDP 0

Set the protocol for the 1 = TCP
connection. 2 = TLS

05 Domain Assignment 0 = IP Address 0

If the information from 1 = Domain Name
Telco was a domain
name
([email protected])
then set to domain. If
the information for
Telco was a IP address
then set to IP Address.

2-48 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

06 IP Trunk Port Binding 0 = Disable 0

Trunk port binding is 1 = Enable
only used for SIP trunks
to the provider in Non-
Registration Mode only.
When this is disabled,
an inbound call comes
in and follows your DID
routing but it comes in
on the first available
trunk. When enabled,
the inbound call comes
in and follows your
normal DID routing but
maps to that specified
trunk. If that trunk is
busy, it sends back a
busy unless you build a
hunt group. To build the
hunt group, it
references command
14-12-02 (pilot register
ID). This points you to
command 10-36-02. All
numbers with the same
pilot are in the same
hunt group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-49

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound/
inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.

If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then

NOTE
removed or not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default
settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the SV9100 still checks the settings in the
remaining 10-29 programs.

Input Data

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

01 Default Proxy 0 = Off 0

(Outbound)
1 = On
Set whether or not
the SIP message is
always sent through
the Default Proxy.

02 Default Proxy 0 = Off 0

(Inbound)
1 = On
Need to be
registered in
registration mode.
Set whether or not
the SIP message is
always received
through the Default
Proxy.

2-50 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

03 Default Proxy IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
This is optional and 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
used if the provider
gives you a proxy
address that is
different than the
registration address.
If the provider is
using domain names
instead of IP
addresses, leave
this at default.

04 Default Proxy Port 0 ~ 65535 5060

Number
Set the port number
of the Default Proxy.

05 Registrar Mode 0 = None 0

Set the mode 1 = Manual
registered in the
registration server.

06 Registrar IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Set the IP address of 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
the SIP registration
server.

07 Registrar Port 0 ~ 65535 5060

11 Registrar Domain Up to 128 Characters None

Name
Set the domain
name of the
registration server.

12 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None

Specify the domain
name of the SIP
server.

13 Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters None

Specify the host
name of the SIP
server.

14 SIP Carrier Choice 0 ~ 26 0

Select the carrier 0 = Standard
type of the SIP 1 ~ 26 = A ~ Z
server.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-51

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

15 Registration Expiry 120 ~ 65535 seconds 3600

(Expire) Time
Set the expiration
time when the SIP
trunk registers to the
SIP server. When
half the time set here
passes, the
registration update is
automatically done.

16 Register Sub Mode 0 = Off (Allow invalid Invite 0

Prevents an invalid message)
Invite message. If 1 = On (Deny invalid Invite
"the register message)
information that
SV9100 send to SIP
server" and "the
Invite information
that SV9100 receive"
are different,
SV9100 sends “404
Not Found”
Message. If PRG10-
29-05 Register Mode
is 0:Off, it is
necessary to set
0:off in PRG10-29-
16.

19 Keep Alive by 0 = Disable 0

Option Message
1 = Enable

20 Authentication Trial 0~9 1

21 NAT Router 0 = Not used 0

1 = Used

22 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

23 MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ 00-00-00-

(Read Only) FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00-00-00

24 NAPT Router IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

2-52 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-53

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the AspireNet
networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking.

The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination SV9100/UX5000, if the
response is not received the retry count will start. If a response is not received within the number of
retries, the networking link will be taken out of service. When the link is taken out of service:
 Any calls that are in progress will be released.
 Park Hold orbits will be released.
 No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.

The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Keep Alive Interval 0~65535 seconds 0

This program is used to set the
interval of the Keep Alive timer.
The SV9100/UX5000 does not
send Keep Alive when this item
is set to 0. If this entry is greater
than 0, networked PRI spans
which are using Kentrox DSUs
will not re-sync when removed
from service, then returned to
service.

02 Keep Alive Retry Timer 1~255 5

Set how many times
theSV9100/ UX5000 resends
Keep Alive.

2-54 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions

 The Keep Alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for the link to
be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold orbits to be released. For example, if
an ISDN NetLink connection is disconnected at Layer 1, then the Keep Alive message cannot be
sent, therefore the Keep Alive operation will not occur.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-55

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation to assign the number of B-channels to be
used for each ISDN blade. This allows for fractional PRIs when used with multiple site networking. If this
program is limited to less than "23" on one side of the network, then it also limits both inbound and
outbound network calls. For example, when you select 10 channels then only channels 1 to 10 will be
available. If a call is attempted on channels 11 to 30 the caller will receive busy tone. This also applies on
the other side of the network as well.

The setting is for each slot within the SV9100. Ensure that you select the correct slot before making any
changes.

This program will not affect a PRI card set as Trunk or Station mode.

Input Data
Slot Number 1~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Maximum Channels 1~23 23

Set the maximum number of
channels that can be used with PRI
NetLink.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-56 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy options
for SIP extensions.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration Expire Time 60 ~ 65535 3600

After this time expires, the UAs are
forced to re-register with the CPU. This
allows the CPU to keep a current
location of the entire end UAs.

02 Authentication Mode 0 = Disable 0

Check here if a password is desired for 1 = Enable
the IP SIP phones to register. When
checked, 15-05-16 must have a
password entered and the SIP phone
must have the same password. When
using Authentication, the station
number is the authorization name.

03 SIP Registrar/Proxy Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None

Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.

04 SIP Registrar/Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters None

Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.

05 SIP Registrar/Proxy Information 0 = No (Disable) 0

Basic Setup - NAT Mode
1 = Yes ( Enable)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-57

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration
information.

Input Data
Register ID 0~31

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

01 Registration 0 = Disable 0
Determine if the SIP 1 = Enable
trunk information is
registered.

02 User ID Up to 32 Characters None

Set the SIP trunk
User ID.

03 Authentication Up to 64 Characters None

User ID
Set the SIP trunk
Authentication User
ID.

04 Authentication Up to 32 Characters None

Password
Set the SIP trunk
authentication
password.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-58 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UPnP Mode 0 = Disable 0

Router must support UPnP. 1 = Enable

02 Retry Time 0,60 ~ 3600 60

(1~59 cannot be input)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-59

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-38 : BGM Resource Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup to configure the Background Music Source input.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 BGM Resource Type 0 = CPU IN 0

(MOH/IN)
1 = ACI Port

02 ACI Port Number for BGM Source 0 ~ 96 0

(only used if 10-38-01 is set to 1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

 Background Music

2-60 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Fractional 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-61

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector to assign System Number/Slot Number,
ESIU Port Number and Circuit Number settings used by the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

Input Data
System Number 1~50

Slot Number 1~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Number/Slot System No. Slot No. 0

Number
0 = Not Used 0 = No Setting
The User can set the 1 ~ 50 1 ~ 24
System ID when NetLink
is active.
ESIU Slot No. used by
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

02 ESIU Port Number 0 = No Setting 0

ESIU Port No. used by 1 ~ 16
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

03 Circuit Number 0 = No Setting 0

Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 1 ~ 2 = Line No.
ADP Line Number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-62 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0~30 (0 = No setting) 0

02 Logical Trunk Port Number 0~400 0

03 Logical Station Port Number 0~896 0

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1

05 Calling Party Number 0 = No 1

1 = Yes

06 --- Not Used ---

07 --- Not Used ---

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

 Hotel/Motel

 Transfer

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-63

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-46 : DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-46 : DT800/DT700 Server Information Setup to setup the information of SIP Multiline
(DT700 series) Server.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Register Mode 0 = Normal 0

Normal: 1 = Auto
When the phone boots up, it 2 = Manual
reports the ext. assigned in the
phone or chooses the next
available extension in the system.
Password is not required.
Auto:
If set to Auto, the SIP user name
and password must be entered on
the actual IP phone. These
settings must match 84-22/
15-05-27, or the phone does not
come on-line.
Manual:
When the phone boots up, it
prompts user to enter a user ID
and password before logging in. If
the user name and password are
programmed in the SIP User
settings in the telephone, it comes
up without prompting the user. It
checks this user ID/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is
no match, the phone does not
come on-line.

04 Server Name Up to 32 characters sipphd

Assign the Server name to be
used in the SIP URL.

2-64 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

06 Register Port 0~65535 5080

Assign the port number in which
the SIP messages are sent to on
the IPLE. This same port number
must be assigned in the SIP
Multiline terminals.
If this command is changed, it
requires a CPU reset.
When using NetLink (Program 51-
01-01) this Program is not used
and Program 51-17-01 will be
used per each System ID.

07 Encryption Mode 0 = Off 0

1 = On

08 Encryption Type 0 = Mode1 0

09 One Time Password Up to 10 characters None 10-46-07

(0~9, , #)

10 Start Port 1~960 1 10-46-01

11 Multicast IP Address 224.0.0.0~ 224.0.0.10

Set the Multicast IP address so 239.255.255.255
that two or more main devices
don’t overlap on the same
network, or if Multicast is used by
other IP services.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-65

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

12 Multicast Port 0~65535 30000

The port number that is used for
paging will change based upon the
following information.
The formula for the ports that will
be used is:
Starting port number assigned in
10-46-12 + Management ID * 2
The value of the Management ID
is from 1 to 64. The Management
ID will count up sequentially, for
example:
10-46-12 = 3000
The first page the system makes
will use port 30002 (3000 + 1*2).
The second page the system
makes will use port 30004 (3000 +
2*2).
The Management ID will
increment every time the page is
used. After the Management ID
reaches 64 it will start over, so the
next page will use Management ID
1.
The max. port starting from 3000
would be 30128 (3000 +64*2)

13 Subscribe Session Port 0~65535 5081

When using NetLink (Program 51-
01-01) this Program is not used
and Program 51-17-02 will be
used per each System ID.

14 NAT Mode 0 = Off 0

When the system controls the SIP 1 = On
multiline terminal via the NAT
router, this system data is set to
On.

2-66 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-67

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of Terminal
License Server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Register Port of 0~65535 6080

TCP I/F

02 TCP Keep Alive 1~255 seconds 5

Time

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-68 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-48 : License Activation
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Software Key Code 20-digit character None

02 Activation Code 8-digit hexadecimal number None

03 Feature Code 7-digit number None

Key Operation for Item 03

Transfer key:
Edit next feature code
 Up to 10 feature codes are possible to input at once.
 Register the license when 10th feature code is edited.

Soft Key2 (BACK):

Edit previous feature code

Soft Key3 (SUBMIT):

Register the license

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-69

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-49 : License File Activation
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via USB
memory which is issued from the license server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Save License File Dial 1 + TRF

on USB Drive
(Press TRF to cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-70 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-50 : License Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system.

Input Data

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 Feature Code Name Refer to Table 2-2 License

Information on page 2-71.

02 License Quantity 0~32767

03 Free License Quantity 0~32767

04 Free License Remaining Days 0~9999

Refer to the following table to assist with licensing information.

Table 2-2 License Information

Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)

This license number is determined

according to number of secondary sites.
For example, if you have one (1) Primary
and three (3) Secondary sites networked;
three (3) licenses are needed. All
0002 SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC-01 NetLink 1 49
licenses are activated at the Primary site.

With each "SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC-

01" you receive (32) "SV9100 IP
RESOURCE- LIC 01" licenses.

0007 SV9100 HM LIC Hotel/Motel On/Off –

0017 SV9100 REMOVE LIC On/Off –

0030 SV9100 ENCRYPTION LIC Encryption On/Off –

0031 SV9100 NAT TRAVERSAL LIC NAT Traversal On/Off –

0041 SV9100 XMLPRO LIC XML Pro On/Off –

0042 SV9100 VIDEO MCU LIC Video MCU On/Off –

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-71

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)

Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)

0046 SV9100 PMS LIC PMS On/Off –

0047 SV9100 REMOTE CONF LIC-01 Remote Conference 1 20 –

0048 SV9100 HW MIGRATION LIC H/W migration On/Off –

0049 SV9100 MULTI-DEVICE Multi-Device 1 512 –

SV9100 WEB VIDEO Video Conference with

0080 1 32 –
CONFERENCE WebRTC

0111 SV9100 1ST PARTY CTI LIC-01 1st Party CTI (Ethernet) 1 256 1st Party CTI (Ethernet) xx client

0112 SV9100 3RD PARTY CTI-LIC 01 3rd Party CTI Client 0 999 –

0123 SV9100 OAI LIC OAI Interface On/Off –

Required for each port TDM/IP station

0300 SV9100 RESOURCE - LIC 01 System Port 1 1296 port, trunk port, etc., that connects to the
system.

0411 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R1) Version R1 On/Off –

0413 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R3) Version R3 On/Off –

0414 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R4) Version R4 On/Off –

0415 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R5) Version R5 On/Off –

SV9100 INMAIL VRS PORT-LIC

1001 VRS Port 1 16 –
01

1012 SV9100 INMAIL VM BOX-LIC 01 VM Box 1 896 –

SV9100 INMAIL EMAIL

1014 InMail Email Client 1 896 –
CLIENT-LIC 01

SV91/93 UM8000 FAX PORT-LIC

1402 UMS FAX Port 1 4 1 Port FAX
01

SV91/93 UM8000 TTS PORT-LIC 1 Port of Text-to-Speech language for

1403 UMS TTS Port 1 6
01 Microsoft outlook activation license.

This license provides the following for

UM8000 Mail:

SV91/93 UM8000 UMS CLIENT- – One Subscriber or Guest Mailbox.

1404 UMS Client 1 896
LIC 01 – One View App Session, (Supports View
Mail, View Call Plus, VMM (Outlook),
VML (Lotus Notes), VMG (GroupWise)
and Web Mailbox clients Manager.)

SV91/93 UM8000 SYSTEM

1406 UMS Multi-Language 1 25 1 Language activation License.
LANG-01 LIC

SV91/93 UM8000 HOSPITALITY

1407 UMS Hospitality and PMS On/Off Hospitality and PMS activation license.
& PMS LIC

SV91/93 UM8000 HOSPITALITY

1408 UMS Hospitality Language 1 10 1 Hospitality Language activation license.
LANG-LIC 01

SV91/93 UM8000 AMIS

1409 UMS Amis/Plus Net On/Off –
NETWORK LIC

2-72 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)

Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)

SV91/93 UM8000 TTS LANG-LIC 1 Port of Text-to-Speech language

1410 UMS TTS Language 1 10
01 activation license.

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER

2002 ACD Client 1 896 –
AGENT-LIC 01

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER

2101 ACD P-event On/Off
P-EVENT LIC

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER-

2102 ACD-MIS Basic On/Off –
MIS LIC

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER RT-

2103 ACD-MIS Monitor 1 16 –
REPORTING-LIC 01

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER MIS

2104 ACD-MIS Agent 1 197 –
AGENT-LIC 01

SV9100 CONTACT CENTER

2105 ACD Advance On/Off –
SKILL/CID BASE LIC

SV9100 INCONTROL CR PKG

2107 InControl Server On/Off –
LIC

SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG

3000 CA-Basic On/Off –
LIC-20

SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG

3001 CA-256 Station On/Off –
LIC-256

3002 SV91/93/95 CA UPG LIC-20/256 CA-Up 20 to 256 On/Off –

SV91/93/95 CA NETWORK
3003 CA-Network Client 1 999 –
CLIENT PACK-LIC 05

SV91/93/95 CA ADD REMOTE

3004 CA-Add Remote Site 1 999 –
SITE-LIC 01

SV91/93/95 CA ADD REMOTE

3005 CA-Remote Site Soft 1 999 –
SOFTWARE-LIC 01

SV91/93/95 CA SYS TRAFFIC

3006 CA-Traffic Analys On/Off –
ANALYSIS LIC

SV91/93/95 CA SYS PMS

3007 CA-PMS Integration On/Off –
INTEGRATION LIC

SV91/93/95 CA WEB
3008 CA-Web Reporting On/Off –
REPORTING-LIC 05

SV91/93/95 CA ADDITIONAL
3013 CA-Add Stations 1 256 –
STATION LIC-256

SV9100 CA E911-REPORTING-
3014 CA-E911 Reporting 1 999 –
LIC

SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Basic

3200 IP REC BASIC PAC On/Off –
Package

SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Basic

3201 REC BASIC SUPV 1 256 –
Supervisor Capacity

SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Basic

3202 REC BASIC PORT 1 256 –
Port Capacity

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-73

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)

Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)

SV91/93 IP RECORDER - IP
3203 IP REC ADD 256 1 256
Recorder-LIC 01

SV91/93 IP RECORDER - Call

3204 IP REC CALLSCORING 1 999
Scoring-LIC 01

SV91/93 IP RECORDER -
3205 IP CALL REPORTING On/Off
Reporting-LIC

SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL-
3210 VSR-IP Port Includes feature codes 3210 and 3211.
REPORT-LIC 01

SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL-
3211 VSR-Encrypt –
ENCRYPTION-LIC 01

SV91/93/95 MANAGER PORT-

3212 VSR-Manager –
LIC 01

SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL-
3213 VSR-Reporter –
REPORT-LIC 01

SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL
3214 VSR-Archive –
ARCHIVER PORT-LIC 01

3300 SV91/93 E911 ESN Suite-LIC ESN Registry On/Off –

SV91/93 E911On-Site Monitor-

3301 ESN Site Monitor 1 9999 –
LIC

SV91/93 E911 ALARM CLIENT

3302 ESN Alarm Client 1 9999 –
ADD-ON -LIC

SV91/93 E911 Call Notify-Addon-

3303 ESN Call Notify 1 9999 –
LIC

3400 SV9100 CTI OCX LIC CTI-OCX On/Off –

3513 SV9100 LUA PMS LIC LUA PMS On/Off –

3514 SV9100 LUA PHONEPRO LIC LUA PhonePro On/Off –

5001 SV9100 IP TRUNK-LIC 01 IP Trunk 1 400 –

Each system need this license to specify

5012 SV9100 NETWORKING-LIC 01 K-CCIS over IP 1 400 suitable K-CCIS over IP channel (Trunk)
number.

5050 DT820 GIGABIT DT820 Gigabit 1 896

For DT820 software version 2 telephones
5051 DT820 EXT LK 16 DT820 Ext LK 16 1 896 only. Each telephone must be manually
set to get this license from the SV9100.
5052 DT820 EXT LK 32 DT820 Ext LK 32 1 896

SV9100 NETWORKING OVER

5091 Networking over IP 1 128
IP-LIC 01

5103 SV9100 IP RESOURCE-LIC 01 VoIP Channel 1 12800 –

5111 SV9100 IP PHONE-LIC 01 IP Terminal 1 896 –

5201 SV9100 MOBILE EXT-LIC 01 Mobile Extension 1 896 –

SV9100 UCS SOFTPHONE

5301 UCS SoftPhone Client 1 256 –
CLIENT-LIC01

2-74 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)

Feature Feature Name

Item Name Min Max Note
Code (WebPro/PCPro)

SV9100 UCS SOFTPHONE E

5303 UCS SoftPhone Enhance 1 256 –
CLIENT-LIC01

SV9100 UCS ATTENDANT

5304 UCS Attendant Client 1 512 –
CLIENT-LIC 01

5305 SV9100 UCS CLIENT-LIC01 UCS Client 1 256 –

SV9100 UCS ADVANCED

5309 UCS Enhancement I 1 512 –
SERVICE-LIC 01

This will support external CRM

SV9100 UCS CRM
5310 UCS CRM Integration 1 256 applications. Refer to the UC Suite
INTEGRATION-LIC 01
Installation manual for further details.

SV9100 MOBILE PRESENCE

5311 UCS Mobile Presence On/Off –
LIC

SV9100 UCS VOICEMAIL INT- Access to InMail function from UC Suite.

5312 UCS InMail Integration 1 128
LIC 01 Client base license.

SV9100 UCS WEB CLIENT-LIC

5313 UCS Web Client 1 512 –
01

5320 SV9100 UCS VERSION LIC(R1) UCS Version 1 On/Off –

SV9100 INCONTROL ADDON-01

5327 InControl Addon On/Off –
LIC

6200 PVA-CCIS PORT LIC PVA-CCIS Port 4 400 –

6201 SV9100 PVA-PMS US LIC PVA-PMS On/Off –

6300 RGA CONF PORT-LIC 08 RGA Conference 8 32 –

6301 RGA CONF ENH I-LIC RGA-CNF ENH I On/Off

6302 RGA CONF ENH II-LIC RGA-CNF ENH II On/Off

6303 RGA CONF ENH III-LIC RGA-CNF ENH III On/Off

6304 RGA CONF MULTI LANG-LIC 01 RGA-CNF Multi Lang 1 60

Conditions

 Confirm license by entering Feature Code No. (0~9999)

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-75

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA to select whether the CD-PRTA works as PRI or
T1.

Input Data
System ID 0~50

Slot Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PRI/T1 Selection 0 = PRI 0 = PRI

Choose whether the CD-PRTA works 1 = T1
as PRI or T1.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-76 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo
license.

Input Data

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 Remaining days of Free/Demo 0~9999

License

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-77

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license information for each
unit.

Input Data
Slot Number 1~24

License Index Number 1~32

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 License Code 0000~9999

02 License Quantity 0~255

Conditions

 If applying more than 255 licenses to a slot the licenses must be applied across multiple indexes. For
example assigning 256 VoIP resource licenses (5103) to the CPU slot could be assigned using
different methods as long as the total for the CPU slot is 256:
1. Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a total
of 256.
2. Index 1 has 255 of feature code 5103 and index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256.
 When using IP devices IP Resource licenses (5103) must be assigned to the CPU Slot (1) for them to
be available for use. If this is not done, IP related features will not work.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-78 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-55 : Package Network Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-55 : Package Network Setup to set the network information for each unit. This
program sets the SPOE of each package.

Input Data

Slot Number 1~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 172.16.1.100

128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254

02 LAN Setup 0 = Auto Detect 0

LAN setup for 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
each unit. 2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex

03 Main/Add-on 0 = Main 1
1 = Add-on

04 Sub Net Mask 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0

255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-79

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-80 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone to set the contents of XML portal page provided to the IP
Phone. The XML Portal Page is included in the XML application name and URL Link information. XML
URL Link Information can be set for up to five system bases.

Input Data
XML URL Information Link 1~5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Name Up to 40 characters. No Setting

02 URL Up to 256 characters. No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-81

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-58 : DT800/DT700 Network Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-58 : DT800/DT700 Network Setup to set the local network address when the SIP
multiline terminal connects the system via a local router.

Input Data

Area Table 1~8

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Network 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 10-46-14

Address
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Sets local 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
network address.

02 Subnet Mask 248.0.0.0 / 252.0.0.0 / 254.0.0.0 / 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10-46-14

Sets local subnet 255.128.0.0 / 255.192.0.0 / 255.224.0.0
mask. 255.240.0.0 / 255.248.0.0 / 255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0 / 255.255.0.0 / 255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0 / 255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0 / 255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 / 255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0 / 255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192 / 255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 / 255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252 / 255.255.255.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-82 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-62 : NetBIOS Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-62 : NetBIOS Setting to set the NetBIOS which is used to access WebPro of SV9100
using HTTP and HTTPS.

Input Data

Area Table 1~8

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 NetBIOS Setting 0 = Disable

- NetBIOS Mode
1 = Enable 1
Enable/Disable
NetBIOS Mode.

02 NetBIOS Setting Up to 15 characters SV9100

- NetBIOS Name
Assign the
NetBIOS name
up to 15
characters

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-83

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-65 : NTP Server
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-65 : NTP Server to set the NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server which is built-in the
CPU. NTP server can synchronize the time for IP Video Door phone, or NTP clients connected to the
SV9100 network.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 NTP Server 0 = Disable 0

Select whether or
1 = Enable
not the NTP
Server is used.

02 NTP Server Port 1 ~ 65535 123

Sets the NTP
Server Port.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-84 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-67 : SIP Stack Configuration Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-67 : SIP Stack Configuration Setup to program SIP system base setting.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 DNS Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether
1 = Enable
DNS mode is
enabled.

02 DNS IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0.0.0.0

Set the IP
Address of DNS
Server.

03 DNS Port 0 ~ 65535 53

Assign the DNS
Port.

04 DNS Source 0 ~ 65535 53

Port
Assign the DNS
Source Port.

05 Request ReTx 0 ~ 65535sec. 5

Start Time
Assign the ReTx
Start Time.

06 Request 0 ~ 65535sec. 40
Maximum ReTx
Interval

Conditions

 The SIP Stack cannot separate DNS Servers, only one DNS server can be used.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-85

 Issue 4.0

2-86 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-68 : IP Trunk Availability
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-68 : IP Trunk Availability to set the number of ports available for IP Trunking.

Index 1

System ID 0~50

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Trunk Type 0 = None 0

1 = SIP
2 = H.323
3 = CCIS

02 Start Port 0 ~ 400 0

03 Number of Port 0 ~ 400 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-87

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-69 : UC Server General Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-69 : UC Server General Settings to set the general settings for the UC Server

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC Server Availability 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 UC Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 UC Server Host Name Any Characters No setting

04 UC Server Port Number 0 ~ 65535 0

05 UC Server Trace 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

06 UC Server Use Name for Communication 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

07 UC Server Large System Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

08 UC Server Auto Restart 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 UC Server Auto Restart Frequency 0 = Weekly 0

1 = Monthly

10 UC Server Auto Restart : Day of the Week 0: Sunday 0

1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday

11 UC Server Auto Restart Week 0 = First 0

1 = Second
2 = Third
3 = Fourth

2-88 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 UC Server Auto Restart Day 0: Sunday 0

1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday

13 UC Server Auto Restart Time 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-89

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-70 : UC Server VoiceMail Interface Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-70 : UC Server VoiceMail Interface Settings to configure the VoiceMail Integration
for the UC Server. to set .

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC Server VoiceMail Integration 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 UM8000 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 UM8000 Port Number 0 ~ 65535 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-90 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-71 : UC Server Contact Center Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-71 : UC Server Contact Center Settings to define the IP address and port UC Clients with
Contact Center integration will connect to.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 MIS Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 MIS Server Computer Name Any Characters No setting

03 MIS Server Port Number 0 ~ 65535 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-91

 Issue 4.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-72 : Network Security Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 10-72 : Network Security Setup to define the Server Certificate and the Private Key for TLS
connection when the SV9100 receives a TLS request.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Certificate Up to 32 characters No setting

02 Private Key Up to 32 characters No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 TLS on SIP

2-92 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Issue 4.0

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-93

 Issue 4.0

2-94 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

 Program: 11
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns
the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other
extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not
meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.

Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure
you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you
CAUTION
k must change the standard numbering, use the chart for Table 2-3 System Numbering
Default Settings on page 2-97 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your
system data.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change

You can make either single- or two-digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the Table 2-3 System
Numbering Default Settings on page 2-97 table, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The
remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two-digit codes.
 Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example,
entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step
3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2
the entries affected are 600~699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are
6000~6999.)
 Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example,
entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program,
only  and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code
between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range
as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are
undefined.

Defining codes based on more than two digits require a secondary program
WARNING
(PRG 11-20) to define the codes.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-95

 Issue 4.0

Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change

After you specify a single- or two-digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the
code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default
Settings on page 2-97 table.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected

After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column
in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-97 table. The choices are:

Input Data

Dial
Dial Type Description Related Program
Types

0 None

1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for Contact Center)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbering

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
11-17 : Group Pilot Number

3 Trunk Access Code 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code

4 Special Trunk Access 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code

5 Operator Access 20-17 : Operator Extension

6 ARS/F-Route Access 44-xx

8 Networking System
Access

9 Dial Extension Analyze 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table

 Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system
operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. To make
extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign
extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to
change entries in Program 11-10 ~ 11-16.)

2-96 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Default
See the following tables for default settings.

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New
1X 3 2
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14s 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
17 0 0
18 0 0
19 0 0
10 0 0
1 0 0
1# 0 0

2X 3 2
21 0 0
22 0 0
23 0 0
24 0 0
25 0 0
26 0 0
27 0 0
28 0 0
29 0 0
20 0 0
2 0 0
2# 0 0
3X 4 2

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-97

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New
31 0 0
32 0 0
33 0 0
34 0 0
35 0 0
36 0 0
37 0 0
38 0 0
39 0 0
30 0 0
3 0 0
3# 0 0

4X 3 1
41 0 0
42 0 0
43 0 0
44 0 0
45 0 0
46 0 0
47 0 0
48 0 0
49 0 0
40 0 0
4 0 0
4# 0 0
5X 3 1
51 0 0
52 0 0
53 0 0

2-98 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New
54 0 0
55 0 0
56 0 0
57 0 0
58 0 0
59 0 0
50 0 0
5 0 0
5# 0 0

6X 3 1
61 0 0
62 0 0
63 0 0
64 0 0
65 0 0
66 0 0
67 0 0
68 0 0
69 0 0
60 0 0
6 0 0
6# 0 0
7X 3 1
71 0 0
72 0 0
73 0 0
74 0 0
75 0 0
76 0 0

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-99

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New
77 0 0
78 0 0
79 0 0
70 0 0
7 0 0
7# 0 0

8X 1 1
81 0 0
82 0 0
83 0 0
84 0 0
85 0 0
86 0 0
87 0 0
88 0 0
89 0 0
80 0 0
8 0 0
8# 0 0
9X 1 3
91 0 0
92 0 0
93 0 0
94 0 0
95 0 0
96 0 0
97 0 0
98 0 0
99 0 0

2-100 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New
90 0 0
9 0 0
9# 0 0

0X 1 5
01 0 0
02 0 0
03 0 0
04 0 0
05 0 0
06 0 0
07 0 0
08 0 0
09 0 0
00 0 0
0 0 0
0# 0 0
X 2 1
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 0 0
8 0 0
9 0 0
0 0 0
 0 0
# 0 0

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-101

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access,
5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=None

Number of Digits Network System

Dial Type
Required ID [if type 8] 0~50
Dialed
Default New Default New

#X 0 0
#1 2 1
#2 2 1
#3 2 1
#4 2 1
#5 2 1
#6 2 1
#7 2 1
#8 2 1
#9 2 1
#0 2 1
# 4 1
## 2 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Flexible System Numbering

2-102 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can have
up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or
Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension
number.

Input Data
Extension Port Number 001 ~ 960

Item Extension
Description
No. Number

01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line
telephones (including SLTII Adapter, APR), and IP telephones.
Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default
Extension Port Extension
Number Number
1 101
2 102
3 103
~

99 199
100 3101
~

960 3961

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-103

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Calling

 Flexible System Numbering

 Intercom

2-104 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The extension
number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in
Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.

Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers 001~512

Item Virtual Extension

Description
No. Number

01 Dial (up to 8 digits) Set up Virtual Extension numbers.

The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default
Virtual Port Extension
Number Number
1 201
2 202
3 203
~

99 299

 Ports 100~512 have no setting.

NOTE

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-105

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Flexible System Numbering

 Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

2-106 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number used for the ACI.
The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.

Input Data
ACI Port Number 01~96

ACI
Item
Extension Description Related Program
No.
Number

01 Dial The extension number cannot be 10-03 : Basic Configuration

(Up to 8 digits) duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, for each blade.
11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default

 ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

 Flexible System Numbering

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-107

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Department
Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and
Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the
number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64

Extension
Item
Group Pilot Description Related Program
No.
Number

01 Dial Assign department group pilot  16-01 : Department

(Up to 8 digits) numbers. (Extension) Group Basic
The number set up by Program Data Setup
11-02 (Extension Numbering)  16-02 : Department Group
cannot be used. Assignment for Extensions
The extension number cannot  16-03 : Secondary
be duplicated in Programs Department Group
11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-08, and
11-17.

Default

 No Setting

Conditions
None

2-108 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Calling

 Department Step Calling

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-109

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI Groups set in Program
33-02. The pilot number can have up to four digits. The first and second digits of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.

Input Data
ACI Group Number 01~16

Item ACI Group Related

Description
No. Pilot Number Program

01 Dial The extension number cannot be duplicated in 33-02

(Up to 8 digits) Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-07, and 11-17.

Default

 No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2-110 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9). The trunk access
code can be set from 1~8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code
extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection. The individual Trunk Access Code is used
when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.

The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits
Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must
CAUTION
make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.

Input Data

Item Trunk Access

Description Default Related Program
No. Code

01 Dial Assign the trunk access 9  11-01 : System Numbering

(Up to four digits) code (normally 9). This is  14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
the code extension users  14-05 : Trunk Group
dial to access Automatic  14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Route Selection.  21-02: Trunk Group Routing for
Extensions

02 2nd Trunk Route Define additional trunk No  11-01 : System Numbering

Access Code access codes. Setting  14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
When a user dials the  14-05 : Trunk Group
Alternate Trunk Route  14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Access Code, the system  21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for
routes their call to the Extensions
Alternate Trunk Route.  21-15 : Individual Trunk Group
Routing for Extensions

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-111

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection

 Central Office Calls, Placing

 Trunk Group Routing

2-112 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service Codes for
the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11~11-16. The
following chart shows:
 The number of each code (01~42).
 The function of the Service Code.
 The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
 The default entry. For example, dialing Item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

01 Night Mode Switching MLT, SLT 718 12-xx

20-07-01

02 --- Not Used ---

03 Setting the System Time MLT 728

04 Storing Common Speed Dialing MLT 753

Numbers

05 Storing Group Speed Dialing MLT 754

Numbers

06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for MLT 733 24-04-01

Each Trunk Line

07 Canceling the Automatic Transfer MLT 734 24-04-01

for Each Trunk Line

08 Setting the Destination for MLT 735 24-04-01

Automatic Trunk Transfer

09 Charging Cost Display by the MLT Not Set

Supervisor

10 --- Not Used ---

11 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction MLT Not Set

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-113

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

12 Night Mode Switching for Other MLT 618 12-xx

Group 20-07-01

13 --- Not Used ---

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

16 Leaving Message Waiting MLT 626 11-11-09

(Requires CPU to be licensed for
Hotel/Motel)

17 Dial Block by Supervisor MLT 601 90-19

18 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door MLT 722 13-05

Box

19 --- Not Used ---

20 VRS - Record/Erase Message MLT, SLT 616 20-07-13

21 VRS - General Message Playback MLT, SLT 611 20-07-14

22 VRS - Record or Erase General MLT, SLT 612 20-07-15

Message

23 SMDR - Extension Accumulated MLT 621 20-07-18

Printout Code

24 SMDR - Group Accumulated MLT 622 20-07-19

Printout Code

25 Account Code Accumulated MLT 623 20-07-20

Printout Code

26 Forced Trunk Disconnect MLT, SLT Not Set 20-07-11

27 Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing MLT, SLT 645 20-07-12

Calls

28 --- Not Used ---

29 --- Not Used ---

30 Register DECTPP MLT Not Set

31 Delete DECTPP MLT Not Set

32 Set Private Call Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set

33 Entry Caller ID Refuse MLT Not Set

34 Set Caller ID Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set

35 Dial-In Mode Switching MLT, SLT Not Set

2-114 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

36 Change the Guidance Message MLT, SLT Not Set

Number on Voice Mail Auto
Attendant

37 --- Not Used ---

38 --- Not Used ---

39 --- Not Used ---

40 --- Not Used ---

41 Date Setting MLT Not Set 20-07-30

42 Maintenance Service MLT Not Set

43 --- Not Used ---

44 --- Not Used ---

45 --- Not Used ---

46 Watch Message Setting MLT, SLT 614

47 Warning Message Setting MLT 615

48 Auto Dial Setting for Sensor MLT 617

49 Auto Dial Setting for Remote Watch MLT 619

51 Power Saving for Power Save MLT, SLT 731

Group

53 Clear Alarm Report MLT, SLT Not Set

54 Save Store Statistical Information MLT 671 20-07-35

of RTP

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to Input Data chart on the previous pages.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-115

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service
Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.

The following chart shows:

 The number of each code (01~65).
 The function of the Service Code.
 What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
 The default entry. For example, dialing 725 (Item 18) allows users to turn on or turn off Background
Music.

Input Data

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

01 Call Forward – All MLT, SLT 741

02 Call Forward – Busy MLT, SLT 742

03 Call Forward – No Answer MLT, SLT 743

04 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer MLT, SLT 744

05 Call Forward – Both Ring MLT, SLT 745

06 --- Not Used ---

07 Call Forwarding – Follow-Me MLT, SLT 746

08 Do Not Disturb MLT, SLT 747

09 Answer Message Waiting MLT, SLT 0 11-10-16

10 Cancel All Messages Waiting MLT, SLT 773

11 Cancel Message Waiting MLT, SLT 771

12 Alarm Clock MLT, SLT 727 20-01-06

2-116 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

13 Display Language Selection for Multiline MLT 678 15-02

Terminal

14 Text Message Setting MLT No

Setting

15 Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 721 20-09-05

20-02-12

16 Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 723 20-09-05

20-02-12

17 Programmable Function Key Programming MLT 751 15-07

(2-Digit Service Codes) 11-11-38

18 BGM On/Off MLT No

Setting

19 Key Touch Tone On/Off MLT 724

20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones MLT 720 15-02

21 Check Incoming Ring Tones MLT 711

22 Extension Name Programming MLT 700 15-01

23 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL MLT 679

24 Change Station Class of Service MLT 677 20-13-28

Allow an extension user to change the COS of
another extension. Must be allowed in Program
20-13-28.

25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension MLT, SLT 602 20-11-17
Group 24-05

26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each MLT, SLT 603

Extension Group

27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each MLT 604 20-11-17

Extension Group 24-05

28 Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group MLT, SLT 605 20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08

29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each MLT, SLT 606 20-11-17

Extension Group

30 DND Setup for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 607

31 DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 608

32 --- Not Used ---

33 Dial Block MLT, SLT 600

34 Temporary Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 775 21-07

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-117

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

35 Pilot Group Withdrawing MLT, SLT 650

36 Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 663 21-14

37 Ring Volume Set MLT 729

38 Programmable Function Key Programming MLT 752 15-07

(3-Digit Service Codes) 11-11-17

39 Station Speed Dial Number Entry MLT, SLT 755

40 --- Not Used ---

41 Tandem Ringing MLT, SLT No 15-07

Setting 30-03

42 --- Not Used ---

43 Headset Mode Switching MLT, SLT 688

44 Auto Attendant MLT, SLT No

Setting

45 Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split) MLT, SLT No

Setting

46 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split) MLT, SLT No

Setting

47 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT No

Setting

48 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT No

Setting

49 Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split) MLT, SLT No

Setting

50 Set Message Waiting Indication SLT No 15-03-03

Setting 45-01-01

51 Cancel Message Waiting Indication SLT No 15-03-03

Setting 45-01-01

52 Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No MLT, SLT 790

Split)

53 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No MLT, SLT 791

Split)

54 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination MLT, SLT 792

(No Split)

55 Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No MLT, SLT 793

Split)

56 Telephone Book Lock Service MLT No

Setting

2-118 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

57 Set Do Not Call Table MLT, SLT No

Setting

58 Call Forward with Personal Greeting MLT, SLT 713

59 Call Forward to Attendant except Busy MLT, SLT No 15-01-08

Setting

60 Call Forward to Attendant/No Answer MLT, SLT No 15-01-09

Setting

62 Headset Ring Volume Adjustment MLT 662 11-11-37

15-02-12
15-02-41
15-02-42

63 Double Height Character Indication MLT No 15-02-45

Setting

64 Reverse Display Indication MLT No 15-02-44

Setting

65 Headset Mode Switching MLT No

Setting

68 IntraMail Language Selection for own Extension MLT, SLT No 47-02-16

Setting

69 IntraMail Language Selection for Specific MLT, SLT No 20-13-53

Extension Setting 47-02-16

75 Multi-Device Support (On) MLT 788

76 Multi-Device Support (Off) MLT 789

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to the Input Data chart above.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-119

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes
which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-
11, and 11-13 through 11-16.

The following chart shows:

 The number of each code (01~59).
 The function of the Service Code.
 The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
 The default entry. For example, dialing 770 (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp-On.
 Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

Input Data

Item Defaul Related

Item Terminals
No. t Program

01 Bypass Call MLT, SLT 707 11-16-09

Activate Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override.
This code is available only if you disable the voice
mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.

02 Conference MLT, SLT #1

03 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) MLT, SLT 709

04 Set Camp-On MLT, SLT 750

05 Cancel Camp-On MLT, SLT 770

06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call MLT, SLT 712

07 Step Call MLT, SLT 708

08 Barge-In MLT, SLT 710

09 Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring MLT, SLT No 16-02

Setting

10 Station Speed Dialing MLT, SLT #2

2-120 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Defaul Related

Item Terminals
No. t Program

11 Group Speed Dialing MLT, SLT #4

12 Last Number Dial MLT, SLT #5
13 Saved Number Dial MLT, SLT 715

14 Trunk Group Access MLT, SLT 704

15 Specified Trunk Access MLT, SLT #9

16 Trunk Access Via Networking MLT, SLT No
Setting

17 Clear Last Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 776

18 Clear Saved Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 785

19 Internal Group Paging MLT, SLT 701 31-01-01

20 External Paging MLT, SLT 703

21 Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging MLT, SLT 764 31-02-01

Group

22 Meet-Me Answer to External Paging MLT, SLT 765

23 Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group MLT, SLT 763 31-02-01

24 Combined Paging MLT, SLT 1 31-02-01

31-07

25 Direct Call Pickup - Own Group MLT, SLT 756

26 Call Pickup for Specified Group MLT, SLT 768 23-02

27 Call Pickup MLT, SLT # 23-02

28 Call Pickup for Another Group MLT, SLT 769 23-02

29 Direct Extension Call Pickup MLT, SLT 

30 Specified Trunk Answer MLT, SLT 672

31 Park Hold MLT, SLT #6 24-03

32 Answer for Park Hold MLT, SLT 6 24-03

33 Group Hold MLT, SLT 732

34 Answer for Group Hold MLT, SLT 762

35 Station Park Hold MLT, SLT 757

36 Door Box Access MLT, SLT 702

37 Common Canceling Service Code MLT, SLT 620

38 General Purpose Indication MLT 783 15-07-56

15-07-57

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-121

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Defaul Related

Item Terminals
No. t Program

39 --- Not Used ---

40 Station Speed Dialing MLT, SLT #7

41 Voice Over MLT, SLT 690 11-16-08

42 Flash on Trunk lines SLT #3

43 Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) MLT, SLT #0 14-05
14-06

44 Callback Test for SLT SLT 799

45 Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 749 15-03-07

46 Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 759 15-03-08

47 Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer SLT 794 11-12-03

Splitting (switching) between calls

48 Account Code SLT ##

49 --- Not Used ---

50 General Purpose Relay MLT, SLT 780

51 VM Access (SV8100 InMail and VMS) MLT, SLT 8

52 Live Monitoring (SV8100 InMail) MLT No

Setting

53 Live Recording at SLT MLT, SLT 654

54 VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS MLT, SLT 782

Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS
Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature,
this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.

55 --- Not Used ---

56 E911 Alarm Shut Off MLT 786 21-01-13

Enter the Service Code that an extension user can
21-01-14
dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.

57 Tandem Trunking MLT, SLT #8

58 Transfer Into Conference MLT, SLT 624 20-13-10
Assign the Service Code a user dials to Transfer a
20-13-15
20-13-16
call to a Conference call.

59 Trunk Drop Operation for SLT SLT No

Setting

60 --- Not Used ---

61 --- Not Used ---

2-122 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Defaul Related

Item Terminals
No. t Program

62 Security Sensor Rest MLT, SLT 716

63 Watch Mode Start MLT, SLT 717

64 Security Sensor Mode Start MLT, SLT 719

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-123

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-13 : Service Code Setup (for Contact Center)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for Contact Center) to customize the Service Codes which
are used with the Contact Center feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-
10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows:
 The number of each code (01~13).
 The function of the Service Code.
 The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
 The default entry.

Input Data

Item Terminals
Item Default
No.

01 Log In/Log Out (for KTS) MLT, SLT 5

02 Log Out (for SLT) SLT 655

03 Set Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 656

04 Cancel Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 657

05 Set Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 658

06 Cancel Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 659

07 --- Not Used ---

08 Agent ID Code Login MLT No Setting

Allow an AIC Agent to log into a group.

09 Agent ID Code Logout MLT No Setting

Allow an AIC Agent to log out of a group.

10 Agent Login by Supervisor MLT 667

Allow an Supervisor to log into a group.

11 Agent Logout by Supervisor MLT 668

Allow an Supervisor to log out of a group.

2-124 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Terminals
Item Default
No.

12 Change Agent Group by Supervisor MLT 669

When using service code 669 to change an agent
group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit number for
the group. For example, to change to group 4, the entry
would be 669 04.

13 Agent Changing Own Group MLT 670

Using this service code, an Agent can reassign
themselves to another Group.

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-125

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used
with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-13,
11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in
Program 42-02.

The following chart shows:

 The number of each code (01~18).
 The function of the Service Code.
 The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
 The default entry.

Input Data

Item
Item Terminals Default
No.

01 Set DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 627

02 Cancel DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 628

03 Set DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 629

04 Cancel DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 630

05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 631

06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 632

07 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 633

08 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 634

09 Set Room to Room Call Restriction MLT, SLT 635

10 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) MLT, SLT 636

11 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension MLT, SLT 637

12 Check-In MLT, SLT 638

13 Check-Out MLT, SLT 639

2-126 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Terminals Default
No.

14 Room Status Change for Own Extension MLT, SLT 640

15 Room Status Change for Other Extension MLT, SLT 641

16 Room Status Output MLT 642

17 Hotel Room Monitor MLT, SLT 675

18 Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction MLT 666

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-127

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the
special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.

The following chart shows:

 The number of each code (01~14).
 The function of the Service Code.
 What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
 The default entry.
 Programs that may be affected when changing the code.

Input Data

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

01 Remote Maintenance 730

02 Access in Dial-In Conversion Table 760 22-04

22-11

03 Backup Data Save MLT ##9

Save the user’s soft key settings (extension
programmed Call Forwards, DND, etc.). This
feature should be used before upgrading the
system software.

04 --- Not Used ---

05 System Programming Mode, Log-On MLT ## 11-01

06 --- Not Used ---

07 --- Not Used ---

08 --- Not Used ---

09 Transfer to Incoming Ring Group No

Setting

2-128 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Terminal Related

Item Default
No. s Program

10 --- Not Used ---

11 Ethernet Port Reset

12 Extension Data Swap MLT 92-04

13 Remote Access from DISA SLT No 22-02

Setting

14 Modem Access 740

16 Outbound IP Connection No 90-69

Setting

 MLT = Multiline Terminal

 SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-129

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used
when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.

The following chart shows:

 The number of each code (01~11).
 The function of the Service Code.
 The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension switches the call
from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined).
 Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Default
No. Program

01 Step Call 2 11-12-07

02 Barge-In No Setting 11-12-08

03 Switching of Voice/Signal Call 1 11-12-06

04 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling  11-12-03

05 Camp-On # 11-12-04

06 DND/Call Forward Override Bypass No Setting 11-12-01

07 Message Waiting 0 11-12-09

08 Voice Over 6 11-12-41

09 Access to Voice Mail 8 11-12-51

10 (Department) STG All Ring Mode No Setting 11-12-09

16-01-05

11 Station Park Hold No Setting 11-12-35

2-130 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-131

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-17 : Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-17 : Group Pilot Number to assign the Master Number for each Group. This is the
number a user dials to transfer calls to the Group. Normally, you should use unassigned extension
numbers (e.g., 500) for the master number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default,
has a port number assigned (for example: in the 101~199, 3101~3257), first remove the default
assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as an Master Number, first give extension port
025 a different extension assignment.

Input Data
Group Number 01~64

Item
Group Pilot Number
No.

01 Dial (Up to eight digits)

Default

 No Group Pilot Number assigned to any Group (1~64).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

 Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys

2-132 Program 11 : System Numbering

Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-19 : Remote Conference Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-19: Remote Conference Group Pilot Number to assign the remote conference pilot
number for each Remote Conference Group. This is the number a user dials to call into the Remote
Conference.

You must use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 500) for the pilot number. If you want to use an
extension number which, by default, has a port number assigned (for example: in the 101~199,
3101~3257), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as a
Remote Conference pilot number, first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Remote Conference Group Pilot Number Must work within current blank
Enter the pilot number for remote conference.
system dialing plan

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-133

 Issue 4.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more digits.
This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze).

Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table 01~128

Item No. Dial Extension Analyze Table

01 Dial (Up to eight digits: 0, 1~9, #, , @)

02 Type of Dials:
0 = None
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access

Default

 Dial Extension Analyze Tables are not set at default.

Conditions

 When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower table
has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to
determine the dial type.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-134 Program 11 : System Numbering

 Program: 12
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data

Item Input Defaul Related

Item Description
No. Data t Program

01 Manual Night 0 = Off 1 Allow/Prevent activating 11-10-01

Mode Switching 1 = On Night Service by dialing
a service code.

02 Automatic Night 0 = Off 0 According to a preset 12-02

Mode Switching schedule, enable or 12-03
1 = On
disable Automatic Night 12-04
Service for the system.

 Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes
according to the schedule set up.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-135

 Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic
Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and
12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Time Pattern Number 01~10

Set Time Number 01~20

Item No. Description Input Data

01 Start Time 0000~2359

02 End Time 0000~2359

03 Operation Mode 1~8

Example:
Time Pattern 1
0:00 9:00 12:00 13:00 17:00 18:00 22:00 0:00
Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 2 Mode 3
(midnight) (day) (rest) (day) (rest) (night) (midnight)

To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 09:00 Mode 3 (midnight)
Time setting 02: 09:00 to 12:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 03: 12:00 to 13:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 04: 13:00 to 17:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 05: 17:00 to 18:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 06: 18:00 to 22:00 Mode 2 (night)

2-136 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Issue 4.0

Time setting 07: 22:00 to 00:00 Mode 3 (midnight)

Time Pattern 2
0:00 0:00
Mode 2
(night)

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 00:00 Mode 2 (night)

Default
All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0800 2
02 0800 1700 1
03 1700 0000 2
04 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 2
02 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 3~10

Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-137

 Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch
settings.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Time Schedule
Item No. Day of the Week
Pattern Number
01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
01 04 = Wednesday 0~10
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday

Default

Time Schedule
Day of the Week Pattern
Number
01 = Sunday 2
02 = Monday 1
03 = Tuesday 1
04 = Wednesday 1
05 = Thursday 1
06 = Friday 1
07 = Saturday 2

2-138 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-139

 Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday night-
switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to
be closed, such as a national holiday.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Item
Days and Months Time Pattern Number
No.

01 0101~1231 0~10
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec. 31) (0 = No Setting)

Default
No setting
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

2-140 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to assign a Day/Night Mode
Group for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Night Mode
Item
Service Group Default
No.
Number

01 01~32 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-141

 Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode Group
for each trunk port.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Night Mode Service

Default
No. Group Number

01 01~32 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

2-142 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed
on an LCD of multiline telephone in each Mode.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item
Text Message
No.

01 Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric)

Default
 Mode 1 = No setting
 Mode 2 = <Night>
 Mode 3 = <Midnight>
 Mode 4 = <Rest>
 Mode 5 = <Day2>
 Mode 6 = <Night2>
 Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
 Mode 8 = <Rest2>

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-143

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

2-144 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each
Day/Night Mode.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Item No. Range

01 2~8
(default = 2)

Example:

When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed (SC 751, 09 +0), the following modes are
switched:
 Press once = Night
 Press twice = Mid-night
 Press third = Day
 Default = 2
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-145

 Issue 4.0

2-146 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

 Program: 13
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call 0 = Trunk Outgoing 0 13-05

Mode Mode
Set whether the Speed Dial bins use 1 = Intercom
Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin as Outgoing Mode
though it is an Intercom number (1).

02 --- Not Used ---

03 Number of Common Speed Dialing 0~10000 1000 13-04

Bins 0 = No Common
Assign the number of Speed Dial bins Speed Dialing
that are used for System Speed Dials.

04 Trunk Access Routing 0 = Trunk Group 0 13-05

When set to 0, PRG13-05 defines a 1 = Trunk Route 14-05
14-06
trunk group in PRG14-05 to select a
trunk from. When set to 1, PRG13-05
refers to a trunk access route in
PRG14-06.

05 Speed Dial Digits Expansion 0 = Not expand 0

If set to 0 speed dial digits are three 1 = Expand
If set to 1 speed dial digits are four

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-147

 Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each
Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions).

Input Data

Item Speed Dialing Start Address of End Address of

No. Group Number Speed Dialing Bin Speed Dialing Bin

01 01~64 0~9990 0, 9~9999

Default
No Setting
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Speed Dial - System/Group/Station

2-148 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing
Group for each extension. There are 64 available Speed Dialing groups.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item No. Group Number Default Value

01 01~64 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Speed Dial - System/Group/Station

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-149

 Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed
Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers.

Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number 0~9999

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, No

Pause (Press line key 1), Setting
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)

02 Name Maximum 12 Characters No

(Use dial pad to enter name) Setting

03 Transfer Mode 0 = Not Used 0

1 = Internal Dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group
(IRG)

04 Transfer Destination Number If Transfer mode is (Refer to No 13-04-03

13-04-03): Setting

1 = Internal Dial Mode

1~9, 0, , #, P, R, @
(Maximum 24 Characters)

2 = Incoming Ring Group

0 ~ 100 (IRG Number)
P = Pause
R = Recall
@ = Additional Digits when
using ISDN functionality

2-150 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Incoming Ring Pattern Incoming Ring Pattern 0 13-04-03

0 = Normal Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1~4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1~5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone Pattern (5~8)

08 Memo 1 Maximum of 28 digits No 15-02-58

Define Memo Display information tied
Setting
to Common Speed Dial bin or
Telephone Book which match with
incoming Caller ID. This will be
displayed in LCD Line 1.

09 Memo 2 Maximum of 28 digits No 15-02-58

Define Memo Display information tied
Setting
to Common Speed Dial bin or
Telephone Book which match with
incoming Caller ID. This will be
displayed in LCD Line 2.

10 Memo 3 Maximum of 28 digits No 15-02-58

Define Memo Display information tied
Setting
to Common Speed Dial bin or
Telephone Book which match with
incoming Caller ID. This will be
displayed in LCD Line 3.

11 Mailbox Number 0 ~ 896 0

Per Speed Dial Bin No. (0000~9999), 900 ~ 931
set the voice mail box number. Station Mail Box (896) +
Incoming Caller ID number will be Group Mail Box (32) = 928
checked with Speed Dial Data
(PRG 13-04-01). From matched
Speed Dial Bin No., the system finds
the voice mail box number according
to this PRG.

13 Large LED Illumination Setup (by 1 = Not used 0 14-01-35

CID) 15-23-01
2 = Red
Define the color the large LED will 3 = Green
blink when Incoming call with 4 = Blue
matching Caller ID is received.
5 = Yellow
6 = Purple
7 = Light Blue
8 = White
9 = Rotation

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-151

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

2-152 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group/route number to be seized
for each Speed Dialing number.

If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of
the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed Dialing
Mode (Program 13-01-01).

Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number 0~9999

Item No. Trunk Group/Route Number

01 0~100

Default
No Setting
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-153

 Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of
each Telephone Book Number.

Input Data
Telephone Book Number 0~200

Index Data
Telephone Book Entry 0~449

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, No

Pause (Press line key 1), Setting
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)

02 Name Maximum 12 Characters No

(Use dial pad to enter name) Setting

04 Group Number 1~40 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-154 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-08 : Telephone Book System Name
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name to set up the name of the Telephone Book.

Input Data
Telephone Book Number 0~200

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Telephone Book Name Up to six characters No

Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-155

 Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name to set up the group name of the Telephone Book.

Input Data
Telephone Book Number 0~200

Item No. Group Number

01 0~40

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Group Name Up to 12 characters 1 = Group 01

2 = Group 02
3 = Group 03
:
:
:
40 = Group 40

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-156 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

Issue 4.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-10 : Telephone Book Routing
Level:
SB

Description

Use Program 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing to set up outgoing mode when using the Telephone
Book. Trunk outgoing mode follows Program 14-06 setting.

Input Data
Telephone Book Number 0~200

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Outgoing Mode 0 = Trunk Outgoing 0

1 = Intercom Outgoing

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-157

 Issue 4.0

2-158 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

 Program: 14
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the
table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Trunk Name Up to 12 Characters Line 001

Set the names for trunks. The
Line 002
Line 003
trunk name displays on a :
multiline terminal for incoming Line 400
and outgoing calls.

02 Transmit Level 1~57 32 (0dB)

Select the CODEC gain for the (-15.5dB~+12.5dB in 0.5dB intervals)
trunk. The option sets the gain
(signal amplification) for the trunk
you are programming.

03 Receive Level 1~57 32 (0dB)

Select the CODEC gain for the (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB intervals)
trunk. The option sets the gain
(signal amplification) for the trunk
you are programming.

04 Transmit Gain Level for 1~57 32 (0dB)

Conference and Transfer Calls
(-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB intervals)
Select the CODEC gain type
used by the trunk when it is part
of an Unsupervised Conference.

05 Receive Gain Level for 1~57 16 (-8dB)

Conference and Transfer Calls
(-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB intervals)
Select the CODEC gain type
used by the trunk when it is part
of an Unsupervised Conference.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-159

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

06 SMDR Printout 0 = No Print Out 0 35-01

Include/Exclude the trunk you are 1 = Prints Out 35-02
programming from the SMDR
printout. Refer to Program 35-01
and 35-02 for SMDR printout
options.

07 Outgoing Calls 0 = Deny (No) 1

Allow/Prevent outgoing calls on 1 = Allow (Yes)
the trunk you are programming.

08 Toll Restriction 0 = Restriction Disabled (No) 1 21-04

Enable/Disable Toll Restriction 1 = Restriction Enabled (Yes) 21-05
for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk 21-06
follows Toll Restriction
programming (example:
Programs 21-05, 21-06). If
disabled, the trunk is a toll free
line.

09 Private Line 0 = Disable Private Line (Normal) 0

1 = Enable Private Line (Private Line)

10 DTMF Tones for Outgoing 0 = Disable (No) 0

Calls
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/ Disable DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls.

11 Account Code Required 0 = Disable (No) 1

1 = Enable (Yes)

12 --- Not Used ---

13 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0 = Disable (No) 1

Enable/Disable loop supervision 1 = Enable (Yes)
for the trunk. This option is
required for Call Forwarding
Off-Premise and Tandem
Trunking only.

14 Long Conversation Cutoff 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-21-03

Enable/Disable the Long 1 = Enable (Yes) 20-21-04
Conversation Cutoff feature for
each trunk.

15 Long Conversation Alarm 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-21-01

Before Cutoff 20-21-02
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable the Long
Conversation Alarm for each
trunk.

2-160 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

16 Forced Release of Held Call 0 = Disable (No) 0 24-01-01

Enable/Disable forced release for 1 = Enable (Yes) 24-01-05
calls on Hold. If enabled, the
system disconnects a call if it is
on Hold longer than a
programmed interval (Program
24-01-05). If disabled, forced
disconnection does not occur.
Program 24-01-01 also affects
this option.

17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone 0 = Disable (No) 0

for Long Conversation Alarm
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable the Warning
Tone for Long Conversation
feature for DISA callers.

18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

19 Privacy Mode Toggle Option 0 = Disable (No) 0

Enable/Disable a trunk ability to 1 = Enable (Yes)
be switched from private to non-
private mode by pressing the line
key or Privacy Release function
key.

20 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Disable (No) 0 14-01-21

Allow (1)/Prevent (0) the system 1 = Enable (Yes)
from automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID information
when a user places a call. If
allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the
system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code (defined in
14-01-21) before the user dialed
digits.

21 Caller ID Block Code Dial (up to eight digits) 67 14-01-20

Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that
should be used as the Caller ID
Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before
dialed digits if Program 14-01-20
is set to 1.

22 Caller ID to Voice Mail 0 = Disable (No) 0

Enable/ Disable the system ability 1 = Enable (Yes)
to send the Caller ID digits
(Remote Log-On Protocol) to
voice mail.

23 --- Not Used ---

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-161

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

24 Trunk-to-Trunk Outgoing 0 = Disable (No) 0

Caller ID through Mode
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable/Disable the ability to send
the original Caller ID through
when the call is Forward
Off-Premise.

25 Continued/Discontinued 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-28-01

Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation 1 = Enable (Yes) 20-28-02
Enable/Disable the ability to dial 20-28-03
a service code to continue or 24-02-07
disconnect the Trunk-to-Trunk 24-02-10
conversation after the alert tone 25-07-07
is heard.
25-07-08

26 Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Normal Transfer (Normal) 0 24-02-11

Transfer Mode 1 = Step Transfer (Step) 24-02-12

27 Caller ID Refuse Setup 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

28 Effective of Conversation 0 = No Effect (No) 1 15-12

Recording Destination for 1 = Available (Yes)
Extension

30 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID 0 = Disable (No) 1 13-04

1 = Enable (Yes)

32 Anti-trombone Function 0 = No Effect (No) 0

1 = Available (Yes)

33 APSU Trunk Receive Gain 1~57 32 (0dB)

Additional PAD when a trunk call (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB in 0.5dB intervals)
connects to APSU Voice Mail.

35 DT800/DT700 Large LED 2 = Red 2

Illumination Setup
3 = Green
Sets LED color for incoming trunk 4 = Blue
call. In DT800/DT700 local 5 = Yellow
terminal setting menu,
6 = Purple
illumination setting must be
‘Automatic’, otherwise the 7 = Light Blue
terminal will ignore PRG 14-01- 8 = White
35, PRG 15-05-37 and PRG 15- 9 = Rotation
23 settings.

36 Calling Party Name Indication 0 = Disable 0

(ISDN Trunk)
1 = Enable
Shows sending caller name on
outgoing ISDN calls.

2-162 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

38 Outgoing CLI Selection 0 = Contract Number 0 21-13-01

Select CLI (Calling Party 1 = Extension Number 21-18-01
Number) sending way to trunk. 2 = Extended Table 21-19-01
When set to 0, extension CLI 3 = PRG 21-13 21-25-01
number set in PRG21-13-01, 4 = PRG 21-18
PRG21-18-01, or PRG21-19-01is
5 = PRG 21-19
sent according to seized trunk
type (ISDN/H.323/SIP) 6 = No digits
automatically.
When set to 1, calling extension
number is sent as CLI.
When set to 2, extension table
number set in PRG21-25-01 is
sent as CLI.
When set to 3, 4, or 5, extension
CLI number set in PRG21-13-01,
PRG21-18-01, or PRG21-19-01is
sent to seized trunk regardless of
trunk type.

39 CLI Composition 0 = Prefer Extension 0

If select default value 0:”prefer 1 = Combine Trunk + Extension
extension”, the extension's CLI is
sent out, if it is not empty. If it is
empty, the trunk's CLI is sent
instead.
If select value 1:”combine trunk +
extension”, the trunk's CLI is
stored in the sending buffer,
padded with the extension's CLI.

40 ISDN Queue Announcement 0 = Send CONNECT 0 22-14

Connect Mode
1 = Send PROGRESS #8 22-15
41-11
41-19

41 Incoming Caller Name Usage 0 = Use 0

This setting determines whether 1 = Ignore
the caller name information from
the network is valid or not. If set
to 1 (Ignore), the caller name
information the network provides
is ignored.

46 Collect Call Blocking 0 = Disable 0 20-09-09

Set the incoming ISDN collect 1 = Enable
call block (reject) or not for the
trunk line.

47 DTMF Receiver Type 1 = Type 1 1

2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-163

 Issue 4.0

Default

Trunk Port
Name
Number

1 Line 001

2 Line 002

: :

400 Line 400

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to features in the Input Data table.

2-164 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port.
Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) 0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 2

Set the signaling type for the trunk. 1 = Dial Pulse (20 PPS)
2 = DTMF

02 Ring Detect Type 0 = Normal/delayed 1

Set Extended Ring Detect or 1 = Immediate Ringing
Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk.
For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this
option must be set to 1 for the trunks to
ring and light correctly.

03 Flash Type 0 = Open Loop Flash 0

Select the flash type (open loop flash 1 = Ground
or ground). Always set this option for
open loop flash.

04 Hooking Type 0 = Timed Flash (Hooking) 0 81-10-07

Use Flash for Timed Flash (Program 1 = Disconnect (Cut) 81-10-08
81-01-14) or Disconnect (Program 81-
01-15). (A user implements Flash by
pressing the FLASH key while on a
trunk call.)

05 Dial Tone Detection for Manually 0 = Dial Tone Detection Not Used 0 21-01-04
Accessed Trunks
1 = Dial Tone Detection Used
Enable/Disable dial tone detection for
directly accessed trunks. If disabled,
the system outdials on the trunks
without monitoring for dial tone.

06 Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in 0 = No Pause (No) 1 21-01-06

Manual Dial Mode
1 = Pause (Yes)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-165

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

07 DP to DTMF Conversion Options 0 = Automatic 2 21-01-03

Determine how a user can convert a 1 = Automatic and Manual
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For 2 = Manual
each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF
conversion required. There are three
conversion options: Automatic (0),
Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual
(2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to
DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk
to DTMF dialing.

08 Answering Condition 0 = Polarity Reversing (Polarity) 1 21-01-03

1 = Polarity Reversing or Timer (Int Digit)

09 Busy Tone Detection 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

10 Caller ID 0 = No 0
Enable/Disable ability of a trunk to 1 = Yes
receive Caller ID information.

11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone 0 = Disable (No) 0

Enable/Disable the system ability to 1 = Enable (Yes)
skip over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to calls
placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
dialed. It does not pertain to line key or
Direct Trunk Access calls.

12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 0 = Disable (No) 1

1 = Enable (Yes)

13 Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

14 Loop Start/Ground Start 0 = Loop Start (Loop) 0

1 = Ground Start (Ground)

16 --- Not Used ---

2-166 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

17 Sync. Ringing 0 = Disable 1

Specify whether or not CO/PBX calls 1 = Enable
follow Synchronous Ringing.
 Synchronous Ringing does
not apply to incoming DID calls,
off-hook ringing calls, or CO/PBX
ring transfer calls.
18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

19 Busy Tone Detection Frequency 1~255 1 14-02-18

20 Busy Tone Detection Interval 0 = No 0 14-10

1 = Yes

21 Fax Branch Connection 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

23 Caller ID Receiving Method 0 = Wait Caller ID 1

Rings extension before receiving 1 = Immediate Ring
Caller ID (1) or after receiving Caller ID
(0).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-167

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one
item for each mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1~400

Item Day/Night Related

Type of Connection Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 0 22-02

1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
2 = Not Used
3 = CTX assume 9

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Placing

2-168 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound
priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order
you specify in the outbound priority entry.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item No. Trunk Group Number Priority Number

01 0~100 1~400

Default

Trunk Port Group Priority

1 1 1

: : :

400 1 400

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Trunk Groups

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-169

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups
you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dials 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority)
specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the
call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The
system contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access.
There are 100 available Trunk Group Numbers.

Example for setting:

With less than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches
for an idle line in trunk group 2.

With more than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 – Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 – 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the
system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.

2-170 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data
Route Table Number 001~100

Item Priority Order Related

Input Data
No. Number Program

01 1~4 0 = Not Specified 14-01-07

001~100 : (Trunk Group No.) 14-05
15-01-02
101~150: (100+ Networking System No.) 21-02
1001~1100 : (1000+ Route Table Number)

Default

 Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1).

 Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified).
 All Other Routes (2~100) and Order Numbers (1~4) = 0 (Not Specified).
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-171

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an
extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks
to which it has outgoing access. There are 400 Access Maps with all 400 trunk ports programmed in
Map 1 with full access.

An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk
Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map.


NOTE
911 calls will override Program 14-07 settings.

Input Data
Access Map Number 001~400

Item Trunk Port

Input Data
No. Number

01 001~400 0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk
on Hold

Default
Access Maps 1~400 = Trunk Ports 1~400 assigned with option 7 access (incoming and outgoing access and
access when trunk is on Hold).

2-172 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

 Central Office Calls, Placing

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-173

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk
as either the ACI or COI port.

If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be selected
IMPORTANT
in Item 2.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 MOH Type 0 = Internal synthesized/external MOH 0

Select a Music on Hold source for the 1 = A customer-provided source connected to BGM port
trunk. 2 = A customer-provided source connected to ACI port

02 Source Port Number If the MOH Type is 2, the source port number is 0~96. 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Music on Hold

2-174 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the ACI Conversation
Recording destination for each trunk.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-

NOTE
12 is followed.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Maximum eight digits No Setting

Enter the ACI extension number where the trunk calls
should be recorded.

02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls 0 = Off 0

Determine if incoming trunk calls should be 1 = On
automatically recorded in the ACI.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-175

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to
incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is used
only for H.323.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk ID 0~65535 0
(0 = No setting)

Conditions

 This Data is called IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.

 This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.
 It is not notified when ID is 0.
 Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system.

Feature Cross Reference

 IP Trunk – H.323

2-176 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Register ID 0 ~ 31 0

02 Pilot Register ID 0 ~ 31 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-177

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-13 : CCIS System Route ID
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID to define the CCIS route ID to the trunk group used for K-
CCIS.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 001~100

Trunk
Item Related
Group Input Data Default
No. Program
Number

01 001~100 0 = Not Assigned 0 14-05-01

1~8 = CCIS Route IDs 50-02-01
50-02-02
 CCIS Route IDs 5~ 8 are for 50-02-03
future use and should not be used. 50-02-04
50-02-05
50-02-06

Conditions
Not used for IP-CCIS

Feature Cross Reference

 Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)

2-178 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment to define the CIC (Circuit Identifier Code) to each
voice channel (trunk port) used for K-CCIS.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 400

Item Related
Trunk Port Number Input Data Default
No. Program

01 001~400 0 = Not Assigned 0 14-05-01

1~127 = CIC Numbers

Conditions

 CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.

 The D-Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment.
 This is not used for IP-CCIS.

Feature Cross Reference

 Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-179

 Issue 4.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup to define the basic setting of each IP Trunk.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk Type 0 = None 0

This indicates the IP Trunk type. (Read 1 = SIP
Only) 2 = H.323
3 = CCIS

02 System ID (SIP Trunk) 0 ~ 50 0

This indicates NetLink System ID of the
trunk when multiple SIP trunks for
NetLink is enabled. (Read Only)

03 P2P Mode (SIP Trunk) 0 = Disable 0

Select whether or not peer-to-peer 1 = Enable
connection method is used for the SIP
Trunk.

04 Video Mode (SIP Trunk) 0 = Disable 0

Select whether or not the Video mode is 1 = Enable
used for the SIP Trunk.

05 SIP Profile 1 = Profile 1 1

2 = Profile 2
3 = Profile 3
4 = Profile 4
5 = Profile 5
6 = Profile 6
 With Version 2000
or lower CPU
Software only two
SIP Profiles are
supported.

2-180 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-181

 Issue 4.0

2-182 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

 Program: 15
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Extension Name Up to 12 Characters STA 101 = Ext 101

Define the extension/virtual STA 102 = Ext 102, etc.
extension name.

02 Outgoing Trunk Line 0 = Off 0 14-06

Preference 1 = On 21-02
Set the extension outgoing
Trunk Line Preference. If
enabled, the extension user
receives trunk dial tone when
they lift the handset. The user
hears trunk dial tone only if
allowed by Trunk Access Map
programming (Programs 14-07
and 15-06). Refer to the Line
Preference feature for more
details.

03 SMDR Printout 0 = Do not print on SMDR report 1

Include/Exclude the extension 1 = Include on SMDR report
in the SMDR report.

04 ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disable 1 10-03-05

If both Program 15-01-04 and 1 = Enable 20-08-13
10-03-05 are enabled, the
system includes Caller ID in
the Setup message as
Presentation Allowed. If these
options are disabled, it is
Presentation Restricted.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-183

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Restriction for Outgoing 0 = No 0 21-01-15

Disable on Incoming Line 21-01-16
1 = Yes
Enable/Disable supervised dial 21-01-17
detection for an extension.
80-03-01

07 Do-Not-Call 0 = Off 0 21-01-19

1 = On

08 Call Attendant Busy 0~100 0 11-11-59

Message (0 = No setting) 40-10-08

09 Call Attendant Answer 0~100 0 11-11-60

Message (0 = No setting) 40-10-09

10 Extension Number 0 = Disable 0

Sends caller name on outgoing 1 = Enable
ISDN calls.

12 CCIS CPN 0 = Disable 1

Enable or Disable sending 1 = Enable
CPN to remote trunk via CCIS.

13 Special Ringtone Choice 0 = Incoming extension ring tone 0 15-02-03

1 = Tone pattern 1
2 = Tone pattern 2
3 = Tone pattern 3
4 = Tone pattern 4
5 = Tone pattern 5
6 = Tone pattern 6
7 = Tone pattern 7
8 = Tone pattern 8

14 SMDR Output of Intercom 0 = Disable 0 15-01-49

Calls Made
1 = Enable

15 SMDR Output of Intercom 0 = Disable 0 15-01-49

Calls Answered
1 = Enable

16 Line Load Control 0 = Disable 0

Restriction
1 = Enable

2-184 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-185

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various multiline telephone
options.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Display Language Selection 0 = Japanese 1 11-11-13

(To select options 8~10, press 1 = English
either 8 or Recall, then press line 2 = German
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 3 = French
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.) 4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
17 = Simplified Chinese
18 = Traditional Chinese

02 Trunk Ring Tone 1 = High 2 22-03

Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming 2 = Medium
trunk ring for the extension port you 3 = Low
are programming. 4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

2-186 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

03 Extension Ring Tone 1 = High 8

Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming 2 = Medium
extension call ring for the extension 3 = Low
port you are programming. Also 4 = Ring Tone 1
refer to Program 15-08. 5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5

04 Redial (Speed Dial) Control 0 = Common and Individual Speed Dialing 0

Control the function of the 1 = Group Speed Dialing
extension Redial key when used
with Speed Dialing. The Redial key
can access either the Common or
Group Speed Dialing numbers.

05 Transfer Key Operation Mode 0 = Transfer 0

Set the operating mode of the 1 = Call back
extension CONF key. The keys can 2 = Hook
be for Call Transfer, Serial Calling
or Flash. When selecting the Flash
option (selection 2), refer also to
Program 81-01-14.

06 Hold Key Operating Mode 0 = Normal (Common) 0

Set the function of the Multiline 1 = Exclusive Hold
Hold key. The Hold key can
activate normal Hold or Exclusive
Hold.

07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines 0 = Hold 1

When talking on a CO call and 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
another CO line key is pressed, the
original trunk is placed on Hold or
Disconnected.

08 Automatic Handsfree 0 = Preselect 1

Set whether pressing a key 1 = One-Touch (Automatic Handsfree)
accesses a One-Touch Key or if it
preselects the key.

10 Ringing Line Preference for 0 = Idle (Off) 1

Trunk Calls
1 = Ringing (On)
Select between Idle and Ringing
Line Preference for trunk calls.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-187

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

11 Callback Automatic Answer 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable automatic answer 1 = On
of calls recalling to a station. For
example, if a Transfer Recall or
Hold Recall is ringing back to a
station, the following happens:
If PRG 15-02-11 is enabled, the
station automatically answers the
recall when it goes off-hook.
If PRG 15-02-11 is disabled, a
station does not automatically
answer the recall when it goes off-
hook. The user must first press the
line appearance of the recalling call
or press the answer key.

12 Off-Hook Ringing 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 5

Set the telephone Off-Hook 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
signaling. Off-hook signaling 2 = Not Used
occurs when a telephone user 3 = Beep in Speaker (SP)
receives a second call while busy 4 = Beep in Handset (HS)
on a handset call. To enable/
5 = Speaker & Handset Beep
disable Off-Hook Signaling for an
extension Class of Service, use
Program 20-13-06.

13 Outgoing Caller List Mode 0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/Trunk Mode) 1

Select whether the Redial List 1 = Trunk Mode
feature should store internal and
external numbers (0), or only
external numbers (1).

15 Storage of Caller ID for answered 0 = Disable (Off) 1

call
1 = Enable (On)

16 Line Load Control Restriction 0 = Disable (Not Restricted) 0

Enable/Disable an extension user 1 = Enable (Restricted)
ability to make and receive calls
when the Line Load Control feature
is triggered.
Warning: When enabled, users
cannot make or receive internal
and external calls including 911
calls if the Line Load Control
feature is enabled and triggered..

18 Power-Saving Mode 0 = Normal mode 1 20-02-10

1 = Power-Saving Mode (Eco-Mode)

2-188 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

21 Virtual Extension Access Mode 0 = DSS 2

(when idle Virtual Extension key
pressed)
1 = Outgoing (OTG)
2 = Ignore
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension/Call Arrival Key(CAR)
should function as a DSS key, a
Virtual Extension, or a CAR key.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1)
is selected, the key functions as a
virtual extension and can be used
for incoming and outgoing calls.
When Ignore (2) is selected, the
key functions as a CAR key and
can receive incoming calls only.

22 Multiple Incoming From 0 = Disable 1 22-01-01

Intercom and Trunk 1 = Enable
If enabled, this affects how a
Hotline key lights, based on the
setting in Program 22-01-01. If
22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk
priority, the Hotline key lights solid
when a trunk call rings in. If 22-
01-01 is set to 0 for intercom
priority, the Hotline key does not
light for incoming trunk calls, but
lights solid for intercom calls.
If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline
keys light solid for any incoming
calls regardless of the setting in
Program 22-01-01.

23 Speed Dial Preview Mode 0 = Preview 0

Define how a speed dial key 1 = Outgoing Immediately
functions when pressed. If set to
Preview (0), the speed dial number
can be previewed before dialing. If
set to Outgoing Immediately (1),
the number is dialed immediately.

24 Conference Key Mode 0 = Conference 0

Allow an extension Conf key to be 1 = Transfer
programmed for Conference or for
Transfer. When set for 1, the user
places a call on hold, dials the
extension to which it should be
transferred, then presses the Conf
key. The call is then transferred.
When set for 0, with an active call,
the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses
the Conf key twice. All the calls are
then connected.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-189

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

26 MSG Key Operation Mode 0 = Message Key 0

Determine whether an extension 1 = Voice Mail Key
MSG key should function as a
Message key or Voice Mail key. If
set as a Message key, users can
press the key to call the voice mail
only when they have new
messages.

27 Handset Volume 0 = Back to Default (Back) 1

Determine how an extension 1 = Stay at previous level (Stay)
handset volume is set after it is
adjusted during a call.
 When 1 is assigned in this
program and a user sets the
volume to maximum, the volume is
reset to a level to meet FCC
standards when the user hangs
up.

28 Message Waiting Lamp Color 0 = Green 1 15-02-35

Determine whether an extension 1 = Red 15-02-36
15-02-37
Message Waiting Lamp lights 15-02-38
Green or Red when a message is
received.

29 PB Back Tone Level 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32

Allow adjustment of the PB Back
(0dB)
Tone Level when you are calling an
ISDN Line.

30 Toll Restriction Class 0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual Extension Class) 1

Select the Toll Restriction Class to 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension Class)
use when placing a call from a
virtual extension.

34 Call Register Mode 0 = Trunk Mode 0

The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk 1 = Extension/Trunk Mode
calls only (0), or both Internal and
Trunk calls (1).

35 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for 1 = Cycle 1 7 15-02-28

Calling Extension 15-02-36
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-37
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-38
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has set Message
5 = Cycle 5
Waiting.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

2-190 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

36 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for 1 = Cycle 1 3 15-02-28

Called Extension 15-02-35
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-37
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-38
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has Message Waiting set
5 = Cycle 5
to the extension.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

37 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp 0 = Green 1 15-02-28

Color 15-02-35
1 = Red
Select the color of the Large LED 15-02-36
when a voice mail message is
15-02-38
waiting at the extension.

38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp 1 = Cycle 1 3 15-02-28

Cycle 15-02-35
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-36
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-37
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has a VM Message
5 = Cycle 5
Waiting set to the extension.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

40 Additional Dial for Caller ID Call Up to four digits (0, 1~9, #, ) 10-02-04
Return
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using the
Caller ID Return function.

41 Incoming Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Normal Ring 0

1 = Headset Ring

42 Incoming Off-Hook Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Off-Hook Ring 0

1 = Headset Off-Hook Ring

43 Headset Ring Duration 0 = No Switch to Speaker Ring 0

1 = 10 seconds
2 = 20 seconds
3 = 30 seconds
4 = 40 seconds
5 = 50 seconds
6 = 1 minute

44 Reversing Display Indication 0 = Normal Indication 0

The display on the DT800/DT700/ 1 = Reversing Indication
DT400/DT300 style telephones can
be set to Normal or Reversed.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-191

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

45 Double Height Character 0 = Normal Indication 0

Indication
1 = Double height character indication of
On the DT800/DT700/DT400/ calendar display line
DT300 style phones Name and 2 = Double height character indication of name
Number Line (2), Calender Line (1) and number display line
or No Line (0) set to has double
height characters.

46 Backlight LCD duration 0 = Continuous on 2

On the DT800/DT700/DT400/ 1 = 5 seconds
DT300 style phones set the time 2 = 10 seconds
the Backlight LCD stays on. 3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds

47 Icon display of DESI-less 0 = Off 1 11-11-17

On the DTL/ITL-8LD style phones 1 = On 15-07-01
15-20-01
are icons displayed (1), or not
displayed (0).

48 Short Ring Setup 0 = Disable 0 80-09-01

1 = Enable

49 Button Kit Information for 0 = No setting 0 90-48-01

Multiline Telephone
1 = Not Used
2 = Type-A with Cursor Key
3 = Type-B with Cursor Key
4~9 = Not Used
10 = Type-A for Overseas without Cursor Key
(Retrofit)
11 = Type-B without Cursor Key (Retrofit)

51 Alarm Notification to other 0 = Disable 1 20-08-16

NetLink System
1 = Enable

52 Voice Mail Message Waiting 0 = Light the VM function key only. 15-07-01
Lamp Setup
1 = Light the Message Waiting lamp only.
2 = Light the MW lamp and VM key.

54 Menu Operation Mode 0 = Automatic Close 0

1 = Manual Close

57 Caller Log on Busy 0 = Off 1 15-02-34

1 = On

58 Display Mode of Incoming Trunk 0 = Caller ID 0 13-04-08

1 = Memo Information 13-04-09
13-04-10

60 Softkey/Navigation Key Mode 0 = Standard Mode 1

1 = Advanced Mode

2-192 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

69 Microphone Operation on 0 = No change for MIC status 0

Handsfree
1 = Start from MIC enabled
Select the microphone status when 2 = Start from MIC muted
starting Handsfree mode.

70 MIC Key Operation 0 = Enabled 0

Control whether the microphone 1 = Disabled
key is enabled (0) or disabled (1).

71 Disable Softkey 0 = Off 0

When set to 1 (On), disable Softkey 1 = On
and cursor key operation at the
terminal.

72 Large LED Illumination Setup 2 = Red 3

Internal Incoming)
3 = Green
4 = Blue
5 = Yellow
6 = Purple
7 = Light Blue
8 = White
9 = Rotation

73 Multiline Telephone Basic Data 0 = Pack 0

Setup - Calling Party History
View Mode
1 = Unpack

For saving multiple entries for the

same number (in case of different
calling times), set this to 1. For
saving a single entry for the same
number, set this to 0.

74 Ten Key Backlit Control 0 = Normal 0

This program sets the brightness of 1 = Half
the ten key backlighting
When Set to Normal (0), brightness
of ten key backlighting is Full.
When set to Half (1), brightness of
ten key backlighting is Half.

Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern

Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38

Input Cycle

1 Cycle 1 500ms – ON / 500ms – OFF

2 Cycle 2 250ms – ON / 250ms – OFF
3 Cycle 3 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-193

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern

Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38

Input Cycle

4 Cycle 4 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 625ms – OFF

5 Cycle 5 875ms – ON / 125ms – OFF
6 Cycle 6 625ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF
7 Cycle 7 1000ms – ON

Table 2-5 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern

External Incoming Signal High 1100 1400 16Hz

Frequency (Pattern 1) Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz
External Incoming Signal High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz
Frequency (Pattern 2) Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz
External Incoming Signal High 2000Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Frequency (Pattern 3) Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 16Hz
External Incoming Signal High 2000Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Frequency (Pattern 4) Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Internal Incoming Signal High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz
Frequency Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to the Input Data chart.

2-194 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line telephone
options.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No Program

01 SLT Signaling Type 0 = DP 1 15-03-03

Select the type of dialing the connected 1 = DTMF 45-01-01
telephone uses.
For the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless
telephones to function correctly, this must be set
to 0. If this option is set for DTMF, after an
outside call is placed, the system cannot dial any
additional digit.
This program change is automatically performed
when the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless
telephone is registered. When upgrading
software from prior versions, the previous default
of 1 is saved from the prior database so this
option must be changed manually.

03 Terminal Type 0 = Normal 0 15-03-01

Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port 1 = Special 45-01-01
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after
the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).

04 Flashing 0 = No 1
Enable/Disable Flash for single line (500/2500 1 = Yes
type) telephones.

05 Trunk Polarity Reverse 0 = Off 0

Not Used in U.S. – Do Not Change Default Entry 1 = On
as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-195

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No Program

06 Extension Polarity Reverse 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Not Used in U.S. -- 1 = Enable (On)
Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues
may arise with voice mail.

07 Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) 0 = No 1 11-12-45

1 = Yes

08 Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 0 = Disable (No) 1 11-12-46

1 = Yes (Enable)

09 Caller ID Function - For External Module 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Enable/Disable the Caller ID FSK signal for an 1 = Enable (On)
external Caller ID module or a 3rd party vendor
telephone with Caller ID display.
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting must be
disabled for the system integration codes to be
correct.
 With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed,
this must be set to 0 for incoming callers to
have a talk path.

10 Caller ID Name 0 = Disable 1 15-03-09

Determine if an extension user telephone should 1 = Enable
display the Caller ID name.

11 Caller ID Type 0 = FSK 0

Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or 1 = DTMF
DTMF.

14 Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Calling 0

Determine what the display shows when a Extension
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside Number
call. (Calling)
1 = External
Caller ID
(Forward)

15 Disconnect without dial after hooking hold 0 = Normal 0

Determine whether or not to disconnect a held 1 = Disc.
call when on-hook without any dialing after
hooking-hold.

16 Special DTMF Protocol Send 0 = No 0

Determine whether or not to send the extension 1 = Yes
number of the phone forwarded to the extension
when PRG 15-03-03 is set to Special (1) and not
in the VM group.

18 Select Special Terminal Type 0 = Fax 0 15-03-03

Select what terminal type transmits data via a 1 = Modem
SIP trunk.

2-196 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Normal

Outgoing Idle
Call
Reverse

Normal

Idle
Incoming
Call Reverse

Normal

Idle
Call Reverse
Pickup

(1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-197

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets

2-198 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP
telephone.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 Terminal Type 1 = H.323 3 Viewing Only – No changes

2 = SIP permitted
3 = None
4 = DT800/DT700

02 IP Phone Fixed MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 MAC Address of registered 15-05-01

Port SIP MLT phone is stored
Assignment 00-00-00-00-00-00 to
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF and/or can input the MAC
address of an SIP MLT
phone so when it comes
online it is provided with the
extension in which the MAC
address matches.

04 Nickname Up to 48 characters No setting Nickname section on Invite 15-05-17

message. Example:
Extension 100 has a
Nickname set to PAUL.
Extension 101 has
command 15-05-17 set to
Nickname. The inbound call
to extension 101, from 100,
shows PAUL.

07 Using IP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 Informational Only 15-05-01

Address
registered IP Phones

09 Call Procedure 0 Viewing Only – No changes

Port permitted

11 DT800/DT700 0~65535 No setting

C/CTR Port

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-199

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

15 CODEC Type 1-Type 1 1 Assign the CODEC Type of 84-24-XX

2-Type 2 the MLT SIP.
3-Type 3
4-Type 4
5-Type 5

16 Authentication Up to 24 characters None Assign the authentication 15-05-01

Password password for SIP single line
telephones.

18 IP Duplication 0 = Disable 0 Allows one IP Address to be 15-05-01

Allow Mode assigned to multiple
1 = Enable
extensions.

19 Side Option 0 = No Option 0 This is a read only program 10-03-09

Information that shows what type of Line 15-05-22
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit Key unit is installed on the
telephone.
3 = 24ADM

20 Bottom Option 0 = No Option 0 This is a read only program 10-03-10

Information that shows what type of
1 = ADA
2 = BHA adapter is installed on the
telephone.

21 Handset 0 = Normal Handset 0 This is a read only program 10-03-11

Option that shows what type of 15-05-23
Information 1 = Handset for power
failure (PSA/PSD) Handset is installed on the
telephone.
2 = BCH

22 Side Option 0 = No Setting 0 This is a read only program 30-01

Additional Data 1~32 = DSS Console that shows the DSS console 30-02
number number when one is 30-03
installed on the telephone. 30-04
30-05
30-06

23 Handset 0 = No Setting 0 Determine to use TEN or

Option not.
Additional
1~16 = Terminal
Information equipment number
(TEN) of Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
(BCH)

24 Protection 0 = Not Used 0 When enabled this allows

Service the MLT SIP telephones to
1 = Used
use the security key. If
disabled, and the key is
pressed, nothing happens.

2-200 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

26 DT800/DT700 0 = Not Set 0

Terminal Type
1 = ITL-( )E-1D/IP- ()E-1
2 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL-
24BT1D/ITL- 4PA-
1D [without
8LKI(LCD)-L]
3 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL-
24BT1D/ITL-24PA-
1D [with 8LKI(LCD)-
L]
4 = ITL-320C-1
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
7 = AGW
10 = ITL-DG-3
11 = ITL-CG-3
12 = ITL-2CR-1
13 = ITZ-**-*D/ITZ-**PD-
*D/ITZ-**DZ
14 = ITZ-*CG
15 = ITZ-**LDG/ITZ-**LD
16 = ITY-6D
17 = ITY-8LDX

27 Personal ID 0~960 0 Used when the SIP 84-22-XX

Index Multiline telephone is
using manual/auto
registration. Assign each
phone a unique personal
index. Then go to
command 84-22 to assign
the user name and
password.

28 Addition 0 = Do not inform 0 Select whether or not to

Information 1 = Inform inform of additional
Setup
information.

29 Terminal WAN- 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

side IP
Address

30 DTMF Play 0 = Do Not Play 0

during 1 = Play
Conversation
at Receive
Extension

31 Alarm Tone 0 = Off 1

during 1 = On
Conversation
(RTP packet
loss alarm)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-201

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

32 Ten Key Pad 0 = Off 0

Talkie
1 = On

33 LAN Side IP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 Read-only

Address of
Terminal

34 Terminal Touch 0 = Off 1 Select whether the touch

Panel On/Off 1 = On screen used on
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
can be used (1) or cannot
be used (0).

35 Encryption 0 = Off 0
Mode
1 = On

36 DT800/DT700 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

Firmware
Version

37 DT800/DT700 2 = Red 3 Sets LED color for

Large LED internal Intercom call. In
Illumination
3 = Green
Setup 4 = Blue DT800/DT700 local
5 = Yellow terminal setting menu,
6 = Purple illumination setting must
7 = Light Blue be ‘Automatic’, otherwise
8 = White the terminal will ignore
PRG 14-01-35,
9 = Rotation
PRG 15-05-37 and
PRG 15-23 settings.

38 Paging 0 = Multicast 1 Sets the protocol mode

Protocol Mode for the Paging function.
1 = Unicast
(With V5000 or 2 = Auto
higher, the
default is “1”)

39 CTI Override 0 = Disable 0 Sets the override function

Mode against the terminal that
1 = Enable
is controlled by the CTI.

40 Calling Name 0 = Both name and 0 Sets the incoming calling

Display Info via number name display type on a
Trunk for
Standard SIP 1 = Name only standard SIP terminal.
2 = Number only Trunk name is the first
3 = None priority and abbreviated
(SPD) name is second
priority.

41 Time Zone 0~24 (-12~+12) 12 Sets the time difference

(Hour) from the system time set
in Program 10-01. Input
hour(s) based on this
Program.

2-202 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

43 Video Mode 0 = Disable 0 This Program is used to

1 = Enable select the video function
with the standard SIP
terminal. If the standard
SIP terminal supports the
video function, the
SV9100 transfers the
video CODEC in SDP
information.

44 Using 0 = Disable 0 This Program is used to

Standard SIP 1 = Enable Enable or Disable the
Display for
CPN system to send INVITE
Fromtag Display attribute
which is sent from a
standard SIP terminal as
CPN to ISDN and if there
is no Display attribute
from standard SIP
terminal, the system will
not refer to either PRG
21-12-01 or 21-13-01 and
no CPN will be sent.

45 NAT Plug & 0 = Disable 0 Select sending RTP port 10-46-14

Play 1 = Enable number to remote router.
(0) uses result from
negotiation result, (1)
from received RTP
packet. Effective only
when 10-46-14 is to NAT
Mode.

46 Door Phone 0 = Not assigned 0 Indicates automatically 10-03

Number assigned IP Door Phone (DLCA)
1 ~ 8 = Door Phone No.
(Read Only) Number after system PGD
registers the Door Phone
port. System assignes the
number not to duplicate with
the Door Phone connected
to 2PGDAD. (Read Only)

47 Registration 0 = Disable 180 On a per station basis, this 10-46-14

Expire Timer setting defines the SIP
for NAT 60 ~ 65535(sec)
registration expiry timer. If
this value is set to 0, for a
NAPT terminal, the value in
PRG 84-23- 01 is applied.
Note: Version 9000 or higher
is required.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-203

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

48 Subscribe 0 = Disable 180 On a per station basis, this 10-46-14

Expire Timer setting defines the SIP
for NAT 60 ~ 65535(sec)
Subscribe expiry timer. If this
value is set to 0, for a NAPT
terminal, the value in PRG
84-23-02 is applied.
Note: Version 9000 or higher
is required.

49 Receiving SIP 0 = Disable 1 Select whether or not

INFO system can receive DTMF
1 = Allowed any time
2 = Allowed while RTP is from standard SIP phone via
SIP INFO message. There
not available
are two receive types.
1=’Allowed any time' can
receive a SIP INFO
message from a standard
SIP phone as a dial
information any time.
'2=Allowed while RTP is not
available' can receive a SIP
INFO message before
establishing RTP
connection.

50 Peer to Peer Off = Disable 1 On a per station basis

Mode On = Enable enable or disable Peer to
Peer mode.

51 Transport 0 = UDP 0 This program shows the

Protocol transport protocol for
1 = TCP
selected SIP terminal.
Read Only.

Conditions

 15-05-04 – Nickname must be unique in the system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-204 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each
extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use
Program 14-07 to define the available access maps.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Related
Trunk Access Map Number Default
No. Program

01 1~400 1 14-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

 Central Office Calls, Placing

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-205

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line
keys.

For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26
appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program Function
Keys using Service Codes.

To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Line Key

Function Number Additional Data
No. Number

01 1~48 0~99 Refer to Function

(Normal Function Code) (Service Code 751 by default) Number List.
* 00 ~ *99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 752 by default)

2-206 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Programmable keys 1~8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All other
programmable keys are undefined.

Line Key Function Number Additional Data

LK01 01 (Trunk Line Key) 1

: : :

LK08 01 (Trunk Line Key) 8

LK09 0 (No Setting) 0

: : :

LK48 0 (No Setting) 0

Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 Not Defined
01 DSS/One-Touch Extension number or any Red On: Extension Busy
numbers (up to 24 digits) Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic Off
Off: Mic On
03 DND Key Red On: DND
04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05 Headset Red On: Headset in use
06 Transfer Key None
07 Conference Key Red On: Conference call setup occurring
08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New call log
Red On: Call log
Off: No call log
09 Day/Night Mode Switch Mode number (1~8) Red On: Mode active
10 Call Forward – Immediate Red On: Forwarded
11 Call Forward – Busy Red On: Forwarded

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-207

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

12 Call Forward – No Answer Red On: Forwarded

13 Call Forward – Busy/No Red On: Forwarded
Answer
14 Call Forward – Both Ring Red On: Forwarded
15 Follow Me Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded
18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature activated by Function
Key
19 External Group Paging External Paging Number Red On: Page Active
(1~8)
20 External All Call Paging Red On: Page Active
21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number Red On: Page Active
(01~64)
22 Internal All Call Paging None
23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal None
Paging
24 Call Pickup None
25 Call Pickup for Another None
Group
26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group Number None
Group
27 Speed Dial – Common/ Speed Dial Number None
Private (Common / Private)
28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None
29 Repeat Redial Red On: Waiting to redial
30 Saved Number Redial None
31 Memo Dial None
32 Meet – Me Conference None
33 Override (Off-Hook None
Signaling)
34 Barge – In No data or Extension No. (not None
Virtual Extension) or . In case
of  refer to the Extension No.
(not Virtual Extension) set in
24-09-03.
35 Camp On Red On: While camp-on activated
36 Step Call None

2-208 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

37 DND/FWD Override Call None

38 Message Waiting None
39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): While being
monitored
Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring
40 Handset Transmission Red On: Transmission cut-off
Cutoff
41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42 Boss – Secretary Call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary mode
43 Series Call None
44 Common Hold None
45 Exclusive None
46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out
47 Reverse Voice Over Extension Number Red On: extension busy
Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Green: Reverse Voice Over to
extension in progress
48 Voice Over Slow Blink (Red): Voice Over – Active
49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice None
Mail Number
50 Account Code Red On: While account code being
entered
51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~ 8) Red On: Relay On
52 Automatic Answer with Incoming Ring Group Red On: Under setting
Delay Message Setup (001~100)
53 Automatic Answer with Red On: Active
Delay Message Start
54 External Call Forward by Red On: Active
Door Box
55 Extension Name Change None
56 General Purpose LED Blink (Red): Active
Operation
57 General Purpose LED Blink (Red): Active
Indication

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-209

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

58 Automatic Transfer at Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active

Department Group Call ( 01~64)
59 Delayed Transfer at Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active
Department Group Call (01~64)
60 DND at Department Group Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active
Call (01~64)
61 --- Not Used ---
62 Flash (Recall) Key None
63 Outgoing Call Without Caller Red On: Active
ID (ISDN)
64 --- Not Used ---
66 --- Not Used ---
67 --- Not Used ---
68 --- Not Used ---
69 --- Not Used ---
70 --- Not Used ---
71 --- Not Used ---
72 Keypad Facility Key None
73 Keypad HOLD Key None
74 Keypad RETRIEVE Key None
75 Keypad Conference Key None
76 Application Key (3rd Party Any dial data (8 digits) None
CTI)
77 Voice Mail Extension Number or Pilot <InMail>
Number Fast Flash (Green): New Message(s)
in own Mailbox.
Slow Flash (Red): New Message(s) in
other Mailbox.
<APSU(VM00)/External VM>
Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Fast Flash (Green): New Message(s)
in own Mailbox.
Slow Flash (Red): New Message(s) in
other Mailbox.
78 Conversation Recording – Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
Voice Mail

2-210 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin) Number Fast Blink (Red): Set Up for No
Answer Calls
Stutter Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy
Calls
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
80 Tandem Ringing 1 = Set Red On: Active
0 = Cancel
Extension Number to Tandem
Ring
81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line No. (001~400) Slow Flash: Set
Transfer Key
82 --- Not Used ---
83 Conversation Recording 0 = Pause
Function (VMSU) 1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
84 Drop Key None
85 --- Not Used ---
86 Private Call Refuse None Slow Flash: Set
87 Caller ID Refuse None Slow Flash: Set
88 Dial-In Mode Switching PRG 22-17 Table No. Off: Pattern 1, Pattern 5~8
(1~100) On: Pattern 2
Slow flash: Pattern 3
Fast flash: Pattern 4
89 Do-Not-Call Setup
90 Do-Not-Call Data
Registration
91 Live Recording Key SV8100
InMail
94 Call Attendant Fast flash: Setup – No Answer Calls
Slow flash: 125ms:on 125ms:off 
125ms:on 625ms:off
On: Setup – Busy/No Answer Calls
97 Door Box Access Key Door Box Number (1~8) On: Door Box Busy
Off: Door Box Idle
Fast flash: Door Box Incoming
98~99 --- Not Used ---

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-211

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

#04 Change Restriction Class One-time Toll Restriction

#06 Power Saving for Power Power Save Group Number On (Red): Set
Save Group 00~32 (00 = All Groups) Off: Cancel
#07 Fixed Operation Mode Night Mode Service Group No. Fast flash (Red) : – Setup
(01~32)
#08 Bluetooth Connect
#09 Bluetooth Path
#11 Major Alarm On (Red): A major alarm has occurred.
#12 Minor Alarm On (Red): A minor alarm has occurred.
#13 Calling Party Number Any number up to 24 digits. On (Red): Set
Notification Off: Cancel
#14 Multi-Device Support On (Red): Set
Off: Cancel

Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

Red On: Off Hook on Intercom Call

00 ICM Key None
Red Blink: Intercom Call on Hold

Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User

01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001~400)
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension

Trunk Group Number Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User

02 Trunk Group
(001~100) Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension

Extension Number or Red On: Trunk busy by another user

03 Virtual Extension Key
Department Group Number Slow Blink (Red): Incoming Call

Slow Blink (Red): Call Placed in

Park by Another User
04 Park Key Park Number (01~64)
Fast Blink (Green): Extension
Placed Call in Park

0~2 (0:Incoming, Green On: Extension on an active

05 LoopKey
1:Outgoing, 2:Both) call.

2-212 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

Trunk Access Via Network System Number

06
Networking (01~50)

07 Station Park Hold None

CAP Orbit No. (0001~9999)

If CAP Orbit No.0000 is
08 CAP Key used, the next available
orbit is automatically
selected.

Red On: Under log-on

10 Log-In/Log-Out
Off: Under log-off

Red On: Under monitor, Override,

Standby
12 Emergency Call Fast Blink (Red): Supervisor
Telephone Receiving Emergency
Call

Red On: Under Off Duty

13 Off Duty Mode
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation

14 Start/End Red On: Operation End

15 Terminal Speech Monitor Red On: Under Monitor

16 Waiting Red On: Standby

Red On: Under Work Time

17 Work Wrap Up Time
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation

Red On: Enable

18 Overflow Control Group Number
Slow Blink (Red): Disable

Queue Status Display

19
Check

On(Red): Play Warning Message

32 Warning Message
Off: Stop Warning Message

On(Red): Security Sensor On

33 Sensor Mode Related PRG20-50-01
Off: Security Sensor Off

34 Caller ID Marking Setup

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-213

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

On (Red) : other using

35 System Call History On (Red) : using
Off (Green) : not using

On (Red) : When using Contact

36 ACD Whispering
Center Whispering

On (Red) : While displaying queue

ACD Queue Alarm ACD Group No. status
37
Display (01 ~ 64) Fast Flash (Red) : Queue has more
calls than PRG 41-02-06

2-214 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

LED Indication Reference:

ON = LED pattern 7 (On).

OFF = LED pattern 0 (Off).
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5 (IL).
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1 (FL).
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4 (IR).

Conditions

 When a key is programmed using service code 752, it cannot be programmed with a function using
the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing
752 + 04 must be undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key
by dialing 751 + 48.

 When assigning a CAP key, 08, an orbit number must be used. If orbit 000 is used, it automatically
assigns the next available orbit.

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to Function Number List.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-215

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0~4)
to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing
for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-
03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 512 available extension ports.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Incoming Ring Pattern Default Description
No.

01 0 = Tone Pattern 1 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension

1 = Tone Pattern 2 is assigned to the function key on the
2 = Tone Pattern 3 key telephone, select the ring tone when
3 = Tone Pattern 4 receiving a call on that key.
4 = Incoming Ring Tone
Extension For CAR keys, only tone pattern 1 (entry
5 = Tone Pattern 5 0) can be used. The remaining patterns
6 = Tone Pattern 6 are not checked with this feature.
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

2-216 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Table 2-6 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Frequency Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz

Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz
Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz
Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz
Pattern 3 High 2000 760 16Hz
Middle 1400 660 16Hz
Low 1100 540 16Hz
Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz
Middle 1400 660 8Hz
Low 1100 540 8Hz
Internal Incoming Signal High 1100 1400 8Hz
Frequency Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-217

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15-
07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.

Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual
Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). There are 512 Virtual Extension Ports.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits

Key Number 01~48

Item Day/Night
Ringing Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0 = No Ringing 0
1 = Ring

Conditions

 Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
telephone programming.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-218 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1~4) for
the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension
simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There
are 512 Virtual Extension ports.

Input Data
Extension Number 1 ~ 960

Item Priority Related

Data Description
No. Order Program

01 1~4 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When two or more virtual 15-08

1 = Tone Pattern 2 extensions are set on a
2 = Tone Pattern 3 function key on the telephone,
3 = Tone Pattern 4 and the tone pattern by which
4 = Incoming Extension the sound of each extension
Ring Tone differs, the priority of ring
5 = Tone Pattern 5 sound is set up.
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8

Default

 By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order:

Priority Ring Tone

Order (Set in Program 15-08)

1 0 (Tone Pattern 1)

2 1 (Tone Pattern 2)

3 2 (Tone Pattern 3)

4 3 (Tone Pattern 4)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-219

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-220 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in Program
15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 512 Virtual Extension Ports.

Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports.
Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code 03).

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Key Number 01~48

Item Day/Night Related

Ringing Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = Immediate Ring 0 20-04-03

1 = Delayed Ring 15-09-01

Conditions

 Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone
programming.

 PRG 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the

CAR/VE key to Delay Ring.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-221

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the ACI
Conversation Recording destination for each extension.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-

NOTE
12 is followed.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
Number

01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Maximum eight No Setting

Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk digits
calls should be recorded.

02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls 0 = Off 0

Determine if an extension incoming calls should be 1 = On
automatically recorded to the ACI.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2-222 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-13 : Loop Key Data
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-13 : Loop Key Data to set the Loop Key Data for each terminal. Loop Keys can be
Incoming, Outgoing, or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in Item 01. Incoming Loop Keys
use the entry in Item 02. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both Items 01 and 02.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Key Number 01~48

Item
Item Input Data Default
Number

01 Outgoing Option 0~8 or 0~100 Programmable Function Key

(0 = Assigns the Loop Key for Number 01~32:
ARS, 1~100 = Assigns the
Outgoing Option - 0 (Assigns the
Loop Key to the trunk group Loop Key for ARS)
specified.)
Incoming Option - 0 (Assigns the
02 Incoming Option 0~8 or 0~100 Loop Key to all trunk groups)
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all
trunk groups, 1~100 =
Assigns the Loop Key to the
trunk group specified.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Loop Key

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-223

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each
multiline terminal.

For each UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature, enter
the destination number (up to 24 digits) and name (up to 12 characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make
sure to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed
either through 15-14-01 or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also
changed.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Key Number 01~10

Item
Dial Data Name Default
No.

01 1~0, , #, Pause, Hookflash, Up to 24 Digits No Setting

@ (Code for Answer-Wait)
Up to 24 digits

02 Name Up to 12 Digits No Setting

Default
No entries for any extension.
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 One-Touch Keys

2-224 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for Extensions.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

01 Register ID None, 0~31 None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-225

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash
assignment on each CO line.

Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions 001 ~ 960

Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 LED Flash Assignment 0 = LED Off 0

1 = LED On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-226 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a Virtual
Extension Key is pressed.

Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions 001 ~ 960

Item Defaul Related

Item Input Data
No. t Program

01 Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 0 = Release 0 20-04-01

Define if calls to a Virtual Extension Key land on the 1 = Land on the
Virtual or on the extension/ CAP/CO appearance. key
 This is assigned for the Virtual Extension
Key, not the extension it resides on.

02 Display mode when placing a call on Virtual 0 = Secondary 0

Extension Key Extension
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key Name
display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of 1 = Actual Station
the extension it resides on. Name

03 Show CLI 0 = No CLI info 0 15-09-01

When set to a 0, the caller ID of a trunk call/station call 1 = Show CLI info
pointed to a virtual extension will not be displayed if
the virtual extension is not set to ring.
When set to a 1, the caller ID of a trunk call pointed to
a virtual extension WILL be displayed if the virtual
extension is not set to ring. Station calls to a virtual
that is not assigned to ring will display the station
name or number if PRG 15-18-04 is set to a 1.

04 Show Internal Caller Information 0 = Do not show 0 15-09-01

When set to a 0, internal calls to the virtual extension 1 = Show 15-18-03
will not show the name or number of the extension
that is calling.
When set to 1, internal calls to the virtual extension
WILL show the name or number of the extension that
is calling if the virtual is assigned to ring or if PRG 15-
18-03 is set to a 1.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-227

 Issue 4.0

Item Defaul Related

Item Input Data
No. t Program

05 One Ring 0 = Normal Ring 0 15-09-01

When set to a 0, the virtual extension follows the Cycle
normal ring cycle. 1 = One Ring
When set to a 1, the virtual extension will only ring one
time (the virtual extension must be first set to ring in
PRG 15-08).

Conditions
If a trunk call rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1 (Land on the
key), or the multiline terminal must have a CAP Key or CO Line Appearance.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-228 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension to set the operations of the
Telephone Book for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Telephone Book 1 0~200 Port 1 : 1

Port 2 : 2
:
:
Port 200 : 200

02 Telephone Book 2 0~200 0

06 Locking of Telephone Book 0 = On 0

1 = Off

07 Password 0000~9999 (Fixed four digits) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-229

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assigns a name to each LCD Line Key of
the SV9100 telephones and ADM option. Up to 13 characters can be assigned.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Key Number 01~48

Name Assignment Up to 13 characters

Default Settings

Line Key Name

LK01 CO 001

: :

LK08 CO 008

LK09 All Blank

: :

LK48 All Blank

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-230 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension
feature.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Mobile Extension Target Setup 0~9999 (0 = No setting/1~9999 = target of mobile extension) 0

Set which Speed Dial bin is used
to call when the Mobile extension
is called.

02 Connect Confirmation 0 = Always 0

Select when a confirmation (dial ) 1 = On Analog Line
is required to allow the call to cut 2 = Never
over to the called mobile number.

03 Trunk Access Code 0 = Use normal trunk access code (11-09-01) 0

Select if the Normal or Individual 1 = Use individual trunk access code (11-09-02)
Trunk access is used when
making the call to the mobile
number.

04 Call Back 0 = Disable 0

Set up the Call Back for each 1 = Enable
Mobile extension number.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-231

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-232 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup to set the color of the large LED,
when the Virtual Extension rings.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 DT800/DT700 Large LED Illumination Setup 2 = Red 5

3 = Green
4 = Blue
5 = Yellow
6 = Purple
7 = Light Blue
8 = White
9 = Rotation

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-233

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal to register data in the standard SIP
terminal where Register is not used.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Using IP Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

IP Address of the standard SIP
terminal that is used as the SIP
extension. When Program 15-24-03 is
set to 1, this Program cannot be
changed from 0.0.0.0 (except using
PCProgramming).

02 Call Procedure Port 0~65535 5060

Call procedure port of the standard
SIP terminal that is used as SIP
extension.

03 Registration Setting when 0 = Disable 0

REGISTER isn’t used
1 = Enable
Enables or disables the Registration
method. An error will occur if Program
15-24-01 is 0.0.0.0 and this Program
is set to 1 (except using
PCProgramming).

04 Transport Protocol 0 = UDP 0

This program sets the transport 1 = TCP
protocol for selected SIP terminal
without registration method.

2-234 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-235

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup to define the page of each DESI-less extension.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Incoming Call Notify Event 0 = Disable 1

Enable or disables the screen number icon on 1 = Enable
display.

02 Automatic Screen Change on Incoming Call 0 = Disable 1

Automatically changes display to show Incoming 1 = Enable
Call number.

03 Automatic Display Setting While Idle 0 = Disable 0

This setting set which screen displays during the 1~4 = DESI-less Page
idle state.

04 Automatic Display Setting While Speaking 0 = Disable 0

This setting set which screen displays while 1~4 = DESI-less Page
speaking.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-236 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-27 : Power Saving Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-27 : Power Saving Setup to set the power saving mode for extensions.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Power Saving Group Number 0 = Power Save Off 0

1 ~32 = Power Save Group

02 Power Save during Power Failure 0 = Disable (Power supply) 0

1 = Enable (Power cut off)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-237

 Issue 4.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-29 : Setting of Function Key for BTH Handset
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 15-29 : Setting of Function Key for BTH Handset to make the relationship of function
keys between the BTH and the Desk Terminal.

Input Data
Function Key number of BTH 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Key of BTH 1 ~48 (Key on Desk BTH Key 1 = Desk Terminal Key 01 ~ BTH Key 8 = Desk
Terminal Key) Terminal Key 08)

Conditions

 Multiple BTH Keys cannot be assigned with the same Desk Terminal key in PRG 15-29-01. Each
BTH key must be assigned a unique Desk Terminal Key.

 The following function keys are supported:

 *00 ICM Key

 23 Meet-me Answer to Internal Paging

 29 Repeat Redial

 41 Buzzer

 42 Boss - Secretary Call

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-238 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

Issue 4.0

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-239

 Issue 4.0

2-240 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

 Program: 16

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each
department group. There are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data
Department Group Number 1~64

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Department Name Maximum 12 characters No 11-07

setting

02 Department Calling Cycle 0 = Normal Routing (Priority) 0 16-02

Set the call routing for Department Calling. 1 = Easy – UCD Routing (Circular)
Routing can be either circular (cycles to all
phones in group) or priority (cycles to
highest priority extensions first).

03 Department Routing when Busy (Auto 0 = Normal (Intercom caller to busy 0 16-02
Step Call) department member hears
Set how the system routes an Intercom call busy)
to a busy Department Group member. 1 = Circular (Intercom callers to
Intercom callers to the extension can either busy department member
hear busy or route to the first available routes to idle member)
department number. This only occurs for
calls to the extension directly, not the
department number assigned in Program 11-
07.

04 Hunting Mode 0 = Last extension is called and 0

Set the action taken when a call reaches the hunting is stopped
last extension in the Department Group (0 = 1 = Circular
hunting stopped, 1 = hunting repeats with
circular routing through the Department
Group).

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-241

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Extension Group All Ring Mode 0 = Manual 0 11-16-10

Operation
1 = Automatic
Determine whether calls ringing a
Department Group should ring all extensions
in the group simultaneously automatically or
manually when using the service code
defined in Program 11-12-09.
 When set to (1) Automatic, only
ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all
the stations in the Department Group.
06 STG Withdraw Mode 0 = Disable (Camp On) 0
1 = Enable (Overflow Mode)

07 Call Recall Restriction for STG 0 = Disable (Recall) 0

Determine whether or not an unanswered 1 = Enable (No Recall)
call transferred to a Department Group
should recall the extension from which it was
transferred.

08 --- Not Used ---

09 Department Hunting No Answer Time 0~64800 seconds 15

Set the time a call rings a Department group
extension before hunting occurs.

10 Enhanced Hunt Type 0 = No queuing 0

Set the type of hunting for each Extension 1 = Hunting When Busy
(Department) Group. 2 = Hunting When Not Answered
3 = Hunting When Busy or No
Answer

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Calling

2-242 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department Groups.
The system uses these groups (64 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to
Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments.
Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group. When a call comes
to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority. 1

Input Data
Extension Number 1 ~ 960

Item Group Related

Priority Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1~9999 1 – xxx Set up the Department Group called 11-07

(See by the pilot number and the extension 16-01
Note) priority when a group is called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.

 The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02
and 11-04. (Extension ports are 1~ 960. Virtual extension ports are 1~512.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Calling

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-243

 Issue 4.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for
extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per Department Group. There are 64 available
Department Groups.

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64

Item Secondary Extension Priority

Description
No. Extension Number Number Order

01 1~16 Maximum 8 digits 0~9999 This program is set up when placing

telephones in two or more groups.

Default
All extension groups : No setting
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Calling

2-244 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between
members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted per group. Each department
group can restrict calls to up to eight department groups in Department Group - Departmental Call
Restriction.

Input Data
Extension (Department) Group Number 1~64

Restricted Group Index 1~8

Restrict
Department Description Default
Group Number

0~64 Calls between members of different Department (Station) 0

groups can be restricted per group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-245

 Issue 4.0

2-246 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

 Program: 20
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
01 Operator Access 0 = Step Call 0 Set up priority of a call when calling 20-17
Mode an operator telephone.
1 = Circular
02 Text Message 0 = Call mode 1 Select the mode when calling the 11-11-14
Mode telephone which set up the text 15-07-08
1 = No Answer/Busy
mode message.

04 Network BLF 0~64800 seconds 0 Used to determine how often the

Indication UX5000/SV9100 updates the DSS
key BLF indications. For NetLink,
the entry should be 30 in all
UX5000/SV9100 systems.

05 DTMF Receive 0~64800 seconds 10 For OPXs, analog telephones and 25-07-01
Active Time certain analog trunks (like DISA), the
system attaches a DTMF receiver to
the port for this time. The system
releases the receiver after the time
expires.

06 Alarm Duration 0~64800 seconds 30 This time sets the duration of the 11-12-05
alarm signal.

07 Callback Ring 0~64800 seconds 15 Callback rings an extension for this 11-12-05
Duration Time time. 15-07-35
08 Trunk Queuing 0~64800 seconds 15 Trunk Queuing callback rings an 11-12-05
Callback Time extension for this time. 15-07-35
09 Callback/Trunk 0~64800 seconds 64800 The system cancels an extension 11-12-05
Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queuing request 15-07-35
Time after this time.

10 Trunk Guard Timer 0~64800 seconds 1 The time the system waits to seize
the next outside line after the system
releases an outside line.

12 Telephone/Web 1~84600 seconds 900 The system automatically logs out of

Pro Logout Time (84600 sec = 1 day) a Telephone/Web Pro session after
inactivity lasting this time.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-247

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
16 Mobile Extension 1~64800(sec) 15 Set up the system callback duration 15-22-04
Callback Duration time when ringing the target Mobile
Time Extension.

19 Emergency Call 0 = Off 0 Setting to On (1) allows an

Setting of Remote emergency call to be made when
Inspection feature
1 = On
the inspection target is in off-hook
when the Target is
in Off Hook Status status.

20 Progress Tone for 0 = Disable 1 Setting on where the Progress Tone 80-01
Mobile Extension 1 = Enable (1) or Ringback (0) is played to the (Type 54)
Setting Internal Caller until the call to the
Mobile Extension is setup.

21 Recording 0 = Continue 0
Operation on Hold 1 = Exit

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Refer to the Input Data table at the beginning of this section.

2-248 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for
multiline telephones.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Trunk Group Key Operation Mode 0 = Display 1

1 = No Display

Mode: 0 = Display
1 = No Display

Incoming: 300 IPM Red blink

Talking: Green LED Off

Lighting (on
Talking TEL)

Holding: 60 IPM LED Off

Green blink
(on holding
TEL)

02 Trunk Group Access Key 0 = Outgoing/Incoming 0

Operating Mode
1 = Outgoing
Set the operating mode of the 2 = Incoming
extension trunk group keys. The keys
are for incoming access, outgoing
access, or both.

04 Retrieve the Line After Transfer 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) 1 20-09-07
Enable (1)/Disable (0) an extension 1 = Holding (Keep)
ability to answer a call after it has
been transferred, but before it is
answered.

05 Headset Busy Mode 0 = No (Disable) 0

Set the conditions under which a 1 = Yes (Enable)
headset extension is busy to
incoming callers.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-249

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

06 Preselection Time 0~64800 (sec) 5

When a multiline terminal user
preselects a line key, the system
remembers the preselection for this
time.

07 Time and Date Display Mode 1~8 3

Set how the Time and Date appear on Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
display telephones. There are eight Type 2 = (12 hour) 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
display modes. Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15:15 TUE 10 MAR

08 LCD Display Holding Time 0~64800 (sec) 5

09 Disconnect Supervision 0 = Disable (Off) 1

Enable/Disable disconnect 1 = Enable (On)
supervision for the system trunks.

10 Time Before Shifting to 0 = No shift 0 15-02-18

Power-Saving Mode
1 = 1 minute
2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes

11 Handsfree Microphone Control 0 = Off 1

Control the setting for Multiline 1 = On
Terminal Handsfree microphone after
being disconnected and reconnected.
If set to 0, the microphone is always
off when the terminal is reconnected.
If set to 1, the microphone remains in
the same state it was in when the
terminal is reconnected.

12 Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call 0 = Disable (Voice) 0

Type) 1 = Enable (Signal)
Enable/Disable Forced Intercom
Ringing. If enabled, incoming
Intercom calls normally ring. If
disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.

13 --- Not Used ---

14 Headset Ringing Cancel Time (For 0 ~ 64800 30

KST)

2-250 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

15 Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Name and Number (Both) 0

1 = Name
2 = Number

18 Dialing Record Display Time 0~64800 seconds 30

19 Virtual Extension Mode 0 = No 0

Set the mode of a virtual extension 1 = Yes
key that appears on a DSS console.

23 Phone Operation Mode 0 = Original Operation Mode (CAP Key) 0

Selects the Loop Key operation like 1 = UX5000 Special Operation Mode
the UX5000 terminal, or the CAP Key (Loop Key)
operation like the SV9100 terminal.

26 F-Route Outgoing Mode From 0 = Off 0 11-01

Incoming Call History 11-20
1 = On
Enable or Disable the ability to route
Calls in the Call History via F-Route if
the leading digit(s) are set to F-Route.
If set to 0 (Off), all Calls are routed via
Normal Trunk Routing.
If Set to 1 (On), if the leading digit(s)
are set to F-Route in PRG 11-01 or
11-20 the call will follow that F-Route
Programming.

27 Monitor for Business Mode 0 = Off 0

Select whether or not Call Monitor 1 = On
provided works in normal business
mode.

28 Storage of Caller ID for VE Others 0 = Off 0 15-07

Answer 1 = On 15-09
15-11
15-18-03

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-251

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for single
line telephones.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program
01 SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode 0 = Hookflash 0 11-12-47
For a busy single line (500/2500 type) (Hooking)
telephone, set the mode used to answer a 1 = Hookflash +
camped-on trunk call. Service Code
794
02 Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port 0 = Do Not Ignore 0 15-03-01
Define whether the system should receive dial (No)
pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial 1 = Ignore (Yes)
pulse and only accept DTMF signals (1).

03 SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines 0 = Receive all 0 20-03-04

 Type 0: The system keeps the digits dialed data,
dialed by the single line telephone on a before sending
trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are (All)
received, the system sends all the 1 = Direct through
digits to the trunk. If the time space out (Direct)
between digits is longer than the time
in Item 4, the system considers all
digits received.
 Type 1: The system passes the
received digits from the single line
telephone to the trunk immediately. If
the single line telephone has a Last
Number Dial key without a pause, this
key may not be able to use the Last
Number Dial key with the Type 1
setting.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must
be set for Wireless – DECT users to be able
to break dial tone on an analog trunk that is
used for paging.

2-252 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program
04 Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS 0~64800 seconds 3 20-03-03
When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the
system waits this time before outdialing the
first digit.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-03 to 1.

05 SLT Operation Mode 0 = Normal Mode 0

1 = Extended
Mode 1
2 = Extended
Mode 2
06 Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT) 0~64800 seconds 5 20-13-38
Define the headset ringing start time. After this
time expires from the time when a single line
telephone is off-hook, the system sets the
single line telephone to headset ringing mode.

07 Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time 0~64800 seconds 0 20-03-03
(Forced Dial) 20-03-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-253

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for
Virtual Extensions. There are 512 available virtual extension ports.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval 0~64800 seconds 10

CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(see Program 15-11) ring the extension after this time.

04 Virtual Extension Key Seize Mode 0 = Normal 1

Change the BLF status of a SIE key. When set to Enhanced, 1 = Enhanced Option
the BLF does not show as being busy when the station is on a
trunk call. When set to Normal, the BLF shows as being busy
when on a trunk call.

05 Ringtone Mode for Incoming Calls to Virtual Extensions 0 = Off 0

Related PRG15-08-01, PRG22-03-01 1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (CAR/Secondary Incoming Extensions/Virtual Extensions)

2-254 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an
extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of
Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each
Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Day/Night Class of Service

No. Mode for Extensions

01 1~8 1~15

Default

 Extension number 101 as Class 15.

 All other extension numbers are set as Class 1.
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-255

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator
service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
1~14

01 Manual Night Service Enabled 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-01

Turn off or on an extension for manual Night 1 = On
Service Switching.

02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-02

Turn off or on an extension to change the 1 = On
Music on Hold tone.

03 Time Setting 0 = Off 1 1 11-10-03

Turn off or on an extension to set the Time via 1 = On
Service Code 728.

04 Storing Speed Dialing Entries 0 = Off 1 1 11-10-04

Turn off or on an extension to store System or 1 = On
Group Speed Dialing numbers.

05 Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Off 0 0 11-10-06

Transfer 11-10-07
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use 11-10-08
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.

06 Charging Cost Display 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

07 --- Not Used ---

08 --- Not Used ---

09 --- Not Used ---

2-256 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
1~14

10 Programmable Function Key Programming 0 = Off 1 1 11-11-38

(Appearance Level) 20-13-18
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
program the Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.

11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-26

only)
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect.

12 Trunk Port Disable 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-27

1 = On

13 VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation) 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-19

Turn off or on an extension user ability to 1 = On
record, erase and listen to VRS messages.

14 VRS General Message Play 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-21

Turn an extension off or on to dial 4 or Service 1 = On
Code 611 to listen to the General Message.

15 VRS General Message Record/Delete 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-22

Turn off or on an extension user ability to dial 1 = On
Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or
erase the General Message.

18 SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-23

Data 1 = On

19 SMDR Printout Department Group (STG) 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-24

Data
1 = On

20 SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code 0 = Off 0 1 11-10-25

Data
1 = On

21 Register and delete DECTPP 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

22 --- Not Used ---

23 CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback 0 = Off 0 0

Number Programming
1 = On
Enable/Disable an extension ability to receive
CO Message Waiting Indication.

24 Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse 0 = Off 0 0 11-10-32

Enable/Disable an extension user ability to set 1 = On
or cancel Private Call Refuse.

25 Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse 0 = Off 0 0 11-10-33

Enable/Disable an extension user ability to set 1 = On 11-10-34
or cancel Caller ID Refuse.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-257

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
1~14

26 Dial-In Mode Switch 0 = Off 0 0 11-10-35

1 = On

27 Do-Not-Call Administrator 0 = Off 0 0 25-01-07

1 = On 15-07-89
20-01-19

28 --- Not Used ---

30 Date Setting 0 = Off 1 1 11-10-41

1 = On

34 Clear Alarm Report 0 = Off 0 1

1 = On

35 Save Statistical Information for RTP 0 = Off 0 1

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

2-258 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS COS Program
01-14 15

01 Intercom Calls 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on Intercom calling for the extension. 1 = On

02 Trunk Outgoing Calls 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on outgoing trunk calling for the 1 = On
extension.

03 System Speed Dialing 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to make 1 = On
outbound calls using system speed dial
numbers.

04 Group Speed Dialing 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to make 1 = On
outbound calls using group speed dial numbers.

05 Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to use Dial 1 = On
Number Preview.

06 Toll Restriction Override 0 = Off 0 0 11-11-36

Turn off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service 1 = On 21-01-07
21-07
Code 663).

07 Repeat Redial 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to use Repeat 1 = On
Redial.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-259

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS COS Program
01-14 15

08 Toll Restriction Dial Block 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension ability to use Dial 1 = On
Block.

09 Hotline/Extension Ringdown 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on Ringdown Extension for 1 = On
extensions with this COS.

10 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension allowing it to force 1 = On
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.

11 Protect for the Call Mode Switching from 0 = Off 0 0

Caller
1 = On
(Internal Call)

12 Department Group Step Calling 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to use 1 = On
Department Group Step Calling.

13 ISDN CLIP 0 = Off 0 0 10-03-05

Determine if the ISDN calling line identity 1 = On 15-01-04
presentation and screening indicators are
allowed.

14 Call Address Information 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

15 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Off 0 0 14-01-20

Turn off or on the system ability to automatically 1 = On 14-01-21
block outgoing Caller ID information when a user
places a call.
If this option is on, the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits.

16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and 0 = Off 0 0

Number
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension ability to display the
name and number of the extension that dialed
911.

17 ARS Override of Trunk Access Map 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to 1 = On
override the trunk access map programming for
outgoing calls.

19 Hotline for SPK 0 = Off 0 0 20-08-09

Set the ability of an extension to have Hotline 1 = On
activated or deactivated when going off hook via
the speaker key.

2-260 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS COS Program
01-14 15

20 Hot Key Pad 0 = Off 0 0

Set the ability of an extension user to make a call 1 = On
by dialing the number without first going off hook.

21 Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing SPK 0 = Off 0 0

Key
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
automatically access Trunk Route when going
off hook via the speaker key.

22 Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to make 1 = On
Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension.

23 Display Indication for Security Sensor 0 = Off 0 0

Detection
1 = On
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an extension’s ability to
display indication for security sensor detection.

24 Display Indication for Emergency Call by 0 = Off 0 0

Remote Inspection 1 = On
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an extension’s ability to
display indication for emergency call by remote
inspection.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-261

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS COS Program
01~14 15

01 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M Override 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on the extension ability to receive a 1 = On
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be busy for a
second DNIS caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does not have a trunk
or CAP key available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing the extension
but has not yet been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of this
program setting.
02 Caller ID Display 0 = Off 0 0 15-02-08
Turn off or on the Caller ID display at an 1 = On
extension.

03 Sub Address Identification 0 = Off 0 0

Define whether or not an extension displays 1 = On
the Caller Sub-Address.

04 Notification for Incoming Call List 0 = Off 0 0 20-09-02

Existence
1 = On
Determine whether or not an extension display
shows Check List when an incoming call is
missed by a user.

2-262 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS COS Program
01~14 15

05 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off 1 1 11-11-15,

Turn off or on an extension user ability to 1 = On 11-11-16
enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced
Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.

06 Incoming Time Display 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

07 Call Queuing 0 = Off 1 1 20-13-06

Turn off or on an extension user ability to have 1 = On
calls queued if a call rings the extension when
it is busy.

08 Calling Party Information 0 = Off 1 1 50-02-05

Turn off or on an extension ability to display 1 = On
calling party information on CCIS calls.

10 --- Not Used ---

11 --- Not Used ---

13 DND Active While Ringing 0= 0 0

When set to 0, and if set DND during an Immediate
incoming call, the call for the terminal stops 1=
immediately. When set to 1, and if set DND Next Call
during an incoming call, the call for the terminal
continues ringing and is set for the next call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-263

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature
availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data COS COS
01~14 15

01 Group Call Pickup (Within Group) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an 1 = On
extension Pickup Group as well as ring group calls (Service
Code *#).

02 Group Call Pickup (Another Group) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a 1 = On
group (Service Code 769).

03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group 1 = On
(Service Code 768).

04 Telephone Call Pickup 0 = Off 1 1

Enable/disable the group call pickup. 1 = On

05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an 1 = On
extension Pickup Group (Service Code 756).

06 Meet-Me Conference and Paging 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Meet-Me 1 = On
Conference and Paging.

07 Automatic Off-Hook Answer 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Universal 1 = On
Auto Answer (no service code required).

2-264 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data COS COS
01~14 15

08 Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to answer an incoming 1 = On
call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extension
(SIE)/Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.

09 Call Pickup Callback 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Pickup to 1 = On
pick up Callback calls.

10 Answer Preset 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-265

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and
Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No. COS COS
01~14 15

01 Call Forward All 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate Call 1 = On
Forwarding All.

02 Call Forward When Busy 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward 1 = On
when Busy.

03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward 1 = On
when Unanswered.

04 Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to activate Call 1 = On
Forwarding with Both Ringing.

05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate Call 1 = On
Forwarding with Follow Me.

06 Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Unscreened 1 = On
Transfer.

07 Transfer Without Holding 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Transfer 1 = On
Without Holding.

2-266 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No. COS COS
01~14 15

08 Transfer Information Display 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability for incoming Transfer 1 = On
preanswer display.

09 Group Hold Initiate 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Group 1 = On
Hold.

10 Group Hold Answer 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to pick up a call on 1 = On
Group Hold.

11 Automatic On-Hook Transfer 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Automatic On 1 = On
Hook Transfer.

12 Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call Forwarding) 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to set up Call 1 = On
Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.

13 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to have a call which 1 = On
recalls from hold transfer to the operator.

14 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. If 1 = On
enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not possible.

15 VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to record, listen to, 1 = On
or erase the Personal Greeting Message.

16 Call Redirect 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on a multiline terminal user ability to transfer a 1 = On
call to a predefined destination (such as an operator, voice
mail, or another extension) without answering the call.

17 Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each 0 = Off 1 1

Telephone Group Transfer)
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to set
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-267

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No. COS COS
01~14 15

18 No Recall 0 = Off 0 0
When set to a (0) OFF, unanswered transferred calls will 1 = On
recall to the station that performed the transfer once the
transfer recall timer expires.
When set to a (1) ON, unanswered transferred calls will
NOT recall to the station that performed the transfer once
the transfer recall timer expires.
 Unanswered transferred calls to a Virtual
Extension or Virtual Loopback port will always recall
once the transfer recall timer expires.
19 Hold/Extended Park 0 = Off 0 0
Determine if an extension Class of Service should allow 1 = On
either a normal or extended Park.

20 No Callback 0 = Off 0 0
Turn off or on an extension ability to receive callbacks. 1 = On

21 Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up 0 = Off 0 0

Allow/Deny an extension user ability to set up a tandem/ 1 = On
conference call automatically when they hang up.

22 Restricted Unsupervised Conference 0 = Off 0 0

Allow/Deny an extension user ability to initiate an 1 = On
unsupervised conference.

23 CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel 0 = Off 1 1

Turn 0ff or on an extension user ability to set or cancel call 1 = On
forwarding for a virtual extension.

24 Trunk Park Hold Mode 0 = Non 1 1

Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by an Exclusive
extension. Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive
Hold
(On)

25 Transfer Park Call 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to transfer a parked 1 = On
call.

26 Station Park Hold Mode 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

27 Call Park Automatically Search 0 = Off 1 1

1 = On

2-268 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No. COS COS
01~14 15

28 Both Ring Enhancement 0 = Normal 0 0

0 = Normal (default) rings on other extension when the 1 = Enhanced
other paired extension is busy (not idle).
1 = Enhanced does not ring other extension when the other
paired extension is busy (not idle).

30 Disable Call FWD Indication on LCD 0 = Off 1 1

When set to 1, Call FWD setting is not shown on the 1 = On
terminal LCD.

31 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service - 0 = Disable 1 1

Transfer to Remote Conference)
1 = Enable
Use this option to enable or disable an extensions ability to
transfer a call to a remote conference.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-269

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging Cost
service availability for each extension service class.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data COS COS
01~14 15

02 Advice of Charge 0 = Off 0 0

ISDN-AOC 1 = On

03 Cost Display (TTU) 0 = Off 1 1

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

2-270 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the
supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. COS COS Programming
01~14 15

01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation 1 = On
(not for single line telephones).

02 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long 1 = On
Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long 1 = On
Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.

04 Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call 1 = On
Forwarding/DND Override.

05 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook 1 = On
signals.

06 Automatic Off-Hook Signaling (Automatic Override) 0 = Off 1 1

Allow a busy extension ability to manually (0) or 1 = On
automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.

07 Message Waiting 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to leave 1 = On
Message Waiting.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-271

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. COS COS Programming
01~14 15

08 Conference 0 = Off 1 1
Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a 1 = On
conference or Meet-Me Conference.

09 Privacy Release 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Voice 1 = On
Call Conference.

10 Barge-In Monitor 0 = Speech 0 0 20-13-45

Enable the extension Barge-In Mode to be Speech or 1 = Monitor
Monitor.

11 Room Monitor, Initiating Extension 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to Room Monitor 1 = On
other extensions.

12 Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by 1 = On
other extensions.

13 Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued 1 = On
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking
on extension.

14 Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to call a 1 = On
Department Group Pilot.

15 Barge-In, Initiate 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on 1 = On
other's calls.

16 Barge-In, Receive 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to have other 1 = On
extensions barge-in on calls.

17 Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an 1 = On
alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when
another extension barges into their conversation. If off,
there is no alert tone or display indication.

18 Programmable Function Key Programming 0 = Off 1 1

(General Level)
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension user ability to program
General function keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
752.)

2-272 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. COS COS Programming
01~14 15

19 Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging) 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use 1 = On
Selectable Display Messaging.

20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0 = Off 0 0

(Restricted Operation Transfer)
1 = On
Turn off or on operator alert when an extension user
improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.

21 Extension Name 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to program its 1 = On
name.

22 Busy Status Display (Called Party Status) 0 = Off 0 0 20-13-06

Turn off or on the ability to display the detailed state of 1 = On
the called party.

23 Display the Reason for Transfer 0 = Off 0 0

Select whether or not an extension should display the 1 = On
reason a call is being transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).

24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge 1 = On
into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be
enabled if this option is used.

25 --- Not Used ---

26 Group Listen 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Group 1 = On
Listen.

27 Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension 0 = Off 1 1

If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking 1 = On
on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call
Waiting) must be set to 0 for this option to work.

28 Allow Class of Service to be Changed 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on the ability of an extension Class of 1 = On
Service to be changed via Service Code 677.

29 Paging Display 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to display paging 1 = On
information.

30 Background Music 0 = Deny 1 1

Allow/Deny an extension user to turn Background 1 = Allow
Music on and off.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-273

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. COS COS Programming
01~14 15

31 Connected Line Identification (COLP) 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

32 Deny Multiple Barge-Ins 0 = Off 0 0

Allow/Deny an extension user from having multiple 1 = On
users Barge into their conversation.

33 Supervisor’s Position Enhancement 0 = Off 0 0 11-13-10

This option must be set to 1 for the operator to use 1 = On 11-13-11
11-13-12
service codes in Program 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13. 11-13-13

34 Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to block off-hook 1 = On
signals manually sent from a co-worker.

35 Block Camp On 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to block callers 1 = On
from dialing to Camp On.

36 Call Duration Timer Display 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension display of the Call Duration 1 = On
Time. The system waits until the interdigit time
(Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer.

37 --- Not Used ---

38 Headset Ringing for SLT 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the 1 = On
Headset ringing.

39 Queue Status Display 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on the Queue Status Display for an 1 = On
extension Class of Service. Any extension which has
this option enabled also receives the queue alarm.

40 Do Not Disturb 0 = Off 1 1 11-11-08

Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel 1 = On 15-07-03
Do Not Disturb.

41 Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS 0 = Off 0 0

Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an 1 = On
extension on a DSS console.

42 Extension Data Swap Enabling 0 = Off 1 1 11-15-12

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Extension 1 = On
Data Swap.

43 --- Not Used ---

44 Live Monitor Enabling 0 = Off 1 1

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live 1 = On
Monitor.

2-274 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. COS COS Programming
01~14 15

45 MIC Key Mode while Call Monitoring 0 = Enable 1 1 20-13-10

Set per class of service, when in Call Monitoring Mode (Off)
determines if the monitored parties receive the barge in 1 = Disable
alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled. (On)

47 Station Number Display 0 = Off 1 1

Determine if a station Number is displayed (1) or not 1 = On
displayed (0) in the LCD when the phone is idle.

48 Station Name Display 0 = Off 1 1

Determine if a station Name is displayed (1) or not 1 = On
displayed (0) in the LCD when the phone is idle.

49 BLF Indication on CO Incoming State 0 = Off 0 0

Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a Normal 1 = On
CO call is ringing the phone.

50 AIC Agent display which call is from 0 = Off 1 1

Determine if the station logged in via AIC code shows 1 = On
which queue the call is coming from.

51 Number and Name Appear in the Directory 0 = Off 1 1

Determine if an extension name and number are listed 1 = On
(1) or unlisted (0) in the directory.

52 VoIP All DSP Busy Display 0 = Disable 1 1

Set whether “All DSP Busy” alarm displays on LCD 1 = Enable
when the caller makes an IP call and there is no VoIP
DSP resource.

53 Language Selection for Specific Extension 0 = Disable 0 0 11-11-68

1 = Enable 15-02-01
47-02-16

54 Call Waiting for Standard SIP Terminal 0 = Disable 0 0 20-09-01

Set up Call Waiting (off-hook signaling) for standard SIP 1 = Enable 20-09-07
20-13-05
terminal. When set to enable, this PRG looks at 20-13-06
PRG 20-13-05, 20-13-06, 20-09-01, and 20-09-07.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-275

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line
Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign
tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.

Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by
this program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk
IMPORTANT
calls are NOT supported by this program.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 1~15

01 First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Dialed) 0 = Off 0

For tie lines, enable/disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first 1 = On
incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3-
and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.

02 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk 1 = On
Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS).

03 Trunk Group Access 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to access trunk 1 = On
groups for outside calls (Service Code 704).

04 Outgoing System Speed Dial 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the System 1 = On
Speed Dialing.

05 Operator Calling 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 0 for the 1 = On
telephone system operator.

2-276 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 1~15

06 Internal Paging 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the 1 = On
telephone system Internal Paging.

07 External Paging 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the 1 = On
telephone system External Paging.

08 Direct Trunk Access 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct 1 = On
Trunk Access (Service Code #9).

09 Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk 1 = On
Disconnect (Service Code 3). This option is not available to
DISA callers.

10 Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward 1 = On
service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05).

11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Barge-In. 1 = On

12 Retrieve Park Hold 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to retrieve a Park 1 = On
Hold call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-277

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type.

Input Data

Item Ringing
Incoming Signal Type Default
No. Cycle

01 Normal Incoming Call on Trunk 1~13 2

02 PBX, CES Incoming Call 8

03 Incoming Internal Call 12

04 DID/DISA/VRS 8

05 DID/DDI/DIL 8

06 Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line 12

07 Door Box Ringing for SLT 8

08 Virtual Extension Ring 8

09 Callback 11

10 Alarm for SLT 5

11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming 6

Call

2-278 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Number Ringing Cycle

1 On

2 On:2.0 / Off:4.0

3 On:1.0 / Off:2.0

4 On:0.5 / Off:0.5

5 On:0.25 / Off:0.25

6 On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5

7 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25

8 On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0

9 On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0

10 On:1.0 / Off:4.0

11 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25

12 On:1.0 / Off:3.0

13 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-279

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. There
are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 24 characters. Use the following chart when programming
messages.

Table 2-7 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }  Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
 Enter characters:
 + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ  Ω ∞ ¢ £
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming
mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

2-280 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the UNIVERGE SV9100 system, not all the same
characters are available.

Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number 01~20

Item
Input Data
No.

01 24 characters

Number Message

1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##

2 MEETING ROOM – ########

3 COME BACK ##:##

4 PLEASE CALL ###########

5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##

6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##

7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##

8 BUSINESS TRIP ##########

9 GONE FOR THE DAY

10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##

11 MESSAGE 11

12 MESSAGE 12

13 MESSAGE 13

14 MESSAGE 14

15 MESSAGE 15

16 MESSAGE 16

17 MESSAGE 17

18 MESSAGE 18

19 MESSAGE 19

20 MESSAGE 20

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-281

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.

Feature Cross Reference

 Selectable Display Messages

2-282 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-17 : Operator Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0 or
9 (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program.

If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension assigned
in this option.

Input Data
Operator Number 1~8

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Operator’s Extension Number Up to eight digits 101 11-01

Define the extension numbers to be used
20-01-01
by operators.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Intercom

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-283

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers. Refer
to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
01 Extension Dial Tone 0~64800 seconds 30 After getting Intercom dial tone,
Time a telephone user has this time
to dial the first digit of the
Intercom call.

02 Busy Tone Timer 0~64800 seconds 15

03 Congestion Tone 0~64800 seconds 10 A Busy Tone when system
resources run short. (such as
DTMF receiver resources).

04 Call Waiting Tone Timer 0~64800 seconds 10 Sets the time between Call
Waiting tones. This timer also
sets the time between
Off-Hook Signaling alerts.

05 Multiline Confirmation 0~64800 seconds 10

Tone

06 Interval of Call Waiting 3~64800 seconds 10

Tone

07 Intrusion Tone Repeat 0~64800 seconds 0 After a call is interrupted (such

Time as Barge-In, Voice Mail
Conversation Recording, or
Voice Over), the system
repeats the Intrusion Tone after
this time. Normally, you should
enter 0 to disable this time.

08 Conference Tone 0~64800 seconds 0

Interval

09 Warning Beep Tone 0~64800 seconds 60 14-01-18

Signaling Interval

2-284 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-285

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID
feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Caller ID Displaying Format 0 = First 10 digits 0
(if displaying digits are more than 12 digits) (Upper)
1 = Last 10 digits
(Lower)
02 Caller ID Information Waiting Time 0 ~ 30 5
03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0 = Off 0
1 = On
04 Wait Facility IE Timer 0~64800 seconds 10
This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine the time
the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco.

05 Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait) 0~64800 seconds 0

07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits 1
08 Area Code Up to six digits No
setting
09 Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk Up to 12 No
When set, sends the Calling Party Name to the network. characters setting

10 Message Type Treated as CID for Analog Trunk 0 = ‘2’ only 1

Specify message type number which treats as Caller ID 1 = ‘2’ and ‘3’
from analog trunk.

2-286 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions

 Edit Caller ID works when Program 20-19-07 and Program 20-19-08 are set.

 Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk works when Program 14-01-24 and Program 15-01-01 are set.

Feature Cross Reference

 Caller ID

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-287

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are
displayed when no Caller ID information is received.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE

02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA

03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Caller ID

2-288 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the
Long Conversation feature.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program
01 Long Conversation Alarm 1 0~64800 (sec) 170 14-01-15
The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after
this time.

02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 0~64800 (sec) 180 14-01-15

After the initial long toll call warning tone,
additional warning tones sound after this time.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14

This determines the time the system waits before
disconnecting an incoming call.

04 Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14

This determines the time the system waits before
disconnecting an outgoing call.

05 Conversation Cutoff for Remote Monitor 0~64800 (sec) 180

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Long Conversation Cutoff

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-289

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service to define the time the system
waits before determining the Wireless – DECT phone is out of range. For incoming calls, the time begins
when the call is received. If the time defined here expires before the Wireless – DECT phone starts to
ring, the system determines the phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services (indicates
out-of range, transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension).

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 --- Not Used ---

06 Out of Area Talkie Number 0~100 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Wireless – DECT

2-290 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Delayed ring timer for CTI 0~64800 (sec) 30
02 ALERT replay time (CTI) 0~64800 (sec) 8
03 Trunk Virtual Bridge – TSP Driver 0 = Disable (No) 0
Enable/Disable the system to send trunk or virtual extension 1 = Enable (Yes)
information to the TSP driver.

04 The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line 0~64800 (sec) 30
Telephone

05 UX5000 Migration Mode 0 = Off 0

Define if the CTI integration should operate in UX5000 mode 1 = On
(On:1) or SV9100 mode (Off:0).

06 3rd Party CTI IP Address 0.0.0.0~ 0.0.0.0

Displays the IP address of 3rd Party CTI Server currently 255.255.255.
connected. (Read Only) 255

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-291

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs 0 = Off 1
Up
1 = On
02 Progress Indicate Information Element Detect 0 = Off 1
1 = On
03 Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing 0 = 3.1KHz Audio 0
1 = Speech
04 Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone) 0 = Off 0
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops 1 = On
dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message,
the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first
digit instead of the network.

05 T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect 0 = Off 1

Message
1 = On
06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 = Off 1
1 = On
07 Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect 0 = Local Busy Tone Off 0
Message Received
1 = Busy Tone from NT
(network side)
08 Use of Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC) 0 = Disable (Off) 0
This Program must be set to 0 for International Dialing 1 = Enable (On)
when using Calling Number Presentation (CPN) from
station.

09 High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending 0 = Disable (Off) 0

1 = Enable (On)
10 S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk 0 = Disable (Off) 1
1 = Enable (On)
11 Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/ 0 = Disable (Off) 0
Time Information Element Received
1 = Enable (On)

2-292 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
12 Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send) 0 = Normal – No 0
Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return Message (Off)
Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives 1 = Normal – No
Alerting Message. Message (On)
13 Local Busy Tone (Release) 0 = Off 0
Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE 1 = On
message from Network.

14 No Response Release Send 0 = Off 0

Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer 1 = On
expires.

15 Call Reference Selection for PRI 2B-Channel 0 = Off 0

Transfer
1 = On
This PRG is used to turn on or off the ability for an
incoming call to be transferred (Trunk-to-Trunk) to an
outgoing call when 2 B-Channel Transfer is used.

20 Send Sending Complete Information 0 = No Send 0

1 = Send

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 ISDN Compatibility

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-293

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each
extension service class.

Input Data
Service Class 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Value % 100~500 100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-294 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk
Conversation.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Conversation Continue Code 0~9, #,  No Setting 14-01-25

Input the code that can be dialed (Set for one digit only) 20-28-03
24-02-07
to continue the conversation after 24-02-10
the Trunk-to-Trunk Release 25-07-07
Warning Tone is heard. 25-07-08

02 Conversation Disconnect Code 0~9, #,  No Setting 14-01-25

Input the code that can be dialed (Set for one digit only) 24-02-07
24-02-10
to disconnect the conversation 25-07-07
after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release 25-07-08
Warning Tone is heard.

03 Conversation Continue Time 0~64800 seconds 0 14-01-25

Input the time the conversation
20-28-01
24-02-07
extends when the Conversation 24-02-10
Continue Code is dialed. 25-07-07
25-07-08

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-295

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There
are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night
Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers.

The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number 0~15 0

0 = Not assigned

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-296 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16
Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service
Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number 0~15 0

0 = Not assigned

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-297

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of
service basis.

Input Data
Timer Class Number 1~15

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time 0~64800 seconds 15 seconds 20-01-08

Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for
this time

02 Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 0~64800 seconds 64800 seconds 20-01-09
The system cancels an extension Callback or
Trunk Queuing request after this time.

03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 20-04-03

CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for
Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual
Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the
extension after this time.

04 Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 21-01-02

Timer)
When placing Intercom calls, extension users
must dial each digit in this time.

05 Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer) 0~64800 seconds 5 seconds 21-01-03
The system waits for this time to expire before
placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts
after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).

06 Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start) 0~64800 seconds 5 seconds 21-01-09
A Ringdown extension automatically calls the
programmed destination after this time.

2-298 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

07 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 22-01-03

If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than
this time, the system changes the ring cadence.
This indicates to the user that the call has been
ringing too long.

08 DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 0~64800 seconds 0 seconds 22-01-04

A DIL that rings its programmed destination
longer than this time diverts to the DIL No
Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08).

09 DID Ring-No-Answer Time 0~64800 seconds 20 seconds 22-01-06

In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept,
this time sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This
time is how long a DID call rings the destination
extension before rerouting to the intercept ring
group.

10 Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold) 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-01
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time. This time works with
the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program
24-01-02 ).

11 Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-02
Hold)
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this time. This time works with
Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this
time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time
again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01
and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user answers the
call.

12 Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-03

A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this time.

13 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-04

An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for
this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.

14 Park Hold Time – Normal 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-06

A call left parked longer than this time recalls
the extension that initially parked it.

15 Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 24-02-03
No Answer)
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
the time a Transferred call waits at an extension
forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the
called extension mailbox.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-299

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

16 Transfer Recall Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-02-04

An unanswered transferred call recalls after this
time to the extension that initially transferred it.

17 VRS/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or 0~64800 seconds 0 seconds 25-07-02

IRG or VM)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for
this time before the system sets the call as a
Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call
follows the programmed Ring No Answer
routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04).

18 Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 25-07-03

19 Long Conversation Warning Tone Time 0~64800 seconds 3600 seconds 25-07-07
(Trunk to Trunk)
Determine the time a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can last before the Long
Conversation tone is heard.

20 Long Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 25-07-08

Trunk)
This determines the time the system waits
before disconnecting a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long Conversation
tone is heard.

21 DISA Internal Paging Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-09

This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.

22 DISA External Paging Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-10

This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.

23 Page Announcement Duration 0~64800 seconds 1200 seconds 31-01-02

This timer sets the maximum length of Page
announcements. (Affects External Paging only)

24 Mobile Extension Answer Time 0 = Immediate 3 22-01-12

Answer
1~64800(sec)

25 Mobile Extension Callback Duration Time 1~64800(sec) 15 22-01-16

2-300 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions

 These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 15 in 20-29-01 or
20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used.

 All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-301

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-34: Remote Conference Group Setting to configure Remote Conference
parameters.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Remote Conference - Name Up to 12 characters. Default for conferences 1~4 = Conf 1-Conf 4
Set name for remote conference.
Default for conferences 5~20 = blank

02 Remote Conference - Password Up to 4 numbers. Default for conferences 1~4 = 1111

Set password for remote conference.
Default for conferences 5 ~20 = blank

03 Remote Conference - Maximum 0 ~ 32 Default for conferences 1~4 = 8

Participants
Set the maximum number of allowed Default for conferences 5 ~20 = 0
participants for each conference.

04 Remote Conference - Maximum 0 ~ 64800sec 7200

Conference Duration
Set the time limit (in seconds) for
each conference.

05 Remote Conference - Ending 0 ~ 64800sec 300

Conference Alert Tone Time
Set the time for the conference end
time alert tone to be played.

06 Remote Conference - Password 0 = Normal 0

Mode
1 = Skip
Set whether users are prompted to
enter a password to access the
conference. Normal will prompt users
to enter a password. If set to Skip no
password is required to enter a
conference.

07 MCU Mode for Remote Conference 0 = Disable 0

Set the MCU video mode for remote 1 = Mode 1
conference. Mode 1 = CIF (352x288) 2 = Mode 2
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)

2-302 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Conference Group Setup - 0 = Disable 0

Automatic Recording
1 = Enable
Enable or disable automatic
recording for a Remote Conference. If
disabled, a line key must be used to
start recording.

09 Conference Group Setup - Enter mailbox Not Set

Destination Mail Box number
Enter the mailbox number where (1 ~ 896)
recordings are to be stored. Note:
This is the mailbox number not the
extension number for a mailbox.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-303

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Extension’s Operator Setting 0~15 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-304 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk’s Operator Setting 0~15 0

Allow the user to select Operator Group per trunk. (0 = Not assigned)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-305

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator
group.

Input Data
Operator Group 1~15

Operator Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Operator Extension Group Setup Up to eight digits None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-306 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator
telephone.

Input Data
Operator Group 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Operator Access Mode 0 = Step 0

Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first 1 = Circular
operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried
first (1).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-307

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup to set system options for Watch Message.

Input Data
Operator Group 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internal Paging Group for Watch Message 0 = No Internal Paging 0

Define Internal Paging Group Number for Watch 1 = 1 ~ 64 (Paging Group)
Mode.

02 External Paging Group for Watch Message 0 = No Internal Paging 0

Define External Paging Group Number for Watch 1 = 1 ~ 8 (Paging Group)
Mode.

03 VRS Message for Watch Mode 0 = Warning Tone 0

Define VRS number used for Watch Message. 1 ~ 100 (VRS Message
Number)

04 Interval Timer for Watch Message 0 = No Message 0

Define Interval Time for sending Watch Message. 1 ~ 60 (min)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-308 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup to configure Remote Monitor settings.

Input Data
Terminal 1~6

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Ring Terminal for Remote Monitor Extension Number (Up to 8 digits) No Setting

02 Ring Time Setting 0000~2359 00:00

03 Ring Timer 0~60 0

04 Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0~9999 9999

05 VRS Answer for Message 0~100 0

06 VRS Message for Auto Dial 0~100 0

07 Time of Repeat Auto Dial 0~255 0

08 Auto Dial Calling Time 0, 10~3600 0

09 Interval of Auto Dial 0, 10~3600 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-309

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup to set system Security Sensor options.

Input Data
Security Sensor Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Sensor Mode 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Internal Paging Group for Warning Message 0 = No Internal Paging 0

1 ~ 64 Paging Group

03 External Paging Group for Warning Message 0 = No External Paging 0

1 ~ 8 (Paging Group)

04 VRS Message for Warning 0 = Warning Tone 0

1~100 (VRS Warning No.)

05 Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0~9999 9999

06 VRS Message for Answer 0 = Warning Tone 0

1~100 (VRS Warning No.)

07 Auto Dial Wait Timer 0 = Report Immediately 10

1~64800 (sec)

08 Time of Repeat Auto Dial 0 = No Repeat 3

1~255 (times)

09 Auto Dial Call TIme 0 = No Report 120

1~3600 (sec)

10 Monitored Terminal Extension Number (Up to 8 digits) No Setting

11 Interval of Auto Dial 0 ~ 3600 0

12 General Contact Detector Circuit Setup 0 = Not Used 0

1~8 (Detector Circuit Numbers)

2-310 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-311

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-47 : Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-47 : Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode to assign the Watch Mode time pattern.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Watch Mode 0 = Off 0

Define the Watch Mode on/off against time pattern 1~8. 1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-312 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-48 : Time Pattern Setting for Security Sensor
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-48 : Time Pattern Setting for Security Sensor to assign the Security Sensor time
pattern.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Security Sensor 0 = Off 0

Define the Security Sensor on/off against time pattern 1 = On
1~8.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-313

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-53 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Save Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-53 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Save Group to assign the Night
Mode Service Group Number into the Power Save Group.

Index Data
Power Save Group 1~32

Input Data

Item Defaul
Item Input Data
No. t

01 Night Mode Service Group Number 1 ~ 32 1

Related PRG12-02-XX, PRG20-54.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-314 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-54 : Power Supply Mode for each Power Save Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-54 : Power Supply Mode for each Power Save Group to assign the Power Saving
Mode in each Power Saving group and Night mode.

Index Data
Power Save Group 1~32

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Power Saving Mode 0 = Power Cut 1

1 = Power Supply

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-315

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor to set the interval for the Sensor Delay Timer.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Sensor Delay Timer 0 ~ 3600 (sec) 60

The sensor starts after waiting the interval of time set in (0 = Immediate start)
this setting. A setting of 0 results in immediate start.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-316 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-57 : UC User Information Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-57 : UC User Information Settings to define the user information settings used in UC.

Index Data
User Information Table Number 1~128

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 User ID Up to 16 characters No setting

02 Password Up to 16 characters No setting

41 Extension Number Dial (Up to eight digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-317

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-58 : UC Server Presence Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-58 : UC Server Presence Settings to define the site’s Presence states.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC Server Presence States: In the Office 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 UC Server Presence States: On Vacation 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 UC Server Presence States: Business Travel 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 UC Server Presence States: In a Meeting 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

05 UC Server Presence States: Out to Lunch 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

06 UC Server Presence States: Sick 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

07 UC Server Presence States: Gone for the Day 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

08 UC Server Presence States: Out of the Office 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 UC Server Presence States: Unavailable 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

10 UC Server Presence States: Unknown 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

11 UC Server Custom Presence Usage 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

12 UC Server Custom Presence 1 Definition Any characters No setting

13 UC Server Custom Presence 1 Use 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

2-318 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

14 UC Server Custom Presence 2 Definition Any characters No setting

15 UC Server Custom Presence 2 Use 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

16 UC Server Custom Presence 3 Definition Any characters No setting

17 UC Server Custom Presence 3 Use 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

18 UC Server Custom Presence 4 Definition Any characters No setting

19 UC Server Custom Presence 4 Use 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-319

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-59 : UC Server User Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-59 : Server User Settings to define UC users and their permissions within the UC
Client.

Index Data
User Settings Table Number 1 ~ 896

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC User ID Any character No setting

02 UC User Password Any character No setting

03 UC - DT Client 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

04 UC - DT Web Client 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

05 UC - Deskset Extension 0 ~ 9, *, # No setting

06 UC - Softphone Extension 0 ~ 9, *, # No setting

07 UC - IM- Allow 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

08 UC - Shared Data Allow 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 UC - Global Presence Change Allow 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

10 UC - Message Feature Allow 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

11 UC - Phone Monitor Allow 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

12 UC - Block to be Monitored 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

2-320 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

13 UC - Server Connect 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

14 UC - License Level 0 = Softphone 1

1 = Deskset
2 = Softphone +
Deskset

15 UC - Login Mode 0 = Softphone 1

1 = Deskset

16 UC - Attendant Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

17 UC - Trial Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

18 UC - Voicemail Interface 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

19 UC - Agent Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

20 UC - Abandon Callback 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

21 UC - CRM Integration 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-321

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-60 : UC Server Telephony Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-60 : UC Server Telephony Settings to define special telephony options for the UC
Server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC Server Consult Call for Immediate Transfer 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 UC Server Emergency Number 0 ~ 9, *, # No setting

03 UC Server Exception Table 0 ~ 99 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-322 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-61 : UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-61 : UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings to define the Abandon Call Alerts
settings in the UC Server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UC Server Abandon Call Alerts 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 UC Server Minimum Wait Time 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

03 UC Server Clear Call Timer 00:00 ~ 23:59 00:00

04 UC Server Clear Call If Matching Caller ID Returns to 0 = Disable 0

Queue 1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-323

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-62 : UC Exception Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 20-62 : UC Exception Table to set the Exception Table parameters.

Index Data
User Exception Table Number 1 ~ 99

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Data 0 ~ 9, *, # No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-324 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-64 : UC Web Application Setting
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 20-64 : UC Web Application Setting to set the UC Web application.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Web Conference Duration Timer 0 ~ 64800 7200

02 End Alert for Web Conference 0 ~ 64800 300

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-325

 Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-65 : Multi-Device Group Setup (Terminal Information)
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 20-65 : Multi-Device Group Setup (Terminal Information) to set the Multi-Device
parameters.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Pilot Extension Number 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

02 Member Extension Number 1 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

03 Member Extension Number 2 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

04 Member Extension Number 3 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

05 Member Extension Number 4 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

06 Member Extension Number 5 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

07 Member Extension Number 6 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

08 Member Extension Number 7 0 : MDG Attach No Setting

1 : MDG Detach

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-326 Program 20 : System Option Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-66 : STUN/TURN Server Setting
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 20-66 : STUN/TURN Server Setting to set the STUN/TURN Server parameters.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Type 0 = Disable 0

Define the Server type as Disable, STUN or TURN 1 = STUN
2 = TURN

02 IP Address / Server Name Max. 128 characters No Setting

Define the IP Address or Server Name

03 Port Number 0 ~ 65535 3478

Define the port number of the Server

04 Authentication Name Max. 32 characters No Setting

Set the authentication name if the server needs authentication, otherwise
leave blank.

05 Password Max. 32 characters No Setting

Set the Password if the server needs authentication, otherwise leave
blank

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-327

 Issue 4.0

2-328 Program 20 : System Option Setup

 Program: 21
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Call
Service.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Seizure Trunk Line Mode 0 = Priority Route 0 14-05

Select the trunk based off the Trunk 1 = Circular Route 14-06
Route Priority (0) or based off the
trunk that has not been used in the
longest time (1).

02 Intercom Interdigit Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

When placing Intercom calls, an
extension user must dial each digit in
this time.

03 Trunk Interdigit Time (External) 0~64800 (sec) 5 14-02-08

The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after time
expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).

04 Dial Tone Detection Time 0~64800 (sec) 5 14-02-05

If dial tone detection is enabled, the
system waits this time for the Telco to
return dial tone. When the time
expires, the system assumes dial tone
is not present. To disable this time
(and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-329

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Disconnect Time when Dial Tone 0~64800 (sec) 3

not Detected
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to calls
placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
dialed. It does not pertain to line key
or Direct Trunk Access calls.

06 Dial Pause at First Digit 0~64800 (sec) 1

07 Toll Restriction Override Time 0~64800 (sec) 10 20-08-06

After dialing the Toll Restriction
21-07
Override codes, the system removes
Toll Restriction from the extension for
this time.

08 Preset Dial Display Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

09 Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline 0~64800 (sec) 5 20-08-09

Start) 21-11
A Ringdown extension automatically
calls its programmed destination after
this time.

10 Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path 0~24 0

If this option is programmed with an
entry other than 0, a call does not
have a talk path unless the user dials
at least the number of digits entered in
this option when placing an outgoing
call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911(USA only).
Since it is only a 3-digit number, the
call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher
from hearing the caller. This option
should be kept at its default setting of
0 to prevent any problems with dialing
911 (USA only).

11 Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction 0~60 0

Path Control

2-330 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

12 Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk 0 = Trunk Access 1

Access Code
If enabled (1), an extension user can Required
dial 911 (USA only) without first 1 = Trunk Access
dialing a trunk access code or Code Not
pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an Required
extension user must dial a trunk
access code (e.g., 9) or press a line
key before dialing 911 (USA only).

13 Alarm Ring Timer (E911) 0, 1~64800 (sec) 0 11-12-56

Set the duration of the E911 Alarm (0 = Off) 20-08-16
Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm
does not ring.

14 Forced Account Code Inter-digit 0~64800 (sec) 3

Timer
The system waits this time for a user
to enter a Forced Account code.

15 Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line 0 = Disable (Off) 0 15-01-05

(Toll Restriction) 21-01-16
1 = Enable (On)
Enable/Disable the Outgoing Disable 21-01-17
on Incoming Line feature.

16 Supervise Dial Detection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 20 15-01-05

With the Outgoing Disable on
21-01-16
21-01-17
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the system
determines the call is unable to
complete and releases the DTMF
receiver.

17 Restriction Digit in Outgoing Digits 1~9 4 15-01-05

Disable on Incoming Line 21-01-15
With the Outgoing Disable on 21-01-16
Incoming Line feature, determine the
number of digits to be dialed before
the call should be disconnected.

18 Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk 0 = Enable (On) 1

Access
1 = Disable (Off)
Enable/Disable the ability to continue
to dial codes or extensions after
receiving Trunk Busy. This must be
set to 1 for the Forced Trunk
Disconnect feature to work.

19 Do-Not-Call Setup 0 = No Service 0

1 = Extended
Common
Restriction

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-331

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Placing

2-332 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0~100 1 14-06

(0 = No Setting) 14-01-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-333

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic
External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0~100 1 14-06

(0 = No setting) 14-07-01

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Trunk Group Routing

2-334 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an
extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.

A telephone and a trunk have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing
 calls.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Restriction Related

Day/Night Mode Default
No. Class Program

01 1~9 1~15 2 14-01-08

9 = (Power Failure Mode) 21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-335

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1~15).

Input Data

Toll Restriction Class Number 1~15

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 International Call 0 = Unassigned 1, 6~15 = 0 Assign/Unassign the 21-06-01

Restriction Table (No) International Call Restrict Table
1 = Assigned 2~5 = 1 for the Toll Restriction Class you
(Yes) are programming. Enter
International Call Restrict Table
data in Program 21-06-01.

02 International Call 0 = Unassigned 1, 3~15 = 0 Assign/Unassign the 21-06-02

Permit Code Table (No) International Call Permit Table
1 = Assigned 2=1 for the Toll Restriction Class you
(Yes) are programming. Enter
International Call Permit Table
data in Program 21-06-02.

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Maximum Number of 1~4 = Table 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Select the table (defined in 21-06-03
Digits Table 21-06-03) to be used to
Assignment 0 = Disable
(None) 3=1 determine the maximum number
4=2 of digits allowed for outgoing
5=3 calls.

05 Common Permit 0 = Unassigned 1, 8~15 = 0 Choose whether the table set up 21-06-04
Code Table (No) by 21-06-04 is referred to or not.
1 = Assigned 2~7 = 1
(Yes)

06 Common Restriction 0 = Unassigned 1, 6~15 = 0 Choose whether the table set up 21-06-05
Table (No) by 21-06-05 is referred to or not.
1 = Assigned 2~5 = 1
(Yes)

2-336 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

07 Permit Code Table 1~4 = Table 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Set the tables 1~4 when 21-06-06
0 = Disable 3=1 referring to the table set up by
(None) 4=2 21-06-06.
5=3

08 Restriction Table 1~4 = Table 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Set the tables 1~4 when 21-06-07
0 = Disable referring to the table set up by
(None) 3=1 21-06-07.
4=2
5=3

09 Restriction for 0 = Does Not 0 Enable/Disable Toll Restriction

Common Speed Dials Restrict for Common Speed Dialing
1 = Following numbers. If enabled, System
Restriction Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually
Check
dialed numbers.

10 Restriction for Group 0 = Does Not 0 Enable/Disable Toll Restriction

Speed Dials Restrict for Group Speed Dialing
1 = Following numbers. If enabled, Group
Restriction Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually
Check
dialed numbers.

11 Intercom Call 0 = Disable (No) 0 Determine if incoming intercom

Restriction calls are restricted.
1 = Enable (Yes)

12 PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) 1~6, 8~15 = 0 Set how the system Toll
1 = Enable (Yes) Restricts calls over PBX trunks.
7=1 If you enable PBX Toll
Restriction, the system begins
Toll Restriction after the PBX
access code. The user cannot
dial a PBX extension. If you
disable PBX Toll Restriction, the
system only restricts calls that
contain the PBX access code.
The system does not restrict
calls to PBX extensions. Refer to
the PBX compatibility feature.
Make sure Program 21-05-04
(Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment) allows for
PBX Toll Call Dialing (normally
12 digits).

13 Restriction of Tie 0 = Disable (No) 0 Enable/Disable the toll restriction 34-08

Line Calls of the dial set up by 34-08.
1 = Enable (Yes)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-337

 Issue 4.0

Default

Toll Restriction Class

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

01: International Call Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

02: International Call Permit Table 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
03: --- Not Used --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
04: Max. No. Digits Table Assign. 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
05: Common Permit Table 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
06: Common Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
07: Permit Code Table 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08: Restrict Code Table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
09: Restriction for Common Abbr. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Dials

10: Restriction for Group Abbr. Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11: Intercom Call Restriction 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12: Restriction of PBX Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13: Restriction of Tie Line Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14: Restriction for Incomplete Dialed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk Transfer

15: Allow the Outgoing Trunk to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Common Hold

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-338 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial
1~9, 0, , # can be entered in each table.

Input Data

Item
Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

01 International Call 1~10 Dial Tables 1~10 = No Program the Restrict Table for
Restriction Table Setting international calls. The system
(Up to four
digits) has 10 International Call
Restrict Tables. Each entry
can have up to four digits.

02 International Call 1~20 Dial Tables 1~20 = No Program the Permit Table for
Permit Code Setting international calls. The system
Table (Up to six digits)
has 20 International Call
Permit Tables. Each entry can
have up to six digits.

03 Maximum 1~4 4~30 Tables 1~ 4 = 30 Select the maximum number

Number Digits of digits allowed in outgoing
Table calls for each table.
Assignment

04 Common Permit 1~10 Dial Table 1 = 911 Program the Common Permit
Code Table Code Table. This table
(Up to four Table 2 = 1800
digits) contains up to 10 codes you
Table 3 = 1888
commonly allow users to dial.
Table 4 = 1822
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 = 1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting

05 Common 1~10 Dial Table 1 = 900 Program the Common Restrict

Restriction Table Code Table. This table
(Up to 12 digits) Table 2 = 1900
contains up to 10 codes you
Table 3 = 976
commonly prevent users from
Tables 4 ~ 10 = No dialing.
Setting

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-339

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

06 Permit Code 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Program the Permit Code
Table Setting Tables. If the system has Toll
(table) (Up to 12 digits)
Restriction enabled, users can
001~200 dial numbers only if permitted
(Entry) by these tables and the
Common Permit Table (21-06-
04). There are four Permit
Code Tables, with up to 200
entries in each table. The
system permits calls exactly as
you enter the code.

07 Deny Restriction 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Program the Restrict Code
Table Setting Tables. If the system has Toll
(table) (Up to 12 digits)
Restriction enabled, users
1~60 cannot dial numbers listed in
(Entry) these tables. There are four
Restrict Code Tables, with up
to 200 entries in each table.
The system restricts calls
exactly as you enter the code.

08 PBX Access 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Enter the PBX Access Code.
Code Setting When the system is behind a
(Up to two
digits) PBX, this is the code users
dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after
the PBX access code. For
PBX trunks (Program 14-04)
the system only Toll Restricts
calls that contain the access
code. Always program this
option when the system is
behind a PBX, even if you
don’t want to use Toll
Restriction. PBX Access
Codes can have up to two
digits, using 0-9, #,  and
LINE KEY 1 (don’t care).
When using Account Codes,
do not use an asterisk in a
PBX access code. Otherwise,
after the , the trunk stops
sending digits to the central
office. Entries 1~4 correspond
to the 4 PBX Access Codes.
Each code can have up to two
digits.

09 Specific Dial 1~20 Dial No Setting

Outgoing Code
(Up to eight
digits)

2-340 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

10 Outgoing Call 1~20 Dial No Setting

Code Setup
(Up to four
digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-341

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override
codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0~9, # and . Each
extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Password Default
No. Program

01 Four Digits (Fixed) No Setting 21-01-07

20-08-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-342 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Repeat Redial Count 0~255 3

Set how many times a Repeat Redial
automatically repeats if the call does not go
through.

02 Repeat Redial Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 60

Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts.

03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer 0~64800 (sec) 30

After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial
maintains the call after this time. After this time,
the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat
Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again.

04 Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk 0~64800 (sec) 0
Set the time to send out Busy Tone with an
ISDN line, when called party is busy.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-343

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Block
Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block 1~15 15

Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block
feature is used.

02 Supervisor Password 0~9, , # No

Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable (4-digit fixed) Setting
or disable Dial Block for other extensions.

Conditions

 This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned
extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if
they know the Dial Block password.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-344 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction Class
to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction
Class follows Program 21-09-01.

Input Data

Extension Number 001~960

Item Toll Restriction

Default
No. Class

01 0, 1~15 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-345

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination
number for each extension number.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related
Hotline Destination Number Default
No. Program

01 0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash, No Setting 20-08-09

@ (Code to wait for answer supervision) 21-01-09
(maximum 24 digits)

Conditions

 Use the @ code to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto Attendant.
This code can be used only on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not
supported.

Feature Cross Reference

 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

2-346 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Numbers
for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have
an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the
ISDN trunk defined in 21-12.

If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system
 sends the data in Program 21-13.
NOTE

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Calling Party Number Data Default
No.

01 1~0, , # (maximum 16 digits) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 ISDN Compatibility

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-347

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a
Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the
dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number
assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program
21-12.

If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends
 the data in Program 21-13.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Calling Party Number Data Default
No.

01 0~9, , # (Max. 16 digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 ISDN Compatibility

2-348 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll
Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0~9, #
and .

Input Data

ID Table Number 1~500

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 User ID Dial (Six digits) No Setting

02 Walking Toll Restriction Class Number 1~15 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Toll Restriction

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-349

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk
access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-
09 : Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to
set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent
routing.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Day/Night
Route Table Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No Setting) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Placing

2-350 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking to assign Program 14-06 routes for a
networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A
tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B).

The route number is specified for each system ID (01~50).

Input Data

System ID 01~50

Item Day/Night
Route Table Number Default Related Program
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~100 1 14-06-01

(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Placing

 Networking, NetLink

 Networking

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-351

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party
number for individual trunks.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Up to 16 digits None
(0~9, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-352 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to assign the
Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent to the exchange when the caller
places an outgoing call.

When the Calling Party Number is assigned by PRG 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the system
 uses the data in PRG 21-18 and PRG 21-19.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Up to 16 digits None

Extension
(0~9, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-353

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP calling
party number for an individual extension.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Related Profile

Description Input Data Default
No. Program 1~6

01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Up to 16 Digits None 15-01-04

Number Setup for Extension 20-08-13
(0~9, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-354 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll
restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by PRG 21-05 and 21-06.

This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Description Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Restriction Class 1~15 1 14-01-08

Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected
21-05
trunk.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-355

 Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings to define the settings of
CO Message Waiting Indication.

Input Data

Trunk 001~400

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 CO MWI Call Back Enabling 0 = No VMWI Service 0

Enable/Disable CO MWI Call Back. 1 = Enable VMWI Service

02 CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting 0000~9999 9999

Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call
Back.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-356 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-25 : Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 21-25 : Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension to define CLI number to an
extension. This program is used only when PRG14-01-38 is set to ‘2’.

Input Data

Extension 001~960

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension 0, 1~9, , # (Max. 16 None

Related Programs: 15-01-04, 20-08-13, characters)
14-01-38

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-357

 Issue 4.0

2-358 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

 Program: 22
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming
calls.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
01 Incoming Call 0 = Intercom Call 1 Determine if Intercom calls or trunk 15-02-22
Priority Priority calls have answer priority when both
1 = Trunk Call are ringing simultaneously.
Priority
02 Incoming Call 0 = Disable (Off) 0 If enabled, an incoming call that rings 22-01-03
Ring No Answer 1 = Enable (On) longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm 22-01-04
Alarm (22-01-03), changes to a unique ring
cadence to indicate that the call has
been ringing too long. If disabled, this
does not occur.

03 Ring No Answer 0~64800 (sec) 60 If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 22-01-02

Alarm Time longer than this time, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.

04 DIL No Answer 0~64800 (sec) 0 A DIL that rings its programmed

Recall Time destination longer than this time diverts
to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set
in Program 22-08).

05 --- Not Used ---

06 DID Ring- 0~64800 (sec) 20 In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer 22-12

No-Answer Time Intercept, this sets the Ring-No-Answer
time. This is the time a DID call rings
the destination extension before
rerouting to the intercept ring group.

07 DID Incoming 0~64800 (sec) 20

Ring Group No
Answer Time

08 DID Pilot Call No 0~64800 (sec) 60

Answer Time

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-359

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
09 DID to Trunk to 0~64800 (sec) 20
Trunk no answer
timer

10 VRS Waiting 0 = Enable 0 Set up the operation mode for Auto 22-14
Message Always Attendant and Queuing Message. 22-15
Operation 22-08
1 = Change by
22-04
Manual 22-01-04
Operation 20-15-11
15-07
11 VRS Waiting 0~64800 (sec) 20 Set up the sending duration time of the 22-14-06
Message Interval Auto – Attendant & Queuing. 22-15-06
Time 41-11-06
The message is repeatedly sent out
during the specified time.

12 Mobile Extension 0 = Immediate 3 Set up the system answering time when 15-22-04
Answer Time Answer receiving an incoming call from target
[1~64800(sec)] Mobile Extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

2-360 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.
There is one item for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Day/
Item Related
Night Incoming Type Default Description
No. Program
Mode

01 1~8 0 = Normal 0 Set the feature type for the 14-04

1 = VRS (second dial trunk you are programming.
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching

Conditions

 When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected T1
service type, the T1 cable or the T1 blade must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 blade
to sync.

 When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID feature
is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.

 When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not
supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-361

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

2-362 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk
uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.
Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Ring Tone Pattern Default Description
No. Program

01 0~3 = Tone Pattern 1~4 0 Select the ring tone range for the trunk. 15-02
4~8 = Melody 1~5 The trunk uses a ring tone in the range
9~12 = Tone Pattern 5~8 selected when it rings an extension.
Eight ring tones are available.

Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 16Hz

Middle 660Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Pattern 2 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz
Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Pattern 3 High 2000Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Pattern 4 High 2000Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Pattern 5 High 1400Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Middle 760Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Low 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-363

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern

Pattern 6 High 1400Hz 540Hz 8Hz

Middle 760Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Low 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Pattern 7 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 16Hz
Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Pattern 8 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 8Hz
Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 760Hz 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Selectable Ring Tones

2-364 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign
trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group
(IRG) can have up to 48 extension numbers assigned.

 There are 100 available Ring Groups.

NOTE

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Extension 1~48 (default 1)

Item Extension Related

Description
No. Number Program

01 Maximum 8 Assign extensions (up to 48) to Ring Groups. Calls ring 22-02
Digits extensions according to Ring Group programming. 22-05
22-06

Default
Extensions 101~108 (first eight ports) ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. No other extensions ring for
incoming Ring Group 1 calls.
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Ring Groups

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-365

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring
Groups.

 There are 100 available Ring Groups.

NOTE

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night Related

Incoming Group Number Default Description
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = No Setting 1 Assign Normal Ring Trunks 22-04

001~100 (22-02) to Incoming Ring 22-06
(Incoming Group) Groups (22-04).
102 (In-Skin/ External Voice
Mail or VM8000 InMail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Ring Groups

2-366 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring
for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Day/Night Incoming Related

Default
No. Mode Group Number Program

01 1~8 0 = No Ring 1 22-04

1 = Ring 22-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-367

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group
for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or Ring
Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not
have a line key, the DIL rings CAP keys. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can
make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night
Number of Transferring Destination Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 Extension Number (maximum eight digits) No Setting

Pilot Number

Conditions
Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Line (DIL)

2-368 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN

Description

For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No
Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires
(Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group.

Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night
Incoming Group Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0 = No Setting 1
001~100(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Line (DIL)

 Ring Group

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-369

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for
each trunk group.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Expected Number of Digits 1~8 4

Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with 3- and 4-digit DID service.
If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits
that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID,
it analyzes the first digits that are assigned
here.

02 Received Vacant Number Operation 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 0

Enable/Disable Vacant Number Intercept. 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring
Group on page 2-378.)

03 Sub-Addressing Mode 0 = Extension # Specify 0

(Intercom)
1 = DID Conversion Table

04 DID Receiving Mode for ISDN 0 = Enbloc Receiving 0

1 = Overlap Receiving

05 Local Code Digits 0~15 (0 = No Local Code) 0

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

06 Local Code Dial (maximum 16 digits) No Setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

07 Pilot Code Dial (1 digit: 0~9) No Setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

2-370 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 T302 Time-out Operation 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 0

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring
Group on page 2-378.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-371

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables.
There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables.

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01~20

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0~4000

0 = No Setting

1st Area Setup (End Address) Default Table

2nd Area Setup (Start Address) Default Table

2nd Area Setup (End Address) Default Table

Default Table
1st 2nd
Conversion
Table Area Start End Start End
Table Table Table Table
1 1 100 0 0
2 101 200 0 0
3 201 300 0 0
4 301 400 0 0
: : : : :
20 0 0 0 0

2-372 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-373

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Translation
Table entry (4000).
 The digits received by the system (eight maximum)
 The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum)
 The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters maximum)
 The Transfer Target – 2 and 3

If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the
 final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
NOTE

 Operation Mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first
character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times.

Table 2-9 Keys for Entering Names

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12
digits.

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [¥] ^ _ ` {|}  Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

2-374 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Table 2-9 Keys for Entering Names (Continued)

Key for Entering Names (Continued)

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12
digits.

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ () ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
 Enter characters:
 + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ  Ω ∞ ¢ £
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space.
(In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to
accept and/or add a space.)
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 1~4000

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Number Maximum eight digits No Setting

This is the received DID digits.

02 Target Number Maximum 24 digits No Setting

Enter the destination number to which the
DID number is sent.

03 DID Name Maximum 12 characters No Setting

Enter the name to be displayed on an
inbound DID call. On a call that is
transferred or forwarded this name will not
appear until the call has been answered.
Only a direct DID call will display this
name in a ringing state.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-375

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Transfer Operation Mode 0 = No Transfer 0

1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Busy/No Answer

05 Transfer Destination Number 1 0 = No Setting 0

1~100 = Incoming Group
06 Transfer Destination Number 2 0
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
400 – Allow the outside party to dial a or InMail
different extension number in the 201~264 = Extension Group
translation table (for example, ring no
400 = Valid Extension Number
answer to a dialed number, the caller then
hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter 401 = DISA
another Valid Extension Number). 501~599 = DISA/VRS Message
401– Provide the caller with DISA dialing 1000~1999 = Speed Dial Number
options (requires using the DISA (000~999)
password).
 This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.
07 Call Waiting 0 = Disable (No) 0
PRG 20-09-07 overrides this setting. 1 = Enable (Yes)

08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0 ~ 400 (0 = No Limit) 0

09 Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port 0

1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port

10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 in 0

above : (0~96)

11 Ring Group Transfer 0 = Disable (Caller hears 1

Enable/Disable each conversation table Ringback)
ability to follow the Ring Group 1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring)
programming defined in Program
22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group.
If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID
Translation Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 2 are set, the priority
of transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program
22-12-01.

13 Identify for Mobile Extension 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable if when a Mobile 1 = On
Extension number calls in on this DID will
it provide Internal Tone (1) or route the
call as programmed (0).

2-376 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not
supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-377

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN

Description

For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first
destination group for DID calls.

Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first
destination group by the following:
 Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station blade is
installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
 Busy intercept
 Ring-no-answer intercept

If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based on
the table assigned to the DID trunk.
If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order:
 Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.
NOTE

For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the
second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first
destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination
is, the call goes directly to the third destination.

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01~20

Item
Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default
No.

01 1~8 0 = No Setting 1
1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or InMail)

2-378 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-379

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Groups to
DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID
trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table
entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 1~100

Item Conversion Table

Day/Night Mode Default
No. Area Number

01 1~8 0~20 1
0 = No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-380 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each
incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message.

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delayed Message Start Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for
IRG.

02 1st Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message
is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not
played.

04 2nd Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay
Message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

What is heard between the Delay Messages. 1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source

07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed 0 = No Disconnect 60

Message
1~64800 Seconds
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played,
before the caller is disconnected.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-381

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-382 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department
(Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There
are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data
Extension Group Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delayed Message Start Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for
Department Group.

02 1st Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message
is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not
played.

04 2nd Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay
Message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

What is heard between the Delay Messages. 1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source

07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed 0 = No Disconnect 60

Message
1~64800 (sec)
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played,
before the caller is disconnected.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-383

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Group

2-384 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-16: Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for
Private Call Refuse.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Speed Dial Group Number 0~64 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Department Group

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-385

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone and
Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 01~500

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Dial Up to 8 digits No Setting

02 Start of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000

03 End of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000

04 Dial-In Conversion Table Number 0~4000 0

05 Day of the Week 0 = Off 1

1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
8 = Saturday
9 = Holiday

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-386 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern
for Private Calls.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Transfer Mode 0 = Not defined 0

1 = Internal dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group

02 Destination Number 1 = Internal Dial (up to 24 digits) 0~9, , #, No Setting

P, R, @
2 = Incoming Ring Group (0~100)

03 Incoming Ring Pattern 0~13 0

0 = Normal pattern
1~4 = Tone pattern 1~4
5~9 = Scale pattern
10~13 = Tone Pattern 5~8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-387

 Issue 4.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer
pattern mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 01~400

Day/Night Mode 01~08

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Flexible Ringing 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-388 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

 Program: 23
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program
also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at
the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.

 There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups.

NOTE

Input Data
Extension Number 1~960

Item Group Related

Priority Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1~9999 1 – xxx Assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups 11-12-26

other than the extension group set up by a 11-12-27
Program 16-02. 11-12-28
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Group Call Pickup

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-389

 Issue 1.0

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06) to
extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned route,
the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call.

You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing
calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line
Preference feature in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information.

 Make one entry for each Night Service mode.

NOTE

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Day/ Route
Item Related
Night Table Default Description
No. Program
Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 0 Let an extension user automatically 14-06

answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions. When the user lifts the
handset, they automatically answer the
ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).

2-390 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Line Preference

 Night Service

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-391

 Issue 1.0

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic
response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone.

 There are 512 available Virtual Extension Ports.

NOTE

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Extension Group Defaul Related

Order Description
No. Number t Program

01 1~4 00~64 00 When an extension has a virtual 16-02

(0 or 00=Don’t Care) extension assigned to a Programmable 20-10-08
Function Key, this program determines
the priority for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is
lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, the user can
lift the handset to answer a ringing call
from any group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Call Arrival Keys (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIE)/ Virtual Extensions (VE)

2-392 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

 Program: 24
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Hold Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 90

A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this time. This time
works with the Hold Recall Callback Time
(Item 2).

02 Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings
an extension for this time. This time works
with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time.
After this time, the system invokes the
Hold recall time again. Cycling between
time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues
until a user answers the call.

03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 90

A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this
time.

04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked up,
the call goes back on System Hold.

05 Forced Release of Held Call 0~64800 (sec) 1800 14-01-16

Depending on the setting of Program
14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on
Hold longer than this time.

06 Park Hold Time – Normal 0~64800 (sec) 90 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-393

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

07 Park Hold Time – Extended (Recall) 0~64800 (sec) 300 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hold

 Park

2-394 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer
feature.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Busy Transfer 0 = Disable (No) 1

Enable/Disable extensions to Transfer calls to 1 = Enable (Yes)
busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to
busy extensions recall immediately.

02 MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls 0 = Hold Tone 0 20-03-02

Enable/Disable MOH on Transfer. If set to 0, a 1 = Ring Back
transferred caller hears MOH while their call Tone
rings the destination extension. If set to 1, a
transferred caller hears ringback while their call
rings the destination extension.

03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
the time a Transferred call waits at an extension
forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the
called extension mailbox.

04 Transfer Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

An unanswered transferred call recalls to the
extension that initially transferred it after this
time.

05 Message Wait Ring Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

For single line telephones (SLTs) without
message waiting lamps, this is the time between
intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the
system rings once.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-395

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

07 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning 0~64800 (sec) 1800 14-01-25

Tone 20-28-01
Time starts when a trunk begins talking with 20-28-02
another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk
20-28-03
24-02-10
transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking).
When this time expires, a warning tone is heard.
If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation
disconnects after time expires. This time is set
again when the external digit timer expires. One
of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).

08 Delayed Transfer Time for all Department 0~64800 (sec) 10 11-11-28

Groups 11-11-29
15-07-59

09 Two B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer 0~64800 (sec) 10 10-03-16

(PRI)

10 Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-25

20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07

11 No Answer Step Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 10 14-01-26

12 No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-26

13 Hook Flash Sending Timer When the System 0~64800 (sec) 2

Answers Automatically
Time before sending the hook flash for Call
Forward Centrex.

15 SIP Out of Range Timer 0~30 (sec) 4

When not receiving any response within this
timer setting, system determines SIP terminal is
out of range. When set to 0, timer is invalid.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Transfer

2-396 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of
64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in their
own group.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Park Group Related

Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1 Assign an extension to a Park Group. The 15-07-01

system allows a total of 64 Park Groups.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Park

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-397

 Issue 4.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing
number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Day/ Speed Dial

Item Related
Night Area Default Description
No. Program
Mode Number

01 1~8 0~9999 9999 The destination telephone number of the 11-10-08

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number 13-04
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this 24-05
program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

2-398 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin which
is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group.

 There are 64 available Department Groups.

NOTE

Input Data
Extension Group Number 01~64

Day/ Speed Dial

Item Related
Night Area Default Description
No. Program
Mode Number

01 1~8 0~9999 9999 Use the Speed Dialing area to 11-11-27

program the destination number of the 13-04
transferred telephone number when a 24-04
Department Group call is transferred
using the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
feature.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Transfer

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-399

 Issue 4.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination
number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0~9, , #,
and P (P is a pause used for analog trunks). Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the
number if the destination is off-premise.

 A pause for analog trunks can be assigned by pressing Line Key 1.

NOTE

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Input Data Default
No.

01 Call Forwarding Type: 0

0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding when busy

02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Call, No Answer: No

0~9, #, , R, and P Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No Answer: No
0~9, #, , R, and P Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination: No

0~9, #, , R, and P Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

05 Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination: No

0~9, #, , R, and P Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

2-400 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Input Data Default
No.

06 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer: None
0~9, #, , R, and P
(Up to 24 digits)

07 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Busy: None

0~9, #, , R, and P
(Up to 24 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-401

 Issue 4.0

2-402 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

 Program: 25
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/DISA
line.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode 0 = Extension Number Service Code 0 22-11

Specify (Intercom)
1 = Use Dial Conversion Table

02 DISA User ID 0 = Off 1 25-08

1 = On

03 VRS/DISA Transfer 0 = Normal (Off) 0

Alarm
1 = Alarm (On)

04 VRS/DISA Transfer Tone 0 = Ring Back Tone 0 10-04-04

1 = MOH 10-04-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-403

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the
Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Day/
Item Message (Talkie)
Night Additional Data Default
No. Source
Mode

01 1~8 0 = No Message 1 = 01~100 (VRS Message Number) 0

1 = VRS 2 = 01~04 (ACI Group Number)
2 = ACI 3 = 01~64 (Extension Group Number)
3 = Department
Group

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-404 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to
a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call
can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When
setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night Related

Incoming Group Number Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04

1~100 = (Incoming Ring Group)
102 = (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or
VM8000 InMail)
104 = (Speed Dial Bin)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-405

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating
mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant
caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an
alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make
an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Day/
Item Related
Night Incoming Group Number Default
No. Program
Mode

01 1~8 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04

1~100 = (Incoming Ring Group)
102 = (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or
VM8000 InMail)
103 = (Centralized Voice Mail)
104 = (Speed Dial Bin)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-406 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to
be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers,
enter the VRS message (1~100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no
error message), the call reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04.

 For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
NOTE

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Day/Night VRS Message

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 0
0 = No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-407

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through
the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator, Department
Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer to Program 25-
04 and 25-05), you specify:
 The digit the VRS caller dials (0~9, , #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits, outside
callers cannot dial system extensions.
 The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit.

The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master
number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message.

Example:

Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399

In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means
that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.

Input Data
Attendant Message Number 01~100

Received Dial 1~9, 0, , #

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Next Attendant Message 0~100 0

Number
0 = No Setting
101 = Voice Mail answers
104 = Refer to 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
105 = Dial the other extension

02 Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting

2-408 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions

 Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines, if the same first digit is defined
here.

 Only one key dialing is supported for extension dialing.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-409

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect
DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data

Item Input Related

Item Default
No. Data Program

01 VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time 0~64800 10 25-04

After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time (sec)
for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If
the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops
the call.

02 VRS/DISA No Answer Time 0~64800 0 25-04

A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time (sec)
before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer.
After this time expires, the call follows the programmed
Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and
25-04).

03 Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG 0~64800 60

From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring (sec)
Group of PRG25-03/25-04. This setting determines the
time the call is ringing in the IRG.

04 Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set 0~64800 10

Set the answering waiting time of the automatic (sec)
answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.

05 Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic 0~64800 10

Answering Telephone Set (sec)
Set the announcement time of the automatic answering
extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.

06 Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI 0~64800 10

Set the announcement time by the ACI after which an (sec)
incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.

2-410 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Input Related

Item Default
No. Data Program

07 Long Conversation Warning Tone Time 0~64800 3600 14-01-25

Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (sec) 20-28-01
20-28-02
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk before 20-28-03
the Long Conversation tone is heard.

08 Long Conversation Disconnect Time 0~64800 10 14-01-25

Determine the time the system waits before (sec) 20-28-01
20-28-02
disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such 20-28-03
as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.

09 DISA Internal Paging Time 0~64800 30

Enter the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by (sec)
a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.

10 DISA External Paging Time 0~64800 30

Enter the maximum length of an External Page placed (sec)
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.

11 VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time 0~64800 0

Set up the time the system waits after receiving an (sec)
incoming VRS/DISA call before the system automatically
answers the call.

13 VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval 0~64800 5

If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program (sec)
25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this time
before disconnecting.

14 Delayed VRS Answer Time 0~64800 10

Assign the delay time from switching from a normal (sec)
incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the
call switches to DID mode immediately.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-411

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are 15
users each with one 6-digit password.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1~15

Item
Password Default Related PRG
No.

01 Dial No Setting 49-10-11

(Fixed – six digits)
0~9, , #

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-412 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user.
When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the user and
associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options
in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service
mode.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Function

Default
No. Mode Class

01 1~8 1~15 1

Conditions

 DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.

 Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-413

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a
user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or
disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of
Service (1~15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA
caller dials.

When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 1
0 = No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-414 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description

For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll
Restriction Class (1~15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter
in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA
Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.

When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1~15

Toll
Item Day/Night
Restriction Default
No. Mode
Class

01 1~8 1~15 2

Conditions

 Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-415

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected
when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA
caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming,
make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 1
0 = No Setting

Conditions

 You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Trunk Group Routing

2-416 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the
system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used to
define additional DISA call options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Message Access Password 1~ 9, 0, , # No

Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the (Fixed six digits) Setting
system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the
VRS messages.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-417

 Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-15 : VRS/DISA Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-15 : VRS/DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial
tone times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is
busy.

Input Data
Trunk No. 001~400

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS/DISA Transfer Target Area At Wrong Dial Speed Dial bin 9999
number
0~9999

02 VRS/DISA Transfer Target Area At No Answer or Busy Speed Dial bin 9999
number
0~9999

Conditions

 Related to Program 25-03-01 and Program 25-04-01.

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

2-418 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-16 : VRS/DISA Talkie Base Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-16 : VRS/DISA Talkie Base Setup to assign VRS/DISA timer values.

Input Data
Talkie Number 1~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRSDISA Single Digit Timer 0 ~ 68400 0

Assign a timer per single digit table, required to expire
before the allocated single digit entry is applied. (Related:
PRG25-06-02)

02 DTMF Detect 0 = Off 1

Select whether or not system detects DTMF during VRS 1 = On
message.
‘1 = On’ setting detects DTMF signal during sending VRS
message for VRS/DISA call.
‘0 = Off’ setting does not detect DTMF signal during sending
VRS message for VRS/DISA call. Related:
PRG25-02-01
PRG25-06-01
PRG15-01-08
PRG15-01-09
PRG40-10-08
PRG40-10-09

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-419

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

2-420 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-17 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Service Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-17 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Service Setup to set what happens to a call
when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial, and for No
Answer/Busy. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group,
voice mail or speed dial).

Input Data
Attendant Message Number 001~100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programs

01 Transfer Ring Group at Wrong Dialing 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04

1~100 = Incoming 25-03
Ring Group
102 = In-skin/
External
Voice Mail
or
VM8000 InMail
104 = Speed Dial
Bin

02 Transfer Ring Group at No Answer/Busy 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04

1~100 = Incoming 25-04
Ring Group
102 = In-skin/
External
Voice Mail
or
VM8000 InMail
104 = Speed Dial
Bin

03 Transfer Target Area at Wrong Dialing 0 ~ 9999 9999 13-04

04 Transfer Target area at No Answer/Busy 0 ~ 9999 9999 13-04

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-421

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

 Direct Inward Dial (DID)

2-422 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-18 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 25-18 : VRS/DISA Attendant Message Timer Setup to set the value for the system
timers which affect VRS and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.

Input Data
Attendant Message Number 001~100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programs

01 Dial Tone 0 ~ 68400 10 22-04

25-03

02 No Answer Time 0 ~ 68400 0 22-04

25-04

03 Disconnect after Re-Transfer to IRG 0 ~ 68400 60 13-04

22-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

 Voice Response System (VRS)

 Direct Inward Dial (DID)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-423

 Issue 4.0

2-424 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

 Program: 26
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the system options for Automatic
Route Selection (ARS).

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 ARS Service 0 = Disable (Off) 0 26-02

Enable/Disable ARS. 1 = Enable (On) 26-03
26-04

02 Network Outgoing InterDigit ARS Time 0~64800 (sec) 30 20-03-04

With Networking, this time replaces 20-03-04 (in 0.1 second
when determining if all network protocol digits increments)
have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for 5 (500ms)
at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using
F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should
be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site
A.

03 ARS Misdialed Number Handling 0 = Route to Trunk 0 21-02

If a user dials a number not programmed in Group 1
ARS, this option determines if the system 1 = Play Warning Tone
should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error to Dialer
tone.

06 Class of Service Match Access 0 = Disable (Off) 0 26-02

1 = Enable (On)

07 F-Route Access COS Reference 0 = F-Route 0 26-02

1 = ARS 44-05

08 DT800/DT700 Multi Log-on for ARS 0 = Disable (Off) 0 26-04

0 refers to PRG 26-04 1 = Enable (On) 26-13
1 refers to PRG 26-13

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-425

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection

2-426 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
 Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) – The number routes to a trunk group.
 Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) – The number is controlled by the F-Route table.

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1~2000

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Dial Dial Digits (16 digits maximum) No

1~9, 0, , #, or for wild character (Press line key 1) Setting

02 ARS Service 0 = No Service (None) 0

Type
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access

03 Additional Data / If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): Select Trunk Group Number 0 44-04
Service Number [0~100, 101~150 (100+Networking ID), 44-05
0= No Route]

If Service Type 2 (in 26-02):

F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0~500
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-555.

F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0~500

(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule on page 2-554.

04 ARS Class of 0~50 0

Service

05 Dial Treatment 0~50 0

for ARS

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-427

 Issue 4.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

06 LCR Carrier 0 ~ 25 0
Table Entry

07 Network 0 ~ 16 0 26-12
Specified
Parameter Table

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection

2-428 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing
translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS
Dial Treatment options are:
 3 – Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.

 Requires at least 11 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

NOTE

 2 – Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call. .

 Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01)

NOTE

 1 – Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call.

 Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

NOTE

 INPA – Insert the NPA specified by NPA.

 An – For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1~4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a Transit
Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which code in
Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for outbound calls
by ISDN trunks.
 DNN – Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 outdials
1234. Valid entries are 0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a
digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234.
 Wnn – Wait nn seconds.

 P – Pause in analog trunk.

 R – Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.

 E – End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.

 X – When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the
extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-429

 Issue 4.0

Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Treatment Code 24 characters maximum No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection

2-430 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension. Automatic
Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item Day/Night
Class Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~50 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-431

 Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table to set the Carrier Table for LCR.

Input Data

Carrier Table Number 1 ~ 25

Item
Name Input Data Default
No.

01 Delete Digits 0 ~ 16 0

02 Access Code Up to 16 digits (0 ~ 9, #, *, @, No

Pause Setting

03 Authorization 0 ~ 10 0
Table Number

04 Cost Center 0 = Not Used 0

Code 1 = Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

2-432 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table to set the Authorization Code Table for LCR.

Input Data

Authorization Table Number 1 ~ 10

Item
Name Input Data Default
No.

01 Input Dial Up to 10 digits No

Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-433

 Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table to set the Cost Center Code for LCR.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Name Input Data Default
No.

01 Input Dial Up to eight digits Extension

Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

2-434 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table to set the Manual Override Access
Code for LCR.

Input Data

Manual Override Access Code Table Number 1 ~ 10

Item
Name Input Data Default
No.

01 Manual Override Access Code Up to four digits No Setting

02 Carrier Table Number 0 ~ 25 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-435

 Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table to set the Manual Override Exemption
for LCR.

Input Data

Manual Override Exemption Table Number 1 ~ 25

Item
Name Input Data Default
No.

01 Carrier Code Manual Override Exemption Up to four digits No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 None

2-436 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier
access, which is referred from Program 26-03.

Input Data
Transit Network ID Table 1~4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Transit Network ID (Carrier ID) 0000~9999 (Fixed four digits) No

setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-437

 Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific
Parameter Table.

Input Data
Network Specific Parameter Table 1~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Type of Number Selection 0 = System Default 0

This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and 1 = Unknown
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.

02 Numbering Plan Identification Selection 0 = System Default 0

This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and 1 = Unknown
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard Plan
6 = Private Plan

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-438 Program 26 : ARS Service

Issue 4.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-13 : ARS Class of Service for NetLink (DT700)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 26-13 : ARS Class of Service for NetLink (DT700) sets an extension’s ARS Class of
Service when used for NetLink. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when
determining how to route an extension’s calls.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Input Data
NetLink System ID 1 ~ 50

Item
Day/Night Mode Class Default
No.

01 1~8 0~50 0

Conditions
Only when NetLink is enabled.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-439

 Issue 4.0

2-440 Program 26 : ARS Service

 Program: 30
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles.
The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are:
 Regular (Business) Mode (0)
 Hotel Mode (1)
 Monitor Mode (2)
 Business/ Mode (3)

Input Data
DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
DSS Operation Mode Default
No.

01 0 = Business Mode 0
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = Monitor Mode
3 = Business/ Mode

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-441

 Issue 4.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS
Consoles connected.
 Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up to four
60-button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per system).

When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There
are 32 Console Numbers (1~32). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering data,
the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first.

Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
Item Default
No.

01 Extension Number No Setting

Enter the extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS
console (up to eight digits).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

2-442 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60-button
DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to four digits (e.g., extension number
or Service Code).

To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed key
before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or 00 (If using WebPro or PC
Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)]
Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display,
although the DSS function works correctly.

If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either by
phone or using the WebPro or PC Programming, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to
reset the console lamping.
Input Data

Index 1
DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
Key Number Function Number Additional Data
No.

01 001~114 0~99 (General Functional Level) Refer to Function Number

97 = Door Box Access key List on the following pages.
(additional data: 1~8 Door Box No.)
 00 ~  99 (Appearance Functional
Level)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-443

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 Not Defined
01 DSS/One-Touch Extension Number or any Red On: Extension Busy
Numbers (up to 24 digits) Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic On
Off: Mic Off
03 DND Key Red On: DND
04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05 Headset Red On: Under Headset Operation
06 Transfer Key None
07 Conference Key Red On: Under Conference Operation
08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New Call Log
Red On: Call Log
Off: No Call Log
09 Day/Night Mode Switch Mode Number (1~8) Red On: On mode
10 Call Forward – Immediate Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
11 Call Forward – Busy Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
12 Call Forward – No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
13 Call Forward – Busy/No Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Answer Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
14 Call Forward – Both Ring Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
15 Follow Me Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature active by Function Key
19 External Group Paging External Paging Number Red On: Active
(1~8)
20 External All Call Paging Red On: Active
21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number Red On: Active
(01~64)

2-444 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

22 Internal All Call Paging None

23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal None
Paging
24 Call Pickup None
25 Call Pickup for Another None
Group
26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group Number None
Group
27 Speed Dial – System/Private Speed Dial Number None
(Speed/Private)
28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None
29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink (Red): Under a Repeat
Dial
30 Saved Number Redial None
31 Memo Dial None
32 Meet – Me Conference None
33 Override (Off-Hook None
Signaling)
34 Barge – In No data or Extension No. (not None
Virtual Extension) or . In
case of  refer to the
Extension No. (not Virtual
Extension) set in 24-09-03.
35 Camp On Red On: Under Camp-On or Reservation
36 Department Step Call None
37 DND/FWD Override Call None
38 Message Waiting None
39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): Under Monitored
Slow Blink (Red): Under Monitoring
With Room Monitor there are two parties in
the monitor, one being monitored and one
who is monitoring. The same key is used
on both phones, but the COS says if the
key is set to be either a monitored or
monitoring party.
40 Handset Transmission Cutoff Red On: Transmission cut-off

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-445

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

41 Secretary Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side

Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42 Boss – Secretary Call Pickup Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary Mode
43 Series Call None
44 Common Hold None
45 Exclusive Hold None
46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out
47 --- Not Used ---
48 --- Not Used ---
49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice None
Mail Number
50 Account Code None
51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~8) Red On: Relay On
52 Automatic Answer with Delay Incoming Group Number Red On: Under Setting
Message Setup
53 Automatic Answer with Delay Red On: Active
Message Starting
54 External Call Forward by Red On: Active
Door Box
55 Extension Name Edit None
56 General Purpose LED 001~100: (Red) 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)
Operation 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On, Green Rapid Blink
57 General Purpose LED 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)
Indication 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On, Green Rapid Blink
58 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number
Immediate (01~64)
59 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number
Delay ( 01~64)
60 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number
DND ( 01~64)
61 --- Not Used ---
62 Flash (Recall) Key None

2-446 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

63 Outgoing Call Without Caller Red On: Active

ID (ISDN)
64 --- Not Used ---
65 --- Not Used ---
66 --- Not Used ---
67 --- Not Used ---
68 --- Not Used ---
69 --- Not Used ---
70 --- Not Used ---
71 --- Not Used ---
72 Keypad Facility Key
73 Keypad Hold Key
74 Keypad Retrieve Key
75 Keypad Conference Key
76 Application Key (3rd Party Any dial data (8 digits) None
CTI)
77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Number Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78 Conversation Recording 0 = Conversation recording Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
1 = Delete, Re-recording
2 = Delete
79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin) Number Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
80 Tandem Ringing 0 = Cancel Red On: Active
1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring
81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line Number 001~400
Transfer Key
82 Dterm IP Call Log
83 Conversation Recording 0 = Pause
Function 1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-447

 Issue 4.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

92 Wake Up Call Indication Green On: Wake Up Call Indication Mode

On
Off: Wake Up Call Indication Mode Off
93 Room Status Indication Green On: Active Room Status
Off: Room Status Indication Mode Off
94 Call Attendant
95 Page Switching Red On: DSS Page 1
Green On: DSS Page 2
97 Door Box Access Key Door Box number (1~8)
99 Alternate Answer Key
#04 Change Restriction Class One-time Toll Restriction
#06 Power Save for Power Save
Group
#07 Fixed Operation Mode Night Mode Service Group Fast flash (Red) – Setup
No. (01~32)
#11 Major Alarm Red On: A major alarm has occurred.
#12 Minor Alarm Red On: A minor alarm has occurred.
#13 Calling Party Number Any number up to 24 digits Red On: Set
Notification Off: Cancel

2-448 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level (00 - 99) (Service Code 752)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 --- Not Used ---

01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001~400)

02 --- Not Used ---

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Park Key Park Number (01~64)

05 --- Not Used ---

06 Trunk Access Via Networking Network System Number (01~50)

07 Station Park Hold None

08 --- Not Used ---
10 --- Not Used ---

11 --- Not Used ---

12 --- Not Used ---

13 --- Not Used ---

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

16 --- Not Used ---

17 --- Not Used ---

18 --- Not Used ---

19 --- Not Used ---

Default

 The DSS keys 01~60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101~160

 The DSS keys 61~114 of all DSS consoles = None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-449

 Issue 4.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in
case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console).

Index 1
DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
Item Name Input Data Default
No.

01 DSS Console Alternate Answer Alternate DSS No. 01~32 0 = No Setting

Conditions
Related extension is assigned in PRG30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at PRG30-03.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-450 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.

Input Data

Lamp
Item
Item Pattern Default
No.
Data

02 Busy Extension 0~7 7 (On)

03 DND Extension 0~7 3 (RW)

04 Agent Busy 0~7 7 (On)

05 Out of Schedule ( DSS) 0~7 0 (Off)

06 Agent Log Out ( DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

07 Agent Log In ( DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

08 Agent Emergency ( DSS) 0~7 6 (IW)

09 Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 7 (On)

10 Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 1 (FL)

11 Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 2 (WK)

12 Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

13 Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

14 Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

15 Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 6 (IW)

16 Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

17 Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

18 Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 0 (Off)

19 Hotel Status Code  (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

20 Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-451

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Lamp
Item
Item Pattern Default
No.
Data

21 VM Message Indication 0~7 3 (RW)

Table 2-10 ED Patterns for DSS Console

2-452 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-453

 Issue 4.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup to set the MAC address for a particular IP DSS
Console. This must be done before the console can be associated to the attendant phone. The system
supports up to 32 IP DSS Consoles.

Input Data
DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
Function Name Input Data Default
No.

01 MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00~FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00-00-00-00-00-00

Conditions
This is a Read-Only command.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-454 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

 Program: 31
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for
Internal/External Paging.

The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice
for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display
the lower case letter.

Table 2-11 Keys for Entering Names

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up
to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }  Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
 Enter characters:
 + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ  Ω ∞ ¢ £

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-455

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-11 Keys for Entering Names (Continued)

Key for Entering Names (Continued)

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up
to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Characters Group All 11-12-19

Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone.
31-02-02
The name shows on the display of the telephone
making the announcement.

02 Page Announcement Duration 0~64800 (sec) 1200

Set the maximum time for Page announcements.
(Affects External Paging only)

04 Privacy Release Time 0~64800 (sec) 90

Once the user initiates a Meet-Me Conference or
Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for
the Paged party to join the call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, External

 Paging, Internal

2-456 Program 31 : Paging Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can
receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in
only one Internal Paging Group.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internal Paging Group Number 0~64 0 for IP Station

Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., (0 = No Setting) 1 for TDM Station
Page Zones). The system allows up to 64 Internal
Paging Groups. An extension can be in only one
Internal Paging Group.

02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0 = Off 0

Allow/Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each 1 = On
extension. If allowed, extension can place and
receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If
prevented, extensions can make only (not receive)
All Call Internal Paging announcements. If
combined, Paging zones should be restricted as
well, change the internal page zone group in
Program 31-07-01 to 0.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, Internal

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-457

 Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e.,
Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.

The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice
for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display
the lower case letter.

Table 2-12 Keys for Entering Names

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }  Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
 Enter characters:
 + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ  Ω ∞ ¢ £

2-458 Program 31 : Paging Setup

Issue 4.0

Table 2-12 Keys for Entering Names

Key for Entering Names (Continued)

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming
mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a
space.)
Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters Refer to default table.

Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page
Zones). The system shows the name you program on the
telephone display.

Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name

Extension
Name
Paging Group

01 Group 1

02 Group 2

: :

64 Group 64

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-459

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, Internal

2-460 Program 31 : Paging Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an
External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the
external zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. On the
UNIVERGE SV9100 system, the GCD-CP10 zone is number 9.

To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same
number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~9

Item Paging Group

Default
No. Number

01 0~8 (0 = No Setting) Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 1 (Group 1)

Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9 (GCD-CP10) = 1 (Group 1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, External

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-461

 Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer
ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External
Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The
GCD-CP10 zone is number 9. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1~400

External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
Day/Night Mode Input Data Default
No.

01 1~8 0 = No Ringing (No) 0

1 = Ringing (Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Night Services

 Paging, External

2-462 Program 31 : Paging Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an
amplifier.

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Broadcast Splash Tone Before 0 = No Tone (None) 2

Paging (Paging Start Tone)
1 = Splash Tone
Enable/Disable splash tone before 2 = Chime Tone
Paging over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a
splash tone before the External
Paging announcement.

02 Broadcast Splash Tone After 0 = No Tone (None) 2

Paging (Paging End Time)
1 = Splash Tone
Enable/Disable splash tone after 2 = Chime Tone
Paging over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a
splash tone at the end of an External
Paging announcement.

03 Speech Path 0 = Both Way (Duplex) 1

Determine if the external speaker is 1 = One Way (PGD(2)-U10 ADP  SPK)
used for talkback (As this option is (Simplex)
not available with the GCD-CP10
external page zone, speaker 9 should
be left at 1).

04 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) 32

05 CODEC Receive Gain Setup 1~57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) 32

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-463

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, External

2-464 Program 31 : Paging Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0~8) to an
Internal Paging Zone (0~64) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined Page,
they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.

Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1~9) to an External Page Group (1~8).

Input Data
External Paging Group Number 0~8 (0 = All External Paging)

Item
Internal Paging Group Number Default
No.

01 0~64 (0 = All Internal Paging) 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Paging, External

 Paging, Internal

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-465

 Issue 4.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External
Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle.

When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The GCD-CP10 zone is
number 9.

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 BGM Enable/Disable the External Paging 0 = Disable (No) 0

zone you select from broadcasting 1 = Enable
Background Music when it is idle. (Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Background Music

 Paging, External

2-466 Program 31 : Paging Setup

 Program: 32
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a
 multiline terminal.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Door Box Answer Time 0~64800 30

A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes
(sec)
during this time.

02 Door Lock Cancel Time 0~64800 10

When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook
(sec)
flashes or a multiline terminal user presses the Recall key
while talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this
time.

03 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect 0~64800 60

Timer (sec)
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the
caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and
the call is then disconnected.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Door Box

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-467

 Issue 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller
presses the associated Door Box call button.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a
 multiline terminal.
NOTE

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Door Box Ring Extension

Default
No. Group Number Number

01 01~32 Maximum eight No Setting

digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Door Box

2-468 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door
Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone
Setup on page 2-673.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a
 multiline terminal.
NOTE

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Chime Pattern 0 = None Door Box 1 = 1

1 = Door Box Ring 1 Door Box 2 = 2
2 = Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 = 3
3 = Door Box Ring 3 Door Box 4 = 4
4 = Door Box Ring 4 Door Box 5 = 5
5 = Door Box Ring 5 Door Box 6 = 6
6 = Door Box Ring 6 Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1

02 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32

(PGD(2)-U10 ADP to Door Box)

03 CODEC Receive Gain Setup 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32

(Door Box to PGD(2)-U10 ADP)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Door Box

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-469

 Issue 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a
 multiline terminal.
NOTE

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Door Box Name 1 = DOOR- 1

Door Box Name 2 = DOOR- 2
Door Box Name 3 = DOOR- 3
Door Box Name 4 = DOOR- 4
Door Box Name 5 = DOOR- 5
Door Box Name 6 = DOOR- 6
Door Box Name 7 = DOOR- 7
Door Box Name 8 = DOOR- 8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Door Box

2-470 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

 Program: 33
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each software port on an Analog
Communications Interface. Each ACI software port can have only one function (input, output or none).

Input Data
ACI Port Number 01~96

Item
ACI Type Default
No.

01 0 = None 2
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)
2 = External Audio Port (Input/Output)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-471

 Issue 4.0

Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to Department Groups. An
ACI port can be in only one group.

Also use this program to set the ACI port priority. When a call comes into the ACI Department Group, it
connects to the ACI port in order of its priority. A higher priority port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower
priority port (e.g., 6). There are 96 ACI ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available.

Input Data

ACI Port Number 01~96

Item Group
Priority
No. Number

01 01~16 1~96

Default

ACI Port Group Priority

01 1 1

02 1 2

: : :

96 1 96

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2-472 Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

 Program: 34
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 DID/E&M Start 0 = 2nd Dial Tone 1 Set the start signaling mode for 22-02
Signaling 1 = Wink DID and Tie trunks. DID and
2 = Immediate Tie trunks can use either
immediate start or wink start
3 = Delay
signaling.

02 Receive Dial Type 0 = DP 1 10-09

for E&M Tie Line 1 = DTMF
2 = MF

03 E&M Dial-In Mode 0 = Specify Extension 0 Determine if the incoming Tie 22-11
Number (Intercom) Line call should be directed as
1 = Use Conversion an intercom call or if it should
Table (NTT) follow the DID Translation
Table in Program 22-11.

04 E&M Line Dial Tone 0 = Disable (No) 1 Enter 1 if the Tie Line should
1 = Enable (Yes) send dial tone to the calling
system after the call is set up.
Enter 0 if the Tie Line should
not send dial tone.

05 System Toll 0 = System 0 Determine if an incoming Tie 21-05

Restriction Line call should be subject to
1 = Each extension
Toll Restriction.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-473

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

2-474 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there
are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For each
Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1~400

Item Day/Night Related

Class Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 1~15 1 20-14

Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-475

 Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 1~8 or
1~100) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.)
If the system has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each
Tie Line – for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Day/
Item Route Table
Night Default
No. Number
Mode

01 1~8 0~100 1
0 = No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

2-476 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each
Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For
each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001~400

Toll
Item Day/Night Related
Restriction Default
No. Mode Program
Class

01 1~8 1~15 2 21-05

14-01-08

Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-477

 Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk
calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group, enable
or disable access to each CO trunk group.

Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number 001~100

Outgoing Trunk Group Number Input Data Default

1~100 0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 0

1 = Disable (N-Tandem)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

2-478 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or
delete for Tie Lines.
 Delete Digit
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This
program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.

If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits including
the extension number.
 Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the location
can be added to the received digits.

Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delete Digit 0~255 (255 = delete all digits) 0

02 Additional Dial Digits Up to four digits (0~9, , #) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-479

 Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate Start) 0~64800 3

02 First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start) 0~64800 0

03 First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) 0~64800 3

04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0~64800 0

05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M 0~64800 30

Conditions
If PRG 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the transfer when
not answered.

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

2-480 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.

Input Data
Class of Service 01~15

Item Table Related

Dial Data Default
No. No. Program

01 01~20 Up to 10 Digits (0~9, , #) No Setting 21-05-13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Tie Lines

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-481

 Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI//DNIS service option setup for E&M
Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service 01~15

Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 2~15

01 Receive Format 0 = Address 0 34-01-02

Specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received 1 = ANI 34-09-02
from the Telco. Make sure your entry is compatible 2 = DNIS
with the service the Telco provides. The character  3 = ANIAddress
indicates a delimiter.
4 = ANIDNIS
 If PRG34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), 5 = DNISANI
this PRG works only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*. ( = Delimiter Code)

02 Delimiter Dial Code 1~9, 0, #,   34-09-01

Define the character Telco uses as a delimiter (see
entries 1~5 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0~9,
#, and .
03 Route Setup of Receive Dial 0 = Fixed Route (Item 08) 0 22-09-01
Specify the source of the data the system uses to (No Routing) 22-11-01
1 = Routes on Received 34-09-04
route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is 34-09-08
selected, refer to Program 34-09-04. DNIS or Address Data
2 = Routes on Received
ANI Data

2-482 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 2~15

04 Route Table Setup of Target Dial 0 = SPD Table (Program 0 13-04-01

Set how the system uses the route data (gathered 13-03) 13-04-03
1 = DID Table (Program 22- 22-09-01
in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. 22-11
If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be routed 11) 34-09-05
using the DID table (1), up to 8 digits can be 34-09-06
matched. The number of expected digits set in
Program 22-09-01 must match the ANI digits
defined in Program 22-11-01. For example, if an
ANI/DNIS number received was
20355512343001 and Program 22-09-01=4,
the entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234 with the defined
target extension.
If the call is to be routed using the SPD table (0), up
to 24 digits can be matched. Define the range of the
SPD table to be used in Program 34-09-06. The
data is compared to the entries in Program 13-04-
01 and then routed according to Program 13-04-03.

05 ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name 0 = Display Off 1 13-04

Set whether or not ANI data should appear on 1 = Display On 20-09-02
22-11-03
telephone displays as part of Caller ID display. 23-09-04

06 Routing SPD Table Setup Start = 0, 100~9990 Start = 1000 13-04

End = 0, 99~9999 End = 1199
Define which part of the SPD Table set up in
Program 13-04 the system uses for ANI/DNIS
Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing.
This is required if Items 04 and 05 above are 1
(Caller ID on). When you specify a starting and end
address, the system uses the part of the table for
look-ups.
When you specify a starting address and length, the
system uses that part of the table for routing. If the
incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches the
Number entry in the table, the system routes
according to the associated Name data. That data
can be an extension, Department Group pilot
number, the voice mail master number or a trunk
ring group.

07 Routing on ANI/DNIS Error 0 = Play Busy Tone to 1 25-03

Determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS Caller
call if a data error is detected in the incoming data 1 = Route Caller to Ring
string. Group Specified in
Program 25-03
(Transfer)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-483

 Issue 4.0

Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 2~15

08 Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer 0 = Play Busy or Ringback 0 25-04

Determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS Tone to Caller (Busy/
call if destination is busy or does not answer. NoAns)
1 = Route Caller to Ring
Group Specified in
Program 25-04
(Transfer)

09 Calling Number Address Length 1~8 digits 7 34-09-01

When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is the
address). Specify the address length.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)

 Tie Lines

2-484 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment to delete the Information Digits received
from the Network on Feature Group D Trunks.

Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group No. 001~100

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Delete Digits for T1 ANI Assign the number of

Define the number of digits to information digits to
delete from the information 0~9 digits 2 delete from the element
element received from Telco. received from the
Network.

Example:

Example of ANI information KP009727517645STKP7100ST.

00 Information digits

9727517645 ANI information

7100 DNIS Digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Ability)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-485

 Issue 4.0

2-486 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

 Program: 35
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options.
Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = No setting 0

Specify the type of connection used for 1 = Not used
SMDR. 2 = Not used
3 = LAN (CCPU)
4 = Not used

03 Header Language 0 = English 0

Specify the language in which the SMDR 1 = German
header should be printed. 2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish

04 Omit Digits 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 0

The number of digits entered in this option
do not print on the SMDR report. For
example, if the entry is 10, the last 10
digits a user dials do not appear on the
SMDR report.

05 Minimum Digits 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 0

Outgoing calls must be at least this
number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR
report.

06 Minimum Call Duration 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0

The duration of the call must be at least
this time to be included on the SMDR
report.

07 Minimum Ring Time (For Incoming 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0

Calls)
A call must ring for at least this time to be
included on the SMDR report.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-487

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Format Selection 0 = NA Type (North 0

America)
1 = G/J Type (Overseas/
Japan)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Station Message Detail Recording

2-488 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
output options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Toll Restricted Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by Toll 1 = Displayed
Restriction.

02 PBX Calls 0 = Not Displayed 1

When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can include all 1 = Displayed
calls (1), or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access
code (0).

03 Trunk Number or Name 0 = Name 1

Select whether the system should display the trunk 1 = Number
number or the name on SMDR reports.
 If this option is set to 1, Program 35-02-14
must be set to 0.
04 Summary (Daily) 0 = Not Displayed 1
Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a daily 1 = Displayed
summary (at midnight every night).

05 Summary (Weekly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a weekly 1 = Displayed
summary (every Saturday at midnight).

06 Summary (Monthly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a monthly 1 = Displayed
summary (at midnight on the last day of the month).

07 Toll Charge Cost 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set to 1 to have the SMDR report include toll charges. 1 = Displayed

08 Incoming Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report include 1 = Displayed
incoming calls. If you disable this option (0), incoming
calls do not print.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-489

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

09 Extension Number or Name 0 = Name 1

Set to 1 to have the SMDR report include extension 1 = Number
numbers. Set to 0 to have the SMDR report include
extension names.

10 All Lines Busy (ALB) Output 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication should 1 = Displayed
be displayed.

11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0 = Not Output 1

1 = Output

12 DID Table Name Output 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the DID table name should be displayed. 1 = Displayed

13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the CLI output should be displayed for DID. 1 = Displayed

14 Date 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine whether or not the date should be displayed 1 = Displayed
on SMDR reports.
 This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is
set to be displayed in Program 35-02-03.

15 CLI/DID Number Switching 0 = CLI (CLIP) 0

Determine if the CLI or DID Number Switching should be 1 = DID Calling
displayed. Number
2 = CID Name

16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number 0 = Trunk Port Name 0

Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on 1 = Received Dialed
ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set to 1, ANI/DNIS trunks can Number
print DNIS digits. If set to 0 trunk names are printed 2 = Both
instead.
(With V5000 or higher, option “2” is available)

17 Print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call 0 = ACC 0

Determine if SMDR should print Account Code or Caller 1 = CNAME
Name of Incoming Call.

18 Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call 0 = Normal 0

Determine how SMDR should print Caller Name of 1 = Line Feed
Incoming Call.

21 S-Point Terminal Number 0 = MSN Number 0

1 = Extension
Number

22 Security Auto Dialing 0 = No Output 0

1 = Output

23 Watch Auto Dialing 0 = No Output 0

1 = Output

2-490 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

24 Mark Virtual Loop 0 = Don’t mark 0

Define whether calls routed via the ISDN Virtual 1 = Mark
Loopback are tagged.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Station Message Detail Recording

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-491

 Issue 4.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension Class of
Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Account Code Mode 0 = Account Codes Disabled (None) 0

Select the Account Code Mode (0~3). 1 = Account Codes optional
2 = Account Codes Required but not
verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes Required and
Verified (Verify)

02 Forced Account Code Toll Call 0 = Account Codes for toll and local calls 0
Setup All)
Enable Account Codes for all calls or 1 = Account Codes just for toll calls
just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in Item (STD)
01 above).

03 Account Codes for Incoming Calls 0 = Account Codes for incoming calls 0
Allow users to enter Account Codes disabled (No)
for incoming calls. If disabled, any 1 = Account Codes for incoming calls
code entered dials out on the enabled (Yes)
connected trunk.

04 Hiding Account Codes 0 = Account Codes not displayed 1

Hide or show the Account codes on a 1 = Account Codes displayed
telephone display.

2-492 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Account Codes

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-493

 Issue 4.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Code
list. You can enter up to 2000 codes using the characters 0~9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For
example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.

Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin Number 1~2000

Item
Verified Account Code Default
No.

01 1~9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card) (Up to 16 digits) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified

2-494 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

 Program: 40
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be used for
the VRS prompts.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 01 = US English 1

for VRS 02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese
(Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-495

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2-496 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

Issue 4.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level:
IN

Description

In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice
Announcement feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Fixed Message 0 = Not Used 0

Enable (1)/Disable (0) the system ability to play the 1 = Use
fixed VRS messages (such as, “You have a
message”).

02 General Message Number 0~100 0

Assign the VRS message number to use for the 0 = No General
General Message. Message Service

03 VRS No Answer Destination 0~100 0

Assign the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is (Incoming Ring (No Setting)
unanswered after Call Forwarding with Personal Group Number)
Greeting Message.

04 VRS No Answer Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all
VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the
extension waits this time for a VRS port to become
free.

05 Park and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend) 0~64800 (sec) 0
If a Park and Page is not picked up during this time,
the Paging announcement repeats.

06 Set VRS Message for Private Call Refuse 0~101 0

(VRS Msg Private Call) 0 = No message
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be 101 = Fixed
used as Private Call Refuse. message
When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Your call cannot go through.”

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-497

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse 0~101( 0

(VRS Msg CID) 0 = No message
Assign the VRS Message number to be used as 101 = Fixed
Caller ID Refuse. message
When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Your call cannot go through.”

08 Call Attendant Busy Message 0~100 0

0 = No message

09 Call Attendant No Answer Message 0~100 0

0 = No message

10 Call Forward Remainder Announcement 0 = Do not play 1

Flag that controls the VRS playback announcement 1 = Play
for ‘on the forwarded phone’.

11 Call Forward Notification Announcement 0 = Do not play 1

Flag that controls the VRS playback announcement 1 = Play
for ‘towards the incoming call’.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Response System (VRS)

2-498 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

Issue 4.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the
Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the assigned
VRS message is sent to the outside caller.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1~400

Item Day/Night
VRS Message Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~100 0
0 = No Service

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Response System (VRS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-499

 Issue 4.0

2-500 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

 Program: 41
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for Contact Center
Level:
IN

Description

In Program 41-01 : System Options for Contact Center to define the system options for the Contact
Center feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Supervisory Extension Up to eight digits (0~9, , #) No

Setting

02 Login ID Code Digit 0~20 0

0 = No Login ID

03 MIS Connection Ports 0 = None 0

3 = LAN (GCD-CP10)

04 MIS Notification when Call receives 0 = Notifies 0

Busy
1 = No notification

05 MIS Output Format 0 = Classic 0

Select incoming DDI format which is used 1 = 8-digit DDI Field
in MIS output (P events). 2 = Extra DDI Event
3 = XML Format

06 Login ID Restriction 0 = Disable 0

Determine whether an ACD Agent Login 1 = Enable
Code must match Code set in
PRG 41-21-01.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-501

 Issue 1.0

2-502 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-02 : Group and Agent Assignments
Level:
SA

Description

In Program 41-02 : Group and Agent Assignments, for each extension number, assign an Group
(1~64). A Group number is assigned to each Work Period number (1~8).

The assigned extension works as an agent extension in the following cases:

 The trunk belonging to an group receives an incoming call while an agent is logged in.
 An extension transfers a call to an group using the group pilot number.
 An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an pilot number.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Work Period Mode Number Group No. Default
No.

01 1~8 0~64 0
0 = No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-503

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Group
Level:
SA

Description

In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Group, for each incoming trunk group set
up in Program 22-05, designate which Group (1~64) the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work
Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use
Program 41-06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to assign
the Work Schedules to the days of the week.

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

Work Period Mode Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Group Number 0~64 0

0 = No setting

02 Night Announcement Service 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

03 Priority Data 0, 1~7 0

Determine whether or not an incoming call to a trunk 0 = No Priority
ring group should follow a priority assignment. 1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority

2-504 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

 Ring Groups

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-505

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-04 : Group Supervisor
Level:
SA

Description

For each Group (1~64), use Program 41-04 : Group Supervisor to assign the group supervisor extension
and operating mode. Operating modes are:
 0 = Supervisor extension does not receive Group calls.
 1 = Supervisor extension receives Group overflow calls only.
 2 = Supervisor extension receives Group calls just like all other agents.

A Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for only one Group.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Group Supervisor Extension Number (Up to eight digits) No

Extension Setting

02 Operation Type 0 = Do not receive incoming calls (No) 0

1 = Receive incoming calls for overflow (Busy)
2 = Receive incoming calls all the time (Yes)

Conditions
If you assign an extension as a Group Supervisor in this program, you cannot program the same extension as
a System Supervisor in Program 41-01-01.

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-506 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-05 : Agent Work Schedules
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-05: Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for Agents and Groups. For
each Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After
you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the
same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)

Extensions can log in only during their work period. Extensions receive the following calls when they are
logged in.
 Call on a Trunk
When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Program 41-03 and 41-06).
 Pilot Number Call
Any time – if extensions are available.

Input Data
Work Schedule Time Pattern 1~4

Item Work Period

Start Time End Time Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-507

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each Work
Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up
the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by
the Agent Work Schedules.)

Input Data
Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1~4

Item Work Period Mode

Start Time End Time Default
No. Number

01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-508 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-07 : Weekly Schedule Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-07 : Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1~4) to days of the
week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the Agent Work Schedules (Program 41-
05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06).

Input Data

Item
Day Number Time Pattern Default
No.

1 = Sunday 0~4 0
0 = No

2 = Monday 0~4 0
0 = No

3 = Tuesday 0~4 0
0 = No

4 = Wednesday 0~4 0
01
0 = No

5 = Thursday 0~4 0
0 = No

6 = Friday 0~4 0
0 = No

7 = Saturday 0~4 0
0 = No

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-509

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-08 : Overflow Options
Level:
SA

Description

For each Group (1~64), use Program 41-08 : Overflow Options to assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement message types. Delay Announcement functions are not available for
pilot number calls. Each Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry
options.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Overflow 0 = No Overflow (None) 0

Operation Mode
1 = Overflow with No Announcement
2 = No Overflow with First Announcement Only
3 = No Overflow with First & Second Announcements
4 = Overflow with First Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First & Second Announcement
6 = --- Not Used ---
7 = --- Not Used ---
8 = No Overflow with Second Announcement Only
9 = Overflow with Second Announcement Only

02 Overflow 0 = No Setting 0
Destination
1~64 = Group
65 = Overflow Table (Program 41-09)
66 = Voice Mail Integration
67 = System Speed (Program 41-08-05)
68 = Incoming Ring Group (Program 41-08-06)

03 Delay 0 = ACI 0
Announcement 1 = VRS
Source Type
2 = VM8000 InMail

04 Overflow Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 30

Time

05 System Speed Dial 0~9999 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 67) 9999
Bin

2-510 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 Incoming Ring 1~100 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 68) 1

Group when
Overflow

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-511

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-09 : Overflow Table Setting
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-09 : Overflow Table Setting to define the group to which a call is transferred when
overflow occurs.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Priority
Item
Order Transfer Group Number With Overflow Default
No.
Number

01 1~7 0~65 0
0 = No Setting
65 = In-Skin Voice Mail Integration

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-512 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement to define the ACI port number to be used for the delay
announcement.
This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as ACI in
Program 41-08-03.
Input Data
Group No 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

0 = No Setting

02 2nd Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

0 = No Setting

03 1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 4

Set the time before the 1st Delay Announcement is played.

04 2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 60

Set the time the 1st Delay Announcement plays before the 2nd
Delay Announcement starts to play.

05 2nd Delay Announcement Sending Duration 0~64800 (sec) 0

Set the time the 2nd Delay Announcement plays. After this time
expires, the call disconnects. To keep the call in queue, set this
time to 0.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-513

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to use as the
message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages. Refer to Program 41-08 for more
on setting up the overflow options.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in
Program 41-08-03.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delay Message Start Timer 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the time before the 1st Delay Message Starts.

02 1st Delay Message Number 0~101 0

Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0~255 0

Input the number of times the 1st Delay Message is sent.
If set to 0, the message is not played.

04 2nd Delay Message Number 0~101 0

Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

05 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count 0~255 0

Input the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is sent.
If set to 0, the message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Input what is heard between the Delay messages. 1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source

07 Forced Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay Message 0~64800 (sec) 60
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message is played, (0 = No Disconnect)
before the call is disconnected.

2-514 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Queue Depth Announcement 0 = Disable 0

Input when the Queue Depth Announcement is played. 1 = After 1st (1st)
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-515

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce voice resource and
sending time for each group. Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-
02. The night announcement function is not available for pilot number calls.

Input Data
Group Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Night Announcement Source Type 0 = ACI 0

1 = VRS

02 Night Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0. 0 = No Setting

03 Night Announce Sending Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0.

Conditions
The Night Announcement function is not available for pilot number call.

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-516 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS message
number to use as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement
source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12-01.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Message Number 0~100 0

Input the VRS Message to use for the Night 0 = No Message
Announcement.

02 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Input what is heard between the Night Announcements. 1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-517

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-14 : Options Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-14 : Options Setup to set various options for Groups. When you set an option for an
Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents in the group. The chart below shows each of the
options, the entries available, and the default entry.

Input Data
Group No 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Emergency Call Operation Mode 0 = Call to system supervisory 0

The supervisor must be logged in and extension when group supervisory
have an Emergency Key programmed extension is busy.
for this feature. By pressing the key 1 = No calls to system supervisory
once, the supervisor monitors the call – extension when group supervisory
pressing twice barges in on the call. extension is busy.

02 Automatic Wrap Up Mode 0 = After wrap up the mode key is 0

Enable/Disable Automatic Wrap Up pressed. (Manual)
mode. 1 = After call is finished automatically.
(Auto)

03 Priority for Overflow Calls 0 = Own group priority 0

Determine whether the group should 1 = Priority order by Program 41-03-03
use its own priority assignment or follow
the priority assigned in Program 41-03-
03.

04 Automatic Answer at Headset 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable Automatic Answer for 1 = On
agents using headsets.

06 Call Queuing after 2nd 0 = Enable (Yes) 0

Announcement
1 = Disable (No)
Determine whether the caller should
hear the 2nd Delay Announcement and
then be taken out of queue (1), or
placed back into queue (0).

2-518 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Automatic Off Duty for SLT 0 = No change to Off Duty mode 0

Enable/Disable Automatic Off Duty 1 = Change to Off Duty mode
(rest) mode for agents with SLT. automatically (Skip)

08 Off Duty Mode 0 = Cannot receive internal call 0

Enable/Disable the ability to receive 1 = Can receive internal call
internal calls when in Off Duty Mode.

09 Automatic Wrap Up End Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the time the agent is in Wrap
mode when Wrap key is pressed, or
automatically put into Wrap mode.

10 No Answer Skip Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

Set the time a call to the Group rings an
idle extension before routing to the next
agent.

12 Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for 0~64800 (sec) 0

SLT)

13 1st Data – Queue 1-Digit Assignment 1st Data – Blank

Up to one Digit (0, 1~9, #, )

2nd Data – Destination Number Type 2nd Data – 0

0 = None
1 = Extension or Voice Mail
2 = Incoming Ring Group
3 = Speed Dial Areas
4 = Group

3rd Data – Destination Number 3rd Data – Blank

Up to eight digits (0, 1~9, #, )

14 DTMF Detection Assignment during 0 = Does not detect during message 1

Delay Announcement
1 = Detect during message
Set whether the DTMF Detection for
Dial Out occurs during or after the
message is played.

15 DTMF Detect Time after Delay 0~64800 (sec) 0

Announcement Message
Set the time for DTMF Detection after
the Delay Announcement Message.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-519

 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-520 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-15 : Queue Alarm Information
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-15 : Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for Audible Indication for Log
Out/Off Duty mode for each group.

These program settings provide an alarm to the agents, but no Queue Status Display is indicated. Do
not use these programs if the alarm options are defined in Program 41-20-01 through 41-20-05.

Feature Available in Program 41-15 Available in Program 41-20

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Time

Alarm Yes Yes

Alarm Send Time Yes

Program 41-15-02 determines the
Interval Time of Queue length/interval of the alarm. Yes
Status Display

Class of Service --- Yes

Timing of Alarm and Alarm triggered after the number of Alarm triggered after the number of
Display Queue Status calls in Program 41-15-01 is calls in Program 41-20-01 is exceeded.
exceeded. Then follows Program 41-20-03 time for
displaying status.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue to Activate Alarm Information 0~400 0

0 = No Alarm

02 Interval Time of Alarm Information 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the alarm sound time.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-521

 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-522 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-16 : Threshold Overflow
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-16 : Threshold Overflow to define the value of the threshold call overflow and the
mode for each group.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue 0~400 0

Define the maximum number of calls allowed 0 = No Limitation
in the queue before overflow occurs.

02 Operation Mode for Queue 0 = The last waiting call is 0

Define how the system should handle calls transferred
when the number of calls in queue exceeds 1 = The longest waiting call is
the threshold. transferred
2 = Send Busy Tone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-523

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-17 : Login Mode Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-17 : Login Mode Setup to define the login mode for each extension. If the AIC Login
Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC Logout service codes for the AIC members in Program 11-
13-08 and 11-13-09.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Login Mode Default
No.

01 0 = Normal Login Mode 0

1 = AIC Login Mode

Conditions
If set to 1, note that a supervisor cannot log in/out an AIC member as they are not normal agents.

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-524 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-18 : Agent Identity Code Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-18 : Agent Identity Code Setup to define the Agent Identity Code Table.

Input Data

AIC Table No. 001~960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Agent Identity Code Up to four digits No Setting

02 Default Group Number 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

03 Group Number in Mode 1 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

04 Group Number in Mode 2 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

05 Group Number in Mode 3 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

06 Group Number in Mode 4 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

07 Group Number in Mode 5 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

08 Group Number in Mode 6 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

09 Group Number in Mode 7 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

10 Group Number in Mode 8 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-525

 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-526 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign VM8000 InMail Master Mailboxes
(PRG 47-03) as Delay Announcement Mailboxes.

Input Data
Group Number 1 ~ 64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delay Message Start Timer 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 0

Determine the time the system waits before playing the
Delay Message.

02 Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message Dial No Setting

Assign the Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox as the (up to eight digits)
message source for the 1st Announcement Message.

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0 = No message is 0

Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This played.
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play. 1 ~ 255

04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Dial No Setting

Assign the Voice Mail Announcement Mailboxes as the (up to eight digits)
message source for the 2nd Announcement Message.

05 2nd Delay Message Sending Count 0 = No message is 0

Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This played.
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
1 ~ 255

06 Wait Tone Type at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back 0

Determine what the caller hears between the messages. Tone
1 = Music On Hold
Tone
2 = Background
Music Source

07 Forced Disconnect Time after 2nd Announcement 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 0

Assign the time the system should wait after the end of
the Delay Message before disconnecting.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-527

 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Delay Message Interval Time 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 20

Set the time for the interval between the Delay Messages.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-528 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-20 : Queue Display Settings
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-20 : Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the Queue Status Display feature.
This program allows the Queue Status Display, and causes an alarm to sound, when the parameters in
this program are met.

Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents. The options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.

Available in Available in
Feature
Program 41-15 Program 41-20

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Time

Alarm Yes Yes

Alarm Send Time Yes

Program 41-15-02 determines the
Interval Time of Queue length/interval of the alarm. Yes
Status Display

Class of Service --- Yes

Timing of Alarm and Alarm triggered after the number of

Display Queue Status Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41-20-01 is
calls in Program 41-15-01 is exceeded. exceeded. Then follows Program
41-20-03 time for displaying status.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-529

 Issue 1.0

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue 0 = No Display, 1~400 0

Set the number of calls that can accumulate in the queue
before the Queue Status Display (and optional queue
alarm) occurs.

02 Queue Status Display Time 0~64800 (sec) 5 (sec)

Set the time the Queue Status display remains on the
telephone display.

03 Queue Status Display Interval 0~64800 (sec) 60 (sec)

Set the time that refreshes the Queue Status Alarm time in
queue display and causes the optional queue alarm to
occur on phones active on a call, logged out, or in wrap-up.

04 Call Waiting Alarm 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Enable/Disable the queue alarm. 1 = Enable (On)

05 Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Set the time the Call Waiting Alarm should sound.

06 ACD Queue Call Display Settings 1 ~ 400 0

Number of calls to switch the state of ACD Queue Alarm (0 = No Display)
Display Key.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-530 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-21 : Login ID Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-21 : Login ID Setup to assign the Login ID code to Skill Table used for Skill Based
Routing.

Input Data
Login ID 01~960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Login ID Code Up to 20 digits No

Input the Login ID(s) to be used.
Setting

02 Skill Table Number 0, 1~960 0

Input the Skill Table number to be used for each Login ID.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-531

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-22 : Skill Based Routing Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-22 : Skill Based Routing Setup to assign if the Group can use or not use Skill Based
Routing.

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Skill Base Routing 0 = Off 0

This option determines if the Skill Based Routing is Used (1), or 1 = On
Not Used (0).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-532 Program 41 : ACD Setup

Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-23 : Skill Table Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-23 : Skill Table Setup to assign the skill level per table for each Group.

Input Data
Skill Table 1~960

Input Data
Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Skill Level 1~7 1

Input the Skill Level for each Queue for each Skill Table (Level 1 is the highest level)
number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-533

 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-24 : Caller ID Marking Setup
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 41-24 : Caller ID Marking Setup to assign Enable/Disable the availability of setting that the
Agent can mark the originator caller ID, system base.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Caller ID Marking Setup 0: Disable 0

Enable/Disable the availability of setting that the Agent can 1: Enable
mark the originator caller ID, system base.

02 Agent Info for Caller ID 0: Agent Extension Number 0

Set whether the Agent ID or extension number of the Agent 1: Agent ID
is used to mark with the CID in the buffer.

03 Caller ID Buffer Clear Timer 1~168 (hours) 24

Set time interval for clearing stored Caller ID record in buffer.

04 Caller ID Buffer Store Size 1000~10000 10000

Set the Caller ID Buffer Size. When the number of CID
records is over the limit, CID buffer threshold alarm (71) can
be reported.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Contact Center

2-534 Program 41 : ACD Setup

 Program: 42
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel
Service.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answering Message Mode for Wake 0 = MOH (Hold Time) 0

Up Call (Hotel Mode)
1 = VRS Message
2 = VRS Message + Time

02 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0

VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You 0 = No Setting
must make an entry for this program if
you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01
above.

03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 = No Transfer 0

1 = Transfer to the Operator

04 Setup Message Mode for Wake Up 0 = Confirmation Tone 0

Call (Hotel Mode)
1 = VRS Message
2 = VRS Message + Time

05 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0

0 = No Setting

06 Flexible Room Status 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

07 Snooze Callback Timer 0 = Not Activated 10

Assign the number of minutes before a 1 = (1~30) Minutes
Snooze Callback is performed.

08 Snooze Callback Setting Dial 0~9, , # (Up to one digit) 1

Assign the digit dialed by user to set
Snooze Callback.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-535

 Issue 4.0

Refer to the tables below for valid status code changes when Program 42-01-06 is enabled or disabled.

Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 1 (Enabled)

Change
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code  Code #
Status

Original
Status

Code 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code  Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code # Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is set to 0 (Disabled)

Change
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code  Code #
Status

Original
Status

Code 1 N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y

Code 2 Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 3 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 4 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 5 Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 6 Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y

Code 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y

Code 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y

Code 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y

Code 0 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y

Code  Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y

Code # Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N

2-536 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-537

 Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel
extensions.

Input Data
Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Hotel Mode 0 = Normal 0

If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/ 1 = Hotel
Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone to
operate in the business mode, enter 0.

02 Toll Restriction Class When Check In 1~15 1

Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when
it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll
Restriction Classes (1~15). The entry you make
in this option affects the telephone in all Night
Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05 and
21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing
options.) When the extension is checked out, it
uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program
21-04.

03 Room Status Room Clean (Occupied) N/A

This is a read only setting that shows the current Maid Required
room status setting. Maid in Room
(Read Only) Inspection Required
Maintenance Request
Out of Order
Reserve 1
Reserve 2
Reserve 3
Room Clean (Vacant)
Reserve 5
Reserve 6

2-538 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-539

 Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service
(COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup.
There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its
range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06 ~ 20-14.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data Class Class
01 02~15

01 Check-In Operation 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

02 Check-Out Operation 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

03 Room Status Output 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

06 Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

07 Restriction Class Changing for Other 0 = Off 0 0

Extension 1 = On

08 Room to Room Call Restriction 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

09 DND Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

2-540 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data Class Class
01 02~15

10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

11 Change Room Status for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

12 SLT Room Monitor 0 = Off 0 0

Enable (1)/Disable (0) a single line 1 = On
telephone ability to use Room Monitor.

13 PMS Restriction Level 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Class of Service

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-541

 Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service
codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (1~64), you enter the
destination for each single digit code (1~9, 0, , #). The destination can be any code with up to four
digits, such as an extension number or access code.

Input Data
Department (Extension) 01~64
Group Number

Item
Received Dial Destination Number Default
No.

01 1~9,0,,# Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions
The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing.

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

2-542 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the CTA port to output the Hotel Data (Check-
Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/Motel feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = Not assigned 0

1 = Not used
2 = - - Reserved - -
3 = LAN

03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 = Not Output 0

Data
1 = Output

04 Check-Out Sheet 0 = Not Output 0

1 = Output

Conditions

 Room Status Reports output via a CTA or CTU adapter require a digital terminal and a compatible
external device.

 Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port, or when using digital terminals, a CTA or CTU
adapter and a compatible external device.

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-543

 Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-06 : PMS Service Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when using PMS-U10
and PMS feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PMS Port Number 0~65535 5129

A system restart is required when changing this
program for the change to take affect.

02 3:00 AM Auto Room Scan 0 = Off 0

Set maid required status for all checked-in rooms at 1 = On
3:00 AM.

03 CheckIn Message Type 0 = Off 0

1 = On

04 CheckOut Auto Status Change 0 = Off 0

1 = On

05 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Timing 1~128 (sec) 10

06 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Count 0~20 (times) 3

07 Check-out Auto Flexible Status Change 0 = Disable 0

When PRG42-06-07 and PRG42-06-04 are both 1 = Enable
enabled, the status programmed in PRG42-06-08 is set
upon checkout regardless of the previous room status.

08 Status for Check-out Auto Flexible Status Change 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) 4
When PRG42-06-07 is enabled the status programmed 2 = Maid Required
in 42-06-08 is set upon checkout. 3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)

2-544 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-545

 Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the default Toll Restriction
class on check in for a room (PRG 42-02-02).

Input Data
Restriction Level 0~3

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 1~15 Level 0 = 10

Level 1 = 11
Level 2 = 12
Level 3 = 13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

2-546 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 42-07 : Flexible Setup for Room Status to enable dial room status codes. Note the code
definitions only apply to the system itself. When sending room status messages to the PMS Application,
the status codes are always sent as defined in the PMS Developer Guide.

For example, if in PRG 42-09-01 status code 1 is set to Inspection Required. The PMS Developer Guide
defines “Inspection Required” as status message number 4. If in the SV9100 room status 1 is assigned
to a room the PVA PMS interface will send status message number 4 to the PMS Application. If nothing
is assigned in
PRG 42-09-01 the default room status codes are sent as defined in the PMS Developer Guide.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Flexible Setup for Room Status 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) 0

2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
 = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Hotel/Motel

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-547

 Issue 4.0

2-548 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

 Program: 44
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the ARS/F-Route
feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ARS/F-Route Time Schedule 0 = Not Used 0

If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is 1 = Used
determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to
the day or time of the call.
If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to Program
44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that
program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in Program
44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.

02 Dial Tone Simulation 1 Digit (0~9) None

(, # cannot
be used)

03 Tone Type 0 = Internal 0

Dial Tone
1 = External
Dial Tone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

 Uniform Numbering Network

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-549

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route.

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1~120

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Up to eight digits No

Dial digits to be analyzed by the system. (Use line key 1 for a Don’t Care Setting
digit, @)

02 Service Type 0 = No setting (None) 0

 Service Type 1 (Extension Number) 1 = Extension Call (Own)
The number goes to an extension after deleting 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
the front digit(s). (F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension Analyze
Additional Data
Table (Option)
Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the
number for extension number usage. At least
one digit must be deleted.
 Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route table.

Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not used,
assign the ARS/F-Route table number for
Program 44-05.

If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used,

assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for
Program 44-04.
 Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table)
The total length of the number exceeds more
than 8 digits.

Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table number
to be used in Program 44-03.

2-550 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Additional Data 1 = Delete Digit = 0~255 (255 : 0

For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the Delete All Digits)
additional data required. 2 = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
 1: Delete Digit = 0~255 3 = Dial Extension Analyze
(255 = Delete All Digits)
Table Number = 0~4
 2: [Program 44-01 : 0] (0 = No Setting)
ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]

ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0~500

(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.

 3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0~4

(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.

04 Dial Tone Simulation 0 = Off 0

Enable to send dial tone to the calling party after the 1 = On
routing is determined. This may be required if the
central office at the destination does not send dial
tone.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-551

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level:
IN

Description

When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set
the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than
eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1~250, table number 252 is used to
refer to the next Extension Table Area (1~4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in
tables 1~250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.

Input Data
Extension Table Area Number 1~4

Dial Analysis Table Number 1~252

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1~250

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Up to 24 digits No Setting

Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)

02 ARS/F-Route Select 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0

Table Number With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

2-552 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 ARS/F-Route Select 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0

Table Number
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Next Table Area Number 0~4 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-553

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/F-Route Selection
number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight time modes
for ARS/F-Route Access.

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1~500

Item ARS/F-Route ARS/F-Route

Default
No. Time Mode Table Number

01 1~8 0~500 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2-554 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of order. If
the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route is selected,
the caller may be notified with a beep tone.

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number 1~500

Priority Number 1~4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk Group Number 0~100, 101~150 (100+ Networking ID), 255 0

Select the trunk group number to use for the 0 = No Setting
outgoing ARS call. 1~100 = Trunk Group from PRG 14-05
101~150 = Networking
255 = Extension Call

02 Delete Digits 0~255 0

Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the (255 = Delete All)
dialed number.

03 Additional Dial Number Table 0~1000 0

Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06)
for additional digits to be dialed.

04 Beep Tone 0 = Off 0

Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower 1 = On
priority trunk group is used to dial out.

05 Gain Table Number for Internal Calls 0~500 0

Select the gain table number to use for the internal 0 = No Setting
call (defined in Program 44-07).

06 Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections 0~500 0

Select the gain table number to use for the tandem 0 = No Setting
call (defined in Program 44-07).

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-555

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 ARS Class of Service 0~50 0

Select the ARS Class of Service to use for the
table. An extension ARS COS is determined in
Program 26-04-01.

08 Dial Treatment 0~15 0

Select the Dial Treatment to use for the table. If a
Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and
44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment
defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead.

09 Maximum Digit 0~24 0

Input the maximum number of digits to send when
using the F-Route.

10 CCIS over IP Destination Point Code 0~16367 0

Input the Destination Point Code to send when
using this F-Route.

11 Network Specified Parameter Table 0~16 0

Enter a table number from Program 26-12.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2-556 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-
Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.

Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number 1~1000

Item
Additional Dial Default
No.

01 Up to 24 digits No Setting
Enter: 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-557

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension dials
ARS/F-Route number:
 The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
 The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:

 The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
 The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line,
and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line.

For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-03
 are not activated.
NOTE

Input Data
Gain Table Number 1~500

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Incoming Transmit 1~57 32

(-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) (0dB)

02 Incoming Receive 1~57 32

(-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) (0dB)

03 Outgoing Transmit 1~57 32

(-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) (0dB)

04 Outgoing Receive 1~57 32

(-15.5 ~ +12.5dB) (0dB)

2-558 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-559

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route
feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The
daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

Input Data
Schedule Pattern Number 01~10

Item
Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
No.

01 01~20 0000~2359 0000~2359 1~8

Default
All Schedule Patterns : 0:00 – 0:00, Mode 1
Example:

Pattern 1

0:00 8:00 18:00 22:00 0:00

Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Time Number 01 : 00:00 – 08:00 Mode 3

Time Number 02 : 08:00 – 18:00 Mode 1
Time Number 03 : 18:00 – 22:00 Mode 2
Time Number 04 : 22:00 – 00:00 Mode 3

Pattern 2

0:00 0:00
Mode 2

Time Number 01 : 0:00 – 0:00 Mode 2

2-560 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-561

 Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-
Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

Schedule
Item
Day Number Pattern Default
No.
Number

1 = Sunday 1~10 Pattern 1

2 = Monday 1~10 Pattern 1

3 = Tuesday 1~10 Pattern 1

01 4 = Wednesday 1~10 Pattern 1

5 = Thursday 1~10 Pattern 1

6 = Friday 1~10 Pattern 1

7 = Saturday 1~10 Pattern 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2-562 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

Issue 4.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route.
This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is defined
in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

Item
Date Schedule Pattern Number Default
No.

01 0101~1231 0~10 0
0 = No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-563

 Issue 4.0

2-564 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

 Program: 45
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Voice Mail Department Group Number 0~64 0

Assign Extension (Department) Group number as 0 = No Voice Mail
the voice mail group.

02 Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 Characters VOICE

Enter the Voice Mail Master Name.
MAIL

03 Voice Mail Call Screening 0 = Off 0

Enable/Disable the ability to process the Call 1 = On
Screening commands (1+ extension number) sent
from the Voice Mail. You should normally enable this
option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable
this option if your system has been modified so that
extensions begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102,
etc.).

04 Park and Page 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable the system ability to process the 1 = On
Voice Mail Park and Page () commands. You
should normally enable this option.

05 Message Wait 0 = Off 1

Enable/Disable the system ability to process the 1 = On
Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You
should normally enable this option. If enabled, be
sure that the programmed Message Notification
strings don’t contain the code for trunk access.

06 Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

Set the time between Voice Mail Conversation
Record alerts.

07 Centralized Voice Mail Pilot Number Dial (up to eight No Setting

Assign this number the same as the extension digits)
number or pilot number.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-565

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Centralized Voice Mail Department Group 0~64 0

Number
Assign which Extension (Department) Group
Number is used as the Centralized Voice Mail group.

09 Centralized Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 characters “C.V.M.”

Assign the Centralized Voice Mail Master Name.

10 New NSL Protocol support 0 = Off 0

1 = On

11 Prefix for Call Screening Dial (One digit) 1

12 Prefix for Park and Page Dial (One digit) 

13 Prefix for Message Wait Dial (One digit) #

14 CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number Dial (up to eight No Setting
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice Mail digits)
over CCIS Link. This is assigned only in the remote
switches.

15 Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection 0: Fixed 0

Assign whether fixed codes or the codes used in 1: Program
PRG 45-04 are used for analog voice mail protocol.

16 Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment Up to four digits None

Assign up to four digits in front of the station number
sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded.

17 Reply Mailbox Number 0: No 1

Select whether or not to include the mailbox number 1: Yes
in the analog voice mail protocol.

18 Trunk Number Mapping 2~3 2

Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.

19 Centralized Voice Mail Type 0 = Retro 1

Assign which Centralized Voice Mail types to use, 1 = Enhanced
Retro (Aspire) or Enhanced (Cygnus).

2-566 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-567

 Issue 4.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD message 0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port 1
1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port

03 Send 51A Message 0 = Off 1

1 = On

05 Send 4 PM Message 0 = Off 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-568 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

Issue 4.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Remote Logon (Internal) Up to four digits None

02 Direct Logon Up to four digits None

03 Transfer Message Up to four digits None

04 Forward-All Up to four digits None

05 Forward-Busy Up to four digits None

06 Forward RNA Up to four digits None

07 Remote Logon Up to four digits None

08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits None

09 Clear Down String Up to four digits None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-569

 Issue 4.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk
number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when PRG 45-04-XX is left blank
and 45-01-15 is set to Program.
Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Remote Log-On Internal 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Direct Log-On 0 = Off 0

1 = On

03 Transfer Message/QVM 0 = Off 0

1 = On

04 Forward-All 0 = Off 0
1 = On

05 Forward-Busy 0 = Off 0
1 = On

06 Forward RNA 0 = Off 0

1 = On

07 Remote Log-On 0 = Off 0

1 = On

08 Conversation Recording 0 = Off 0

1 = On

09 Clear Down String 0 = Off 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-570 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

 Program: 47
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options to set up the SV8100 InMail system-wide options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 SV8100 InMail Master Name Up to 12 characters InMail ##

(MasterName) (The system substitutes the
port number for the # when
The GCD-CP10 must be reset for a change to
this program to take effect. calling the port).

Modify the name for all UNIVERGE SV9100

VM8000 InMail ports. The system briefly
displays this name when a display multiline
terminal user calls a Voice Mail port (either by
pressing Message, their voice mail key, or by
dialing the master number). You should always
end the name with the ## characters. The
system substitutes the port number for the last
#. Using the default name InMail ##, for
example, the telephone display shows InMail
#1 when calling port 1.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-571

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Subscriber Message Length 1~4095 (sec) 120

(Subs Msg Length)
Set the maximum length of recorded messages
for:

 Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to

record and send a message.

 Extension users leaving a message in a

Subscriber Mailbox.

 Outside Automated Attendant callers

accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record
and send a message.

 Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.

 Announcement Messages.

 Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.

 The length of a Conversation Record is
10 times the Subscriber Message Length.
Since the Conversation Record time cannot
exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in
Subscriber Message Length larger than 409
has no effect on the length of recorded
conversations.

04 Non-Subscriber Message Length 1~4095 (sec) 120

(Mbox Msg Length)
Set the maximum length of recorded messages
for:

 Automated Attendant callers leaving a

message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.

 Outside callers transferred by an extension

user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

05 Message Backup/Go Ahead Time 1~60 (sec) 5

(Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Set the backup/go ahead time. This time sets
how far SV8100 InMail backs up when a user
dials B while listening to a message. This
interval also sets how far SV8100 InMail jumps
ahead when a user dials G while listening to a
message.

2-572 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Digital Pager Callback Number Digits XM#

(Pager CBack) (12 maximum, using 0~9, # and
Set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion )
of the Message Notification callout number for
a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout M (Number of messages –
number that is appended to the pager service entered by pressing LK1)
telephone number. Normally, this option should
be XM#, where: X (Extension number – entered
by pressing LK2)
 X is the number of the extension that
generated the notification.
SV8100 InMail automatically
  is a visual delimiter (to make the pager replaces the X command with
display easier to read).
the number of the extension
 M is the number of new messages in the that initially received the
extension mailbox. message.
 # is the digit normally used by the pager
service for positive disconnect.

08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback 0~99 (sec) 30

Number
(Pager Dial Delay)
Set the delay that occurs just before SV8100
InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message Notification callout
number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the
pager service has enough time to connect to
the digital pager before sending the callback
number. Your pager service may be able to
help you determine the best value for this
option. When placing a digital pager
notification, the system:
Seizes the trunk specified.
Dials the user-entered notification number (in
Message + OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digital
Pager Callback Number interval.
Dials the number entered in 47-01-07: Digital
Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification
number completes dialing approximately 4
seconds after trunk seizure. This means that,
by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number
is dialed into the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-573

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

09 Wait Between Digital Pager Callout 1~255 (min) 15

Attempts
(Notify Pager Intvl)
Set the minimum time between
unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager
Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber
acknowledges a digital pager notification by
logging onto their mailbox.) After this time
expires, SV8100 InMail tries the callout again
(for up to the number of times set in 47-01-14:
Number of Callout Attempts).
If the system dials the callout number and the
pager service is busy, it retries the number in
one minute.

10 Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts 1~255 (min) 20

(Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Set the minimum time between non-pager
Message Notification callouts in which the
destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to
acknowledge and then enters the wrong
security code.

11 Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout 1~255 (min) 15

Attempts
(Notify Busy Intvl)
Set the time SV8100 InMail waits after it dials a
busy non-pager callout destination, before
retrying the callout number.

2-574 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout 1~255 (min) 30

Attempts
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Set the time SV8100 InMail waits, after it dials
an unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered non-pager
callouts:

 If the callout rings the destination longer

than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-
Pager Callout Attempts option.

 If the destination answers, says Hello (or

the system detects answer supervision)
and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log
onto their mailbox. This typically happens if
someone unfamiliar with notification
answers the callout, or if the callout is
picked up by an answering machine.

 If the destination answers and then hangs

up without saying Hello. This typically
happens if someone unfamiliar with the
notification answers the callout (like the
above example), or if the call is picked up
by an answering machine with insufficient
outgoing message volume.

13 Number of RNA Rings 1~99 (rings) 5

(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the destination
longer than this number of rings, SV8100 InMail
marks the call as unanswered (Ring No
Answer) and hangs up.

14 Number of Cascading Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 1

(Notify Call Attmpt)
With Cascade Pager Notification: Set how
many times a mailbox’s enabled pager
notification destinations are tried. For example
if 47-01-14 is set to 10 and a mailbox has 5
enabled pager destinations and each
destination has 3 retires for BNA/RNA (47-20-
06 and 47-20-07). The InMail will call each
destination 3 times, and will retry all the
enabled destinations 10 times. This means
each enabled destination will be called a total
of 30 times (10 x 3).
With Normal Pager Notification: Set how many
attempts SV9100 InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout. This total includes
unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy
destination, and callouts to an unanswered
destination. This option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-575

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

15 Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(Retry Until Ack) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
When this option is set to 1, SV8100 InMail
continues to retry a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the notification is
acknowledged. If this option is disabled (0),
SV8100 InMail retries a digital pager Message
Notification the number of times specified in
47-01-14 Number of Callout Attempts. This
option does not apply to Message Notification
callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is considered
acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the
mailbox.

16 Name Format 0 = 1st Last 0

Specify if names are displayed in First Last 1 = Last 1st
format or Last First.

18 Play PAD Control 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32 (0dB)

19 Record PAD Control (for Networking) 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32 (0dB)

20 Delete DTMF Tone when recording message 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

21 Restrict Using InMail on Secondary System 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

Conditions
When changing 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-576 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station
mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, SV8100 InMail Station
Mailbox numbers 1~26 should correspond to extensions 101~126.

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 1~896

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Mailbox Type 0 = None Mailbox 1 = 1

Enable/Disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is 1 = Personal Mailbox 2 ~ 960 = 0
not accessible when it is disabled (even though its 2 = Group
stored messages and configuration are retained in
memory.) If disabled, a user pressing Message
initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their
mailbox number. A voice prompt then announces:
“That mailbox does not exist.”
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.

02 Mailbox Number Digits (8 maximum, using Mailbox 1 = 101

Select the extension number associated with the 0~9) Mailboxes 2~64 = 102~164
mailbox you are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 Mailboxes 65~896 = No entry
should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox 2 should
use Mailbox Number 102, etc.
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.

03 Number of Messages 0~99 messages 99 for mailbox 1

Set the maximum number of messages that can be To conserve storage 20 for all other mailboxes
left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave space, enter 0 for all
a message after this limit is reached, they hear: unused mailboxes.
“That mailbox is full.” SV8100 InMail then hangs up.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-577

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Message Playback Order 0 = FIFO (first-in/first-out, 0

Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback or oldest messages first).
order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, 1 = LIFO (last-in/first-out,
SV8100 InMail can play the oldest messages first, or or newest messages first)
the newest messages first.

05 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 = Erase 1

Determine what happens when a Subscriber After the subscriber listens
Mailbox user completely listens to a new message to the entire new message
and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) and hangs up, SV8100
or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the InMail erases the
setting of this option, SV8100 InMail either message.
automatically saves or erases the message. If the 1 = Save
mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire
After the subscriber listens
new message, SV8100 InMail retains the message
to the entire new message
as a new message.
and hangs up, SV8100
InMail saves the message.

06 Message Retention 1~99 Days 0

Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains 0 = Indefinite
held and saved messages. If a message is left in a
Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, SV8100
InMail deletes it.

07 Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disable) 1

(Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep. If
enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep when the
extension user initiates Conversation Record. If
disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur.
When you disable the Conversation Record beep,
the following voice prompts do not occur while
SV8100 InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV9100 telephone system software
provides an additional Conversation Record beep.
This beep repeats according to the setting of
Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time
(0~64800 seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE
SV9100 telephone system Conversation Record
beep, enter 0 for this option.

2-578 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disable) 1

(Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Message Waiting lamps at the
extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox.
For Subscriber Mailboxes, enable this option. For
Guest Mailboxes, disable this option.

09 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 = No (Disable) 0

(Auto-ATT DND) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb.
When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller routes
directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is
asked to leave a message. A subscriber also can
enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb while
recording their mailbox greeting.

10 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disable) 0

(Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the
extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer
(UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the
Automated Attendant occur normally.

11 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disable) 0

Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber 1 = Yes (Enable)
Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a
message SV8100 InMail announces the time and
date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also
announces the message sender (if known).
A subscriber also can enable Auto Time Stamp from
their mailbox.

12 System Administrator 0 = No (Disable) Mailbox 1 (101)=1

Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System 1 = Yes (Enable)
Other mailboxes=0
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the
SA options after logging onto their mailbox.

13 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disable) 0

Provide additional dialing options for Next Call 1 = Yes (Enable)
Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing
Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses
the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial
any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial
Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to
use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-579

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

14 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 1 (Call Routing Mailbox 01)
(Next CR Mbox) Number (0~32, 0 = not By default, Call Routing
set) Mailbox numbers are 01~32.
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with No entry (Entered by
additional dialing options while listening to a pressing CLEAR)
Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting.
The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting
of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next
Call Routing Mailbox options.

15 Directory List Number 0 = None 0

1~8 = List Number
 = All

16 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-13 47-02- 1

16 Default Table

17 Enable Paging 0 = No (Disable) 0

1 = Yes (Enable)

18 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0

1 = Immediately

19 Telephone User Interface Type 0 = Numeric 0

1 = Mnemonic

20 Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

21 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

22 Include Message as Attachment 0 = No 1

1 = Yes

23 All Message Notification Enabled 0 = No 1

This setting controls whether voice and pager 1 = Yes
notification work for a mailbox. This setting does not
affect email notification.

24 All Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

25 Security Code Option 0 = Always 0

1 = Remote Logon only

26 Station Mailbox Options - Auto Play 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

27 Email Message Save/Delete Option 0 = No change 0

Either save or delete the message in the Station 1 = Save
Mailbox after email is sent. 2 = Delete

2-580 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

28 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options - 0 = Disabled 0

Queuing.
1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Notification Queuing. If enabled, Message
Notification is stored in queue when there is no
active notification destination.

Table 2-13 47-02-16 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-581

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-582 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01~32). A Group
Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing.

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Mailbox Number Digits (eight maximum, No Setting

(Mailbox Number) using 0~9)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the
Department Group master (pilot) number. Select the No Setting (entered by
Department Group master (pilot) number associated with pressing Hold)
the Group Mailbox you are programming.

Group Mailbox Type 0 = Undefined 1

(Mailbox Type) 1 = Subscriber
Set the Group Mailbox type. 2 = Routing
03
Routing Mailbox Number 1~32 1
If 47-03-03: Group Mailbox Type is set to 2 (Routing),
use this option to specify the Routing Mailbox InMail
uses for the Group Mailbox.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-583

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber
Mailbox in 47-03-03: Master Mailbox Type.

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 1~32

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Messages 0~99 messages 20

Set the maximum number of messages that can be To conserve storage
left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to space, enter 0 for all
leave a message after this limit is reached, they unused mailboxes.
hear, “That mailbox is full.” VM8000 InMail then
hangs up.

02 Message Playback Order 0 = FIFO (first-in/ 0

Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback first-out, or oldest
order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, messages first).
VM8000 InMail can play the oldest messages first, 1 = LIFO (last-in/
or the newest messages first. first-out, or newest
messages first).

03 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 = Erase 1

Determine what happens when a Subscriber After the subscriber
Mailbox user completely listens to a new message listens to the entire new
and then exits the mailbox without either saving message and hangs
(SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the up, SV8100 InMail
setting of this option, VM8000 InMail either erases the message.
automatically saves or erases the message. If the 1 = Save
mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire
After the subscriber
new message, VM8000 InMail retains the message
listens to the entire new
as a new message. message and hangs
up, SV8100 InMail
saves the message.

2-584 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Message Retention 1~99 days 0

Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains 0 (Indefinite)
held and saved messages. If a message is left in a
Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval,
VM8000 InMail deletes it.

05 Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disable) 1

(Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep. If
enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep when the
extension user initiates Conversation Record. If
disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur.
When you disable the Conversation Record beep,
the following voice prompts do not occur while
SV8100 InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV9100 telephone system
software provides an additional Conversation
Record beep. This beep repeats according to the
setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0~64800
seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE SV9100
telephone system Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.

06 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disable) 1

(Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Message Waiting light at the
extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox.
For Subscriber Mailboxes, enable this option. For
Guest Mailboxes, disable this option.

07 Auto Attendant Direct to VoiceMail 0 = No (Disable) 0

Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Direct to VM. When 1 = Yes (Enable)
a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM,
an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the
mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a
message. A subscriber also can enable Auto
Attendant Direct to VM while recording their
mailbox greeting.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-585

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disable) 0

(Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the
extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer
(UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the
Automated Attendant occur normally.

09 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disable) 0

Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the 1 = Yes (Enable)
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber
listens to a message SV8100 InMail announces the
time and date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message sender (if
known).
A subscriber also can enable Auto Time Stamp
from their mailbox.

10 System Administrator 0 = No (Disable) 0

(System Admin) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the
options after logging onto their mailbox.

11 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disable) 0

Provide additional dialing options for Next Call 1 = Yes (Enable)
Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing
Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses
the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial
any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial
Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0
(to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).

12 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 1

(Next CR Mbox) Number (0~32) (Call Routing
No entry (entered by Mailbox 01)
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the
Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with pressing CLEAR) By default, Call
additional dialing options while listening to a Routing Mailbox
Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. numbers are
The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting 01=16.
of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next
Call Routing Mailbox options.

13 Directory List Number 0 = None 0

Specify the Directory List number to which the 1~8 = List Number
Group Mailbox belongs.  = All

14 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-14 1

47-06-14 Default Table.

15 Enable Paging 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

2-586 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

16 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0

1 = Immediate

17 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0

1 = Mnemonic interface

18 Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

19 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters. No setting

20 Include Message as Attachment 0 = No 1

1 = Yes

21 All Message Notification Enabled 0 = No 1

1 = Yes

22 All Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

23 Security Code Option 0 = Always 0

1 = Remote Logon only

24 Group Subscriber Options - Auto Play 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

25 Email Message Save/Delete Option 0 = No change 0

Either save or delete the message in the Group 1 = Save
Subscriber Mailbox after email is sent. 2 = Delete

26 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options - 0 = Disabled 0

Queuing
1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Notification Queuing. If enabled, Message
Notification is stored in queue when there is no
active notification destination.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-587

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-14 47-06-14 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian

2-588 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-589

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing
Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes.

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Routing Mailbox Type 0 = None Mailboxes 01~08 = 1 (Call Routing)

(Mailbox Type) 1 = Call Routing Mailboxes 09~32 = 2 (Announcement)
Set the Routing Mailbox type. 2 = Announcement
3 = Directory
4 = Distribution

03 Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-15 47-07-03 1

Default Table

04 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0

1 = Mnemonic interface

2-590 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Table 2-15 47-07-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-07-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Reserved
26 = Russian

Conditions
None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-591

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-592 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call Routing
Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Action Table 1~32 1 (Dial Action Table 1)

Assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing (Dial Action Table 1~32)
Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines the dialing
options for the call Routing Mailbox.

02 Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 (sec) 15

(Scrn Trf Timeout) Entering 0 causes
Set the time a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the immediate recall.
Automated Attendant rings an unanswered extension
before recalling.
This option has a similar function as Customize:
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] Options:
Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in SV8100
InMail.

03 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0~99 (sec) 5

(Dialing Timeout) Entering 0 causes the
Automated Attendant to
Determine the time SV8100 InMail waits for an
immediately route callers
Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the
to the Timeout destination
call to the Timeout destination.
programmed in the active
Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action Dial Action Table.
programmed.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout
action programmed, the caller routes to that
destination.
When the associated Dial Action Table does not have
a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu
repeats three times and then SV8100 InMail hangs up.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-593

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Fax Detection 0 = No (Disable) 0

Enable/Disable Fax Detection for the Call Routing 1 = Yes (Enable)
Mailbox. In enabled, the SV8100 InMail Automated
Attendant (when using this Call Routing Mailbox)
detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call then
routes to the company fax machine according to the
setting of 47-01-06:Fax Extension. If disabled, the
Automated Attendant does not detect incoming fax
calls.

05 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-594 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Announcement
Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Number (1~32) 0

(Next CR Mbox) 0 = Undefined
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer
Automated Attendant calls, provide additional routing
options to the Automated Attendant callers. This option
interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After below.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail
System Guide.

02 Repeat Count 0 (No Repeats) 0

Enter the number of times you want the Announcement 1~10 (Announcement repeats 1~10 times)
Mailbox message to repeat to callers. After an
Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the
message, it repeats the number of times specified in
this option. This option interacts with Next Call Routing
Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing
options.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail
System Guide.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-595

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Hang Up After 0 = None 0

(HangUp) 1 = Goodbye
Along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat 2 = Silent
Count above, provide additional routing options to
Automated Attendant callers.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail
System Guide.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-596 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options to assign SV8100 InMail options for each trunk.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1~400

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answer Table Assignment Answer Table (1~16) 1

(Answer Table)
Assign an SV8100 InMail Answer Table to each Direct
Inward Line (DIL) the Automated Attendant should
answer. The Automated Attendant follows the routing
specified by the selected Answer Table.

02 Record PAD Control 1~57 (-15.5dB ~ +12.5dB) 32 (0dB)

03 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-16 47-10- 1

This program is used to assign a language to calls that 03 Default Table
did not originally go through the voice mail auto
attendant. For example, a call rings directly to extension
101 which is forwarded to voice mail. Extension 101 is
set to use English but the customer wants calls on trunk
10 to hear French. You would assign trunk 10 as French
in 47-10-03 and calls on that trunk that go to voice mail
will hear French but calls on other trunks will hear
English.

04 Telephone User Interface Type 0 = Numeric 0

1 = Mnemonic

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-597

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-16 47-10-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian

2-598 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-599

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-11 :VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. VM8000 InMail
provides eight Answer Tables (1~16). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 :
VM8000 InMail Answer Table Schedule.

Input Data
Answer Table Number 1~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answer Schedule Override 0 = No (Disable) 0

(Schedule Override) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Enable/Disable Answer Schedule Override for the
selected Answer Table. If enabled (and you make an
entry for Override Mailbox below), the active Answer
Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox.

2-600 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Override Mailbox Category 0 (Undefined) 0

(Override MB Ctg) 1 (Subscriber Mailbox – STA)
Specify the category of the mailbox where Automated 2 (Group Mailbox)
Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer 3 (Routing Mailbox)
Schedule Override. VM8000 InMail mailbox categories
are Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing
Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the type
of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement)
within the specified category:

 If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the

outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.

 If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement

Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed, VM8000
InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.

 If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the

outside caller hears the instruction menu and can
dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action
Table.
 If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number
selection (below).
Override Mailbox Number Digits No Entry
(Override MB Num) (three maximum, using 0~9)

Specify the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls

should route when you enable Answer Schedule
Override. The mailbox number you select in this option
should match the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02:
Override Mailbox Category above.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-601

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Default Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined) Answer Table 1 = 3

(Default MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox (STA) Answer Table 2~16 = 0
Specify the category of mailbox used as the Default 2 = Group Mailbox
Mailbox. VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are 3 = Routing Mailbox
Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing
Mailbox. VM8000 InMail uses the Default Mailbox when
an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the type
of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement)
within the specified category:

 If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the

outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.

 If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox,

the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed, VM8000
InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.

 If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the

outside caller hears the instruction menu and can
dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action
Table.
 If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number
selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number Digits Answer Table 1 = 1
(Default MB Num) (Three maximum, using 0~9) Answer Table
Set the Answer Table Default Mailbox number. VM8000 2~16 = No Entry
InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer
Schedule is not in effect. By default, this occurs at all
times other than Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to
5:00 PM.

04 Next Answer Table Answer Table (1~16) 0

When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are not 0 = Undefined
sufficient, link two Answer Tables together. VM8000
InMail treats the two linked tables as a single 20 entry
Answer Table.

2-602 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-603

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-12 :VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant Answer
Schedules. There are 12 Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table.

Input Data
Answer Table Number 1~16

Schedule Entry Number 1~10

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Schedule Type 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2

(Entryxx Schedule Type) 1 = Day of the Week All other schedules = 0
Assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer 2 = Range of Days
Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the 3 = Date
Answer Schedule answers calls.
The schedule can be one of the following types:
 1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific
day of the week. For this type of schedule, you
select:
 The day of the week the schedule should
run:
 The schedule start time.
 The schedule end time.
 The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer calls.
 2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of
days. For this type of schedule, you select:
 The day of the week the schedule should
start.
 The day of the week the schedule should
stop.
 The time on the start day the schedule
should start.
 The time on the stop day the schedule
should stop.
 The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
(continued on next page)

2-604 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 (continued from previous page) 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2

 3. Date 1 = Day of the Week All Other Schedules = 0
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a 2 = Range of Days
specific day of the year. For this type of
schedule, you select: 3 = Date
 The specific date the schedule should run.
 On the selected date, the time the
schedule should start.
 On the selected date, the time the
schedule should stop.
 The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.

02 Answering Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined 3

(Entryxx MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox -
Specify the category of mailbox to which STA
Automated Attendant calls should route when the 2 = Group Mailbox
schedule is in effect. VM8000 InMail mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox
categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox,
or Routing Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the
exact type of Subscriber, Master, or Routing
Mailbox specified.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox,
the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed, VM8000
InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox,
the outside caller hears the instruction menu and
can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.

Answering Mailbox Number Digits (three maximum, Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 1

(Entryxx MB Num) using 0~9) All Other Answer Schedules =
Set the number of the Answering Mailbox the No Entry
Automated Attendant uses when the selected
schedule is in effect. This mailbox is defined in 47-
12-02: Answering Mailbox Category.

03 Day of the Week 1 = Sunday 1

(Entryxx Day) 2 = Monday
For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer Schedules, 3 = Tuesday
select the day of the week the Answer Schedule 4 = Wednesday
should be active.
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-605

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Start Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2

(Entryxx Start Day) 2 = Monday All Other Schedules = 1
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 3 = Tuesday
select the day of the week the Answer Schedule 4 = Wednesday
should start.
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

05 End Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 6

(Entryxx End Day) 2 = Monday All Other Answer Schedules = 1
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 3 = Tuesday
select the day of the week the Answer Schedule 4 = Wednesday
should end.
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

06 Date MMDD 0000

(Entryxx Date) For example:
0101 = January 1
For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, select the
1231 = December 31
date the Answer Schedule should be active.
0000 = No date set

07 Schedule Start Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 =

(Entryxx Start Time) For example: 0830 (8:30AM)
0130 = 1:30AM All other schedules are 0000.
Specify the time the Answer Schedule should start.
1700 = 5:00PM
It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of
Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To
make a schedule run continuously, make the same
entry for 47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-
08: Schedule End Time.)

08 Schedule End Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 =

(Entryxx End Time) For example: 1700
0130 = 1:30AM All Other Schedules = 0000
Specify the time the Answer Schedule should end.
1700 = 5:00PM
It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of
Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To 0000 = Undefined
make a schedule run continuously, make the same
entry for 47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-
08: Schedule End Time.)

2-606 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Example

Type 1 (Day of the Week) Answer Schedule Options

Type 1 (Day of Week) Example

In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

 Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
 Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10:30AM to 5:00PM.
 Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9:00AM to 10:00AM.
 At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox
Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.

When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order:
 Range of Days
 Day of Week
 Date

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-607

 Issue 4.0

Type 1 (Day of Week) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednesday from10:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 3

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 4

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1030 (10:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 3
Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from9:00AM to 10:00AM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB num = 4

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 3

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0900 (9:00AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1000 (10:00PM)

2-608 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Type 2 (Range of Days) Answer Schedule Options

Type 2 (Range of Days) Example

 In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:
 Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
 Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.
 At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox
Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.

When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order:
 Range of Days
 Day of Week
 Date

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-609

 Issue 4.0

Type 2 (Range of Days) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs Sunday through Wednesday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 4 (Wednesday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 4 (Wednesday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 5 (Thursday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1100 (11:00AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1300 (1:00PM)

2-610 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Type 3 (Date) Answer Schedule Options

Type 3 (Date) Example

In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

 Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
 Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
 At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox
Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.

When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order:
 Range of Days
 Day of Week
 Date

Type 3 (Date) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 9

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 1225 (December 25, Christmas day)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-611

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-612 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-13 :VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables. The
Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is
associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an
Answer Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides
dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default SV8100 InMail system.
There are 32 Dial Action Tables.

DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)

InMail
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
Default
Automated Attendant Answering

Trunks Route to Answer Table 1

47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment

Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options

All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1

Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
47-12 Answer Schedules Default Mailbox active all other times
47-11-05 Default Mailbox

From a System Administrator mailbox,

Call Routing Mailbox 1
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options the active Call Routing Mailbox.

Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:

47-13 Dial Action Tables Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-613

 Issue 4.0

Dial Action Table Actions

 TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an
extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens)
the destination to see if the transfer can go through.
If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call
goes through.
If the destination does not answer during a preset interval, is busy, or is in Do Not Disturb, the
Automated Attendant does not extend the call. It then provides the caller with additional options.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this
action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions 301~399, for key 3
enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should be
that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter TRF for the Action
and 303 for the corresponding Number.
 UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an
extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party
immediately extends the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000
InMail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are
handled by the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this
action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to extensions 301~399, for key 3
enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.

2-614 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should
be that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter UTRF for the Action
and 303 for the corresponding Number.
 REC1 Action – Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension.
With this action, the caller hears the extension greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Options
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the corresponding
Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the
corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter
REC1 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
 REC2 Action – Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension.
With this action, the caller does not hear the extension greeting prior to leaving the message.
Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep.
Number Option
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the corresponding
Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the
corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter
REC2 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
 LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto Voice Mail. Depending on
programming (see Number Option below), the caller is logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or
is prompted to enter a Subscriber Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON
option with Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-615

 Issue 4.0

Number Option
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding
Number option.
For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for key 4 enter LOGON for
the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a Subscriber Mailbox to log
into, enter N in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit
in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers enter the number of the
Subscriber Mailbox where they want to log into, for key 3 enter LOGON for the Action and N for
the corresponding Number. When callers dial 3, they hear, Please enter your mailbox number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Subscriber Mailbox to log
into (without playing an announcement), enter XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key
you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to allow callers to log onto mailboxes 301~399, for key 3 enter LOGON for the
Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding Number option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox number to log on, for key 1
enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.
 Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, VM8000 InMail says
Goodbye and immediately hangs up.
Number Option
No entry is required in the corresponding Number Option.
 GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Call Routing and
Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for Sales, and then go to the Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.
Number Option
To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Number option.
For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 01, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action
and 01 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key you
choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox number.
For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 000~015, for key 0 enter GOTO for the Action
and XXX for the corresponding Number.

2-616 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding Number
option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox number
to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.
 UND Action – Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an Automated
Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, That is an invalid entry. The caller can then
dial another option.

Input Data
Dial Action Table Number 01~32

Key
Dial Action Table Action Additional Data
No.

1  TRF Action - Screened  Digits Entry : 0-9, #, and 

Transfer (1) (8 digits max.)
2 (TRF) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated
Attendant call to a specific location (such as an
3  UTRF Action - extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route
Unscreened Transfer (2) to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305
(UTRF) for the corresponding Number.
4
 REC1 Action - Quick  Caller Dialed Digits Entry : X
5 (Entered by pressing LK2)
Message With Greeting
(3) Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call
6 based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents
(REC1)
one caller-dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF
7  REC2 Action - Quick Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the
301‘399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX
Message Without for the corresponding Number.
8 Greeting (4)
(REC2)  Ignore Digits Entry : I
9 (Entered by pressing LK3)
 LOGON Action - Log Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the
0 Onto Voice Mail (5) Automated Attendant caller that SV8100 InMail ignores
(LOGON) for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned
 to the * key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action
 Hang Up Action (6) is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a
# (HNGUP) caller can dial * + any mailbox number to leave a Quick
Message in that mailbox. SV8100 InMail ignores the
TIMEOUT  GOTO Action - Go to first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes according to
Mailbox (7) the next 3 digits dialed.
(GOTO)
 No Routing Entry : N
 UND Action - Undefined (Entered by pressing LK1)
Routing (0) Use the N option when you want no Automated
(UND) Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be
used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt
the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the #
key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the
Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the
caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the mailbox
number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.”
 Pause Entry : P
(Entered by pressing LK4)
Use the P option when you want the Automated
Attendant to pause while dialing.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-617

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Defaults

Dial Action Table Default Settings

Key Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Tables 2~32

UTRF to XXX UND

1 (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed (Undefined)
extension)

UND UND
2 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UTRF to XXXX UND

3 (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed (Undefined)
extension)

UND UND
4 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
5 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
6 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
7 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
8 (Undefined) (Undefined)

HNGUP UND
9 (Hangup) (Undefined)

UTRF to 101 UND

0 (Unscreened Transfer to 101) (Undefined)

REC1 to IXXX UND

 (Quick Message with greeting to (Undefined)
user-dialed extension)

LOGON to IXXX UND

# (Logon to user-dialed mailbox) (Undefined)

UTRF to 101 UND

TIMEOUT (Unscreened Transfer to 101) (Undefined)

 TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-618 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox Options. This data
is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4 (Directory). For
VM8000 InMail remote CCIS extensions are not supported in a centralized directory.

Input Data
Master Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Minimum Number of Letters Required 1~3 1

02 Directory List Number to Use 1~8 1

03 Name Match 0 = First 0

1 = Last

04 Transfer Option 0 = TRF 0

1 = UTRF

05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 15

06 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0~99 5

07 Fax Detection 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

08 Next Call Routing Mailbox 0~32 0

09 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-619

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02 is set to 4
(Distribution). When creating a Distribution list, there can be no blank destinations within the list. The
system considers a blank entry as the end of the list so entries after the blank will not be used.

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Entry Number 00~19

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

Distribution Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined 0

Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox Number setting. 1 = Station Mailbox
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting Mailbox Number 2 = Group Mailbox
to 1~896
(PRG 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting Group Mailbox
01 (1~32)
(PRG 47-03).

Distribution Mailbox Number Up to three digits

 When creating a Distribution list there can (1~896)
be no blank destinations within the list. The system
considers a blank entry as the end of the list so
entries after the blank will not be used.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-620 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-18 :VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-18: VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SMTP e-mail notification.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 SMTP Enabled 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

02 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

03 SMTP Port 0~65535 25

04 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

05 Authentication 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
2 = POP3

06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting

08 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-621

 Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-19 :VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

02 POP3 Port 0~65535 110

03 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-622 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification to set the InMail Station Mailbox Message
Notification parameters.

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 1~896

Index Number 1~5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Notification 0 = Off 0
1 = On

02 Notification Begin Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

03 Notification End Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

04 Notification Type 0 = Undefined 1 (Voice)

1 = Voice
2 = Pager

05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting

06 Notification Busy Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 5

07 Notification RNA Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 5

08 Notification Security 0 = Off 1

1 = On

09 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Sunday
1 = Enabled

10 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Monday
1 = Enabled

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-623

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

11 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Tuesday
1 = Enabled

12 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Wednesday
1 = Enabled

13 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Thursday
1 = Enabled

14 Notification Day of Week Friday 0 = Disabled 1

1 = Enabled

15 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Saturday
1 = Enabled

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-624 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to set the InMail Station Mailbox Message
Find-Me Follow-Me parameters.

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 1~896

Index Number 1~3

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Find-Me Follow-Me 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

03 Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

04 Find-Me Follow-Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting

05 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Sunday
1 = Enabled

06 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Monday
1 = Enabled

07 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Tuesday
1 = Enabled

08 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Wednesday
1 = Enabled

09 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Thursday
1 = Enabled

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-625

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

10 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Friday
1 = Enabled

11 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Saturday
1 = Enabled

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-626 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-22 : Group Mailbox Notification Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-22 : Group Mailbox Notification Options to set the InMail Group Mailbox Message Notification
parameters.

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 1~32

Index Number 1~5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Notification 0 = Off 0
1 = On

02 Notification Begin Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

03 Notification End Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

04 Notification Type 0 = Undefined 1 (Voice)

1 = Voice
2 = Pager

05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting

06 Notification Busy Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 5

07 Notification RNA Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 5

08 Notification Security 0 = Off 1

1 = On

09 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Sunday
1 = Enabled

10 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Monday
1 = Enabled

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-627

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

11 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Tuesday
1 = Enabled

12 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Wednesday
1 = Enabled

13 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Thursday
1 = Enabled

14 Notification Day of Week Friday 0 = Disabled 1

1 = Enabled

15 Notification Day of Week 0 = Disabled 1

Saturday
1 = Enabled

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-628 Program 47 : InMail

Issue 4.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to set the InMail Group Mailbox Message
Find-Me Follow-Me parameters.

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 1~32

Index Number 1~3

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Find-Me Follow-Me 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

03 Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour 00~23 00

(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)

04 Find-Me Follow-Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting

05 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Sunday
1 = Enabled

06 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Monday
1 = Enabled

07 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Tuesday
1 = Enabled

08 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Wednesday
1 = Enabled

09 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Thursday
1 = Enabled

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-629

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

10 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Friday
1 = Enabled

11 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of 0 = Disabled 1

Week Saturday
1 = Enabled

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-630 Program 47 : InMail

 Program: 50
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling
Service
50-01 : CCIS System Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-01 : CCIS System Setting to set the availability of CCIS in the UNIVERGE SV9100.
No other CCIS settings function if this program is disabled.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CCIS Availability 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-631

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-02 : Connecting System Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-02 : Connecting System Settings to define the settings for each CCIS Route ID.

Input Data

CCIS Route ID Route ID 1~8: CCIS via DTI

Route ID 9: CCIS via IAD/GCD-PVAA (IP-CCIS)

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Port Number of Common Specify the Trunk port to send D-channel 0~400 0
Signaling Channel (T1) information. This program is available for using DTI
package.

02 Common Signaling Assign the baud rate of Common Signaling Channel 0 = 64Kbps 1
Channel Data Speed on DTI package.
Assignment (T1) 1 = 56Kbps
2 = 48Kbps(1)
3 = 48Kbps(2)

03 Originating Point Code Assign the Point Code of own side. 0~16367 0

04 Destination Point Code Assign the Point Code of destination side on the DTI 0~16367 0
(T1) link.

05 Calling Name Indication Calling name indication is not sent to destination 0 = Disable 1
(T1) party if switch is set to 0. 1 = Enable

06 CCH Package channel CCT Package Assignment 0~4 0

Number

2-632 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Conditions

 If 56K K-CCIS is used, 24 Multi-Frame (ESF) must be assigned in Program 10-03-02.

 DPC must be what the OPC is on the opposite side of the link.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-633

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings to assign information of remote systems in a
CCIS Network.

Input Data

CCIS System ID 1~255

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Destination Point Code Define the Point Code at the Destination Party. 0~16367 0

02 CCIS Route ID Select the CCIS Route ID defined in Program 0~8 0

(T1 only) 14-13 when the user tries to access the system (CCIS Route IDs 5~8
in a CCIS network. are for future use and
should not be used.)

03 IP Address Assign the IP Address to a CCIS System ID. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0.0.0.0

(IP only)
(xxx = 0~255)

04 Point Code Availability Define if the system associated with 0 = Disable 1

Destination Code can be Reached (1) or Not 1 = Enable
Reached (0). If set to 0, when using the IP-
CCIS, that system cannot be called until it is
set to 1.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-634 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment to define the Office Code when the CCIS
Network is constructed with an Open Numbering Plan.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CCIS Office Code xxxx (up to four digits) 0~9 No Setting

Conditions
This program is used only in an Open Numbering Plan network. This should include the Trunk Access Code
and Office Code number.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-635

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter to define the maximum hop
counter of call forwarding.

Item Input Data Default

Maximum Hop Counter 1~7 5

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-636 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability to define the availability of CCIS features.

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Link Reconnect 0 = Not available 1 If this data is set to 0, Link

1 = Available Reconnect does not work.

02 Centralized Day/Night Switching 0 = Disable 1 If this data is turned to 0, Day/

(for message receiver side) Night mode is not changed even
1 = Enable
if system receives Switching
message from center.

03 Adding Dial Digits in Front of Valid characters: No

CPN 0~9, #  Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-637

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office to define the Point Code and CCIS
Route ID for the Billing Center Office.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing

Center Office.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send

Billing Center Office.

03 Billing Message Format 0 = Normal Format 0

1 = Expand Format

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-638 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment to define the destination of
BLF for the sending system. Eight sending systems can be registered in this program.

Input Data

BLF Sending Group 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing

Center Office.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send

Billing Center Office.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-639

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment to define the
extension number for sending BLF messages. One extension number can have a sending switch for
each sending group, which is defined in Program 50-08.

Input Data
Entry 1~120

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Extension Number xxxxxxxx No Extension number. BLF message is indicated

(up to eight Setting when the status of the specified extension
digits) number is changed.

02 Send to Sending Group 1 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 1 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

03 Send to Sending Group 2 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 2 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

04 Send to Sending Group 3 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 3 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

05 Send to Sending Group 4 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 4 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

06 Send to Sending Group 5 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 5 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

07 Send to Sending Group 6 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 6 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

08 Send to Sending Group 7 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 7 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

09 Send to Sending Group 8 0 = Disable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to
1 = Enable Send Group 8 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX.

2-640 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-641

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment to define the time to send BLF
messages.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Type of Interval Time 0 = 4 seconds 0

Define the time to send BLF messages. 1 = 8 seconds
2 = 12 seconds
3 = 16 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-642 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment to define
Point Code and CCIS Route ID for sending Day/Night Switching message.

Input Data

Day/Night Mode Sending Group 1~16

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code for Day/Night
Switching.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send

Day/Night Switching messages. (T1
only)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-643

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment to define
corresponding night mode to switch to when Day/Night mode switching message arrives.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day Mode 1~8 1

02 Night Mode 1~8 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-644 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment to define the response
timeout value.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IAI Response Timer 0~99 30

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-645

 Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return to eliminate the 9 on Caller ID
redial except for 7- and 8-digit extensions.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller 0~24 (0 = Ignore setting) 0

ID Call Return

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-646 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

Issue 4.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

Service
50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting to set the basic parameters for CCIS
over IP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 TCP Server Port Number 0~65535 57000

03 TCP Client Base Port Number 0~65535 59000

04 Connection Method for Terminal 0 = Peer to Peer disable 1

Choose the connection method for the 1 = Peer to Peer enable
DT800/DT700

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-647

 Issue 4.0

2-648 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

 Program: 51
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting to define the parameters of the NetLink
feature.

❍ Each system must be set with its own information.

❍ When the NetLink System ID is changed (Item 01), the system must be reset.
IMPORTANT

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NetLink System ID 0~50 0

This is the ID of each NetLink system. Setting should insure (0 = No operation)
that no overlap occurs between nodes.

02 Primary Candidate Order 1~50 30

When the Primary system is turned off or disconnected from
network, this value is used to select a new Primary system.
Smaller number is higher priority.
If this value is the same number, the System ID (PRG51-01-01)
is referred, and the system which has the smaller number is
selected as Primary system.

03 Secondary System Flag 0 = Disable 0

0: NetLink is dynamically established based on Node List in 1 = Enable
PRG51-03-01.
Primary System is selected in the order which the system
wakes up.
1: The system connects with Top Priority Primary System.
If Top Priority Primary System was not found, the system
searches Primary System like this setting is 0.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-649

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Signal Transmit Method 0 = Immediate 1

0 = Immediate 1 = Buffering
This is the default setting which does not use Nagle Algorithm.
When this is enabled data packets are immediately sent across
the network with no buffering delay.
1 = Buffering
Nagle Algorithm enabled. This means that small data packets
will not be transmitted immediately across the network. The
smaller data packets will be buffered and then sent across as
larger data packets therefore decreasing the number of
packets sent across the network. When the number of packets
sent across the network decreases, the amount of bandwidth
also decreases.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-650 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-02 : NetLink System Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-02 : NetLink System Basic Setup to set system data for each NetLink system.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Name Up to 20 characters. blank

Enter the name given to each system.

02 Primary System Clock Hour Offset 0~24 12

Determine the time offset from the Primary system.
(0 = -12, 1 = -11, 2 = -10.... 12 = 0, 13 = +1, 14 = +2,
24 = +12)
This setting affects time display on MLT (see 51-13-02).

04 Authenticate System MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00~ 00-00-00-00-00-00

To use this function, set PRG 51-13-03 to 1 (enable), FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
NetLink systems reject the connection from
unauthenticated system access.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-651

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting to set the IP address of the
NetLink system.

Input Data

List ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internet Protocol Address List 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

The system seeks the Primary system based on this list. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail-Over occurs, 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Node List is referred to establish new link. This setting is
necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other
than 0.
Once the system connects to the Primary System, this setting
is updated by the Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is On.
So, enter IP address of the systems that may become Primary
at least.

Conditions

 When there is no Primary System yet, or Fail Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish new link.

 This setting is necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than 0. Once the system
connects to the Primary System, this setting is updated by the Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is
on. So, enter IP address of the systems that may become Primary at least.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-652 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink to set the IP
address of the new Primary System.

Input Data

List ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internet Protocol Address of Top Priority Primary 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
System. 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
To use this feature, set PRG 51-06-01 to 1.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-653

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings to set the various timers in the NetLink system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Keep Alive Sending Interval 1~3600 (sec) 5

Set the Keep Alive sending interval time from the Secondary
system to confirm communication with the Primary system.

02 Keep Alive Response Waiting Time 0, 5~3600 (sec) 20

Set the time the Secondary system waits for a response from
(0 = infinity)
the Primary system before cutting off communication.

03 Primary Search Packet Sending Interval 1~3600 (sec) 5

While searching the Primary system, the system sends a
packet at this interval.

04 Primary Search Time Maximum Value 5~10800 (sec) 20

Total Primary system seek time.

05 Top Priority Primary Detection Packet Sending Interval 1~3600 (sec) 10

When current Primary system is not Top Priority Primary
System, the system sends packet to check if Top Priority
System exists.

06 Primary Compulsion Specification Trial Maximum Time 1~10800 (sec) 30

When the forced change Primary command is executed, the
system searches the new Primary system for this time.

07 Socket Refresh Time 20~3600 (sec) 40

If the IP connection becomes unstable, the keep-alive function
does not work. If there is no data traffic for this time, the
socket is refreshed.

Conditions
None

2-654 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-655

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting to set the automatic integration
of the Primary system.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Primary Integration Right or Wrong 0 = Off 0

When LAN cable was divided, multiple Primary systems may 1 = On
appear. If the LAN connection is recovered, multiple Net-Links
exist in the network. When this option is enabling, NetLink is
composed around Top priority Primary System.

02 Package Reset Timing Option 0 = Reset when all 0

When Primary System Automatic Integration is done, all packages packages are idle.
of secondary systems reset. Select the timing of package reset. 1 = Anytime

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-656 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting to set compulsion
specification of the Primary system.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Forced Change Primary System Enabling 0 = Disable 0

Set whether or not the Forced Change Primary is available. 1 = Enable

02 Package Reset Timing Option 0 = On 0

When Forced Change Primary System is done, all packages 1 = Off
reset. Select the package reset timing.
0 = Reset when all packages are idle, otherwise reject
Primary System Integration.
1 = Anytime

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-657

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting to set the IP address and system ID of the compulsory
specification of the Primary system.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
IMPORTANT
Programming.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address of New Primary System 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Enter target IP address for New Primary system. When the 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Forced Change Primary system is done, this setting is 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
erased.

02 System ID of New Primary System 0~50 No

When set to 0, top priority Primary system is assumed to
setting
be the new Primary system.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-658 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings to set the various communication ports
used on the system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Primary Waiting Port 0~65535 58000

Set the communication port that the Primary system uses to
communicate with the Secondary system.

02 Communication Waiting Port 0~65535 58001

Select port used to communicate between nodes. It is always opened
by all nodes.

03 Secondary Communication Port 0~65535 0

Secondary system communicates with Primary system at this port
number. If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected.

04 Primary Search Port 0~65535 0

When Fail-Over occurs, each system communicates with other system
at this port number.
If 0 is set, temporary port is dynamically selected.
If 0 is not specified, the number and continuous maximum 50 number is
used.
(Ex. 5000 is specified 5001, 5002…5049 are used).

05 Primary Detection Port 0~65535 0

Enter port number to seek the Top Priority Primary system.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected.

06 Database Replication Communication Listening Port 0~65535 58002

Use this port to replicate database.

07 Database Replication Primary Detection Port Use 0~65535 0

Use this port to replicate database.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-659

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-660 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-10: Virtual Slot Setting to view the number of Virtual slots that are remaining in a
NetLink network. There can be up to 240 virtual slots available in NetLink.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Available Virtual Slots

240 slots can be controlled in NetLink. This command
can check how many slots are available.

Conditions

 This Program is Read Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-661

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-11 : NetLink System Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-11: NetLink System Information to reference information about other systems in the
NetLink network.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Name For reference only. blank

02 Connected State For reference only. 0

03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000

04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00

05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0

06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX

Conditions
This program is read only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-662 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-12 : Primary System Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-12: Primary System Information to reference information about the Primary System in
the NetLink network.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System ID For reference only. 0

02 System Name For reference only. blank

03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000

04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00

05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0

06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX

Conditions

 This Program is Read Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-663

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-13 : NetLink Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-13: NetLink Options to enable automatic IP address List Operation updates, time
zone information, and MAC address authorization.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Automatic IP Address List Operation Update 0 = Disable (Off) 1

When set to 1, the list in PRG51-03-01 is 1 = Enable (On)
automatically updated.

02 Time Zone Option 0 = Disable (Off) 0

When set to 0, the following features are affected: 1 = Enable (On)
Clock Display, Incoming/Outgoing History List.
When set to 1, the following features are affected:
VRS Time Announce, Date and Time Setting Service
Code, Alarm Clock setting, and Hotel mode wake-up
call.

03 MAC Address Authorization Enable 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Refers to PRG 51-02-04 for setting MAC address. 1 = Enable (On)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-664 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-14 : NetLink System Control
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-14: NetLink System Control to delete system and slot information.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
IMPORTANT
Programming.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Menu Number 1 = System information deletion

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delete System Information 1~50 1

Delete system information and the slot information. The system
must be disconnected.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-665

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-15 : Demonstration Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-15: Demonstration Setting to automatically set the minimum setting values in
NetLink. A system reset occurs after this command is executed.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
IMPORTANT
Programming.

Input Data

Menu Number 1 = Primary automatic setting

2 = Secondary 1 - automatic operation setting
3 = Secondary 2 - automatic operation setting
4 = Secondary 3 - automatic operation setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-666 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-16: NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting to set the system data
replication between the Primary and Secondary systems.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Data Replication Mode 0 = Disable 1

Set the synchronous mode of the system data. When 1 = Setting Time Mode
set to 1, the systems are synchronized at the time set in 2 = Interval Mode
Item 02 below.
When set to 2, the systems are synchronized at regular
time intervals set in Item 03 below.

02 System Data Replication Time Setting 0000~2359 0200

Set the time of day that both systems synchronize
database (when Item 01 is set to 1.)

03 System Data Replication Interval Setting 15~1440 (minutes) 30 (min)

Set the time interval that both systems synchronize
database (when Item 01 is set to 2).

Month: 0~12 –

Replication Time Stamp Day: 0~31 –

04
Show next replication time. (Read-Only) Hour: 00~23 –

Minute: 00~59 –

05 System Data Replication Wait Time 1~86400 (seconds) 180 sec

Set the wait time until replication starts when NetLink is
created.

06 System Data Replication Interval 0~86400 (seconds) 1 sec

Set the time to start replication to the next node after
replication to one node is completed.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-667

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-668 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-17 : NetLink DT80/DT700 Server Individual Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-17: NetLink DT800/DT700 Server Individual Information Setup to set the NetLink
port information.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Register Port 0 ~ 65535 5080

Use to set the SIP Register Port of each system.

02 Subscribe Session Port 0 ~ 65535 5081

Use to set the SIP Subscribe Session Port number of each
system when NetLink is used.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-669

 Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-18 : NetLink Configuration Options
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-18: NetLink Configuration Options to set the NetLink Fail-Over limits.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NetLink Fail-Over Limit 0, 2~10 0

When tear-down of network was repeated more than the specified
(0 = Infinity)
times, NetLink is operated standalone.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-670 Program 51 : NetLink Service

Issue 4.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-19 : NetLink IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 51-19: NetLink IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set CPN
transmission for each secondary system.

Input Data

Extensions 001 ~ 960

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NetLink CPN Transmission 0 = Disable 1

This program assigns transmission of Calling Party Number (CPN)
1 = Enable
from PRG 21-19 for each secondary system. The transmission
applies for every extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-671

 Issue 4.0

2-672 Program 51 : NetLink Service

 Program: 80
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is
defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.

Input Data

Service Tone Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Repeat Count 0~255 (0 = until On-Hook)

Unit Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data
No.

02 Basic Tone Number 1~33

(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time Slot)

03 Duration Count 1~255 (100~25500ms)

04 Gain Level (dB) 1~57 (-15.5 ~ +12.5)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-673

 Issue 4.0

Table 2-17 Basic Tones

Basic Tone Basic Tone

Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)
No. No.

01 400 - 13 17 520 / 650 -13 / -19

02 520 -13 18 650 / 780 -13 / -19
03 580 -13 19 780 / 1040 -13 / -19
04 660 -13 20 1040 -13
05 700 -13 21 450 -13
06 800 -13 22 950 -13
07 880 -13 23 1080 -13
08 1050 -13 24 400/450 -13/-13
09 350 / 440 -16 / -16 25 -- Reserve -- -
10 440 / 480 -16 / -16 26 -- Reserve -- -
11 480 / 620 -21 / -21 27 -- Reserve -- -
12 440 -16 28 -- Reserve -- -
13 -- Reserve -- - 29 -- Reserve -- -
14 520 / 650 -19 / -13 30 -- Reserve -- -
15 650 / 780 -19 / -13 31 -- Reserve -- -
16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13 32 -- Reserve -- -

2-674 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Default

Service Basic
Repeat Unit Gain Level
Tone Service Tone Tone Duration
Count Count (dB)
No. No.

1 No Tone 0 Basic 1 0 10 32 (0dB)

2 Internal Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB)

3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 Basic 6 0 2 32 (0dB)

9 1
0 1
9 1
0 1
9 77

4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 2 Basic 2 9 1 32 (0dB)

0 1 32 (0dB)

5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB)

6 Internal Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 5 20 (-6dB)

11 5 20 (-6dB)

7 DND Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 2 32 (0dB)

1 2 32 (0dB)

8 B-Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 5 20 (-6dB)

11 5 20 (-6dB)

9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 11 3 20 (-6dB)

0 2 20 (-6dB)

10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

1 1 32 (0dB)

11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 5 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

14 Intercom Ringback Tone 0 Basic 2 9 10 32 (0dB)

0 20 32 (0dB)

15 Override Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB)

16 Lock-out Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

17 Clock Alarm Tone 0 Basic 4 6 1 32 (0dB)

0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
0 7 32 (0dB)

18 BGM 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-675

 Issue 4.0

Service Basic
Repeat Unit Gain Level
Tone Service Tone Tone Duration
Count Count (dB)
No. No.

19 Door Box Chime 1 3 Basic 6 4 2 38 (+3dB)

4 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 38 (+3dB)
2 4 26 (-3dB)
2 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

20 Door Box Chime 2 3 Basic 6 7 2 38 (+3dB)

7 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 38 (+3dB)
5 4 26 (-3dB)
5 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

21 Door Box Chime 3 3 Basic 6 8 2 38 (+3dB)

8 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 38 (+3dB)
6 4 26 (-3dB)
6 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

22 Door Box Chime 4 3 Basic 6 4 1 38 (+3dB)

4 1 26 (-3dB)
2 2 38 (+3dB)
2 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

23 Door Box Chime 5 3 Basic 6 7 1 38 (+3dB)

7 1 26 (-3dB)
5 2 38 (+3dB)
5 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

24 Door Box Chime 6 3 Basic 6 8 1 38 (+3dB)

8 1 26 (-3dB)
6 2 38 (+3dB)
6 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

25 Service Set Tone 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)

26 Service Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)

27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

The originator hears this tone
6 1 32 (0dB)
when placing a handsfree
speaker ICM call.

29 Door Relay Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

2-676 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Service Basic
Repeat Unit Gain Level
Tone Service Tone Tone Duration
Count Count (dB)
No. No.

30 Door Box Call Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

31 Paging Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

32 Splash Tone 1 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

33 Splash Tone 2 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

34 Splash Tone 3 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

35 1-Second Signal Tone 1 Basic 1 6 10 32 (0dB)

36 External Audible Ring Tone 0 Basic 2 7 2 32 (0dB)

0 2 32 (0dB)

37 External Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 7 5 32 (0dB)

0 5 32 (0dB)

38 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 7 7 32 (0dB)

0 7 32 (0dB)

39 Special Audible Ring Busy 0 Basic 6 0 5 32 (0dB)

Tone 11 5 32 (0dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
11 5 32 (0dB)
10 10 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)

40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 Basic 1 12 2 32 (0dB)

41 Intrusion Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB)

42 Conference Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

43 Intrusion Tone 2 0 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB)

44 External Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 1 26 (-3dB)

45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 (0dB)

0 30 32 (0dB)

46 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 11 5 32 (0dB)

0 5 32 (0dB)

47 Number Unobtainable Tone 0 Basic 1 11 0 32 (0dB)

48 Voice Mail Message Indication 0 Basic 2 9 1 32 (0dB)

Tone 0 1 32 (0dB)

49 --- Not Used ---

50 External Special Audible Ring 0 3 10 10 32 (0dB)

Tone 12 2 32 (0dB)
0 30 32 (0dB)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-677

 Issue 4.0

Service Basic
Repeat Unit Gain Level
Tone Service Tone Tone Duration
Count Count (dB)
No. No.

51 External Intercept Tone 0 2 12 3 32 (0dB)

4 2 32 (0dB)

52 External Call Waiting Tone 1 1 12 3 32 (0dB)

53 External Executive Override 1 1 12 10 32 (0dB)

Tone

54 Progress Tone 0 2 0 6 32 (0dB)

1 1 32 (0dB)

55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 Basic 1 3 0 32 (0dB)

56 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB)

57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing 0 Basic 5 0 2 32 (0dB)

Tone 2 1 32 (0dB)
0 1 32 (0dB)
2 1 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)

58 Opening Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 2 2 32 (0dB)

2 2 26 (-3dB)
14 2 32 (0dB)
14 2 26 (-3dB)
15 2 32 (0dB)
15 2 26 (-3dB)
16 6 32 (0dB)
16 4 26 (-3dB)

59 Ending Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 20 2 32 (0dB)

20 2 26 (-3dB)
19 2 32 (0dB)
19 2 26 (-3dB)
18 2 32 (0dB)
18 2 26 (-3dB)
17 6 32 (0dB)
17 4 26 (-3dB)

60 Splash Tone 1 (Mute) 1 Basic 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)

6 1 8 (-12dB)

61 Splash Tone 2 (Mute) 2 Basic 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)

6 1 8 (-12dB)

62 Splash Tone 3 (Mute) 3 Basic 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)

6 1 8 (-12dB)

63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 (0dB)

0 30 32 (0dB)

64 0 4 11 2 35 (+1.5dB)

0 3 32 (0dB)
Special Hold Tone
11 2 35 (+1.5dB)

0 12 32 (0dB)

2-678 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Conditions
The system must be reset for any change to these items to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

 Selectable Ring Tones

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-679

 Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for DTMF
dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration and pause.
It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Duration 1~255 5 (100ms)

02 Pause 1~255 5 (100ms)

03 Tone Level (Low) (dB) 1~97 65 (-13dB)

-45
:
+3

04 Tone Level (High) (dB) 1~97 69 (-11dB)

-45
:
+3

Duration

Pause

2-680 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-681

 Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the DTMF
Tone Receiver.

DTMF Tone Receiver Type:

 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
 2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
 3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
 4, 5 = Reserved

Input Data

DTMF Tone Receiver Type No. 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
4 = --- Reserved ---
5 = --- Reserved ---

Item
Item Input Data
No

01 Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm

1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

02 Start Delay Time 0~255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms)

2-682 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data
No

03 Min. Detect Level 0~15

Detect Level 0 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
Detect Level 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
Detect Level 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
Detect Level 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
Detect Level 4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
Detect Level 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
Detect Level 6 : -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
Detect Level 7 : -45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
Detect Level 8 : -50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
Detect Level 9 : -55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
Detect Level 10 : -60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
Detect Level 11 : -65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
Detect Level 12 : -70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
Detect Level 13 : -75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)
Detect Level 14 : -80dBm(0) to -95dBm(15)
Detect Level 15 : -85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15)

04 Max. Detect Level 0~15

Detect Level 0 : 0dBm(0) to -15dBm(15)
Detect Level 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
Detect Level 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
Detect Level 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
Detect Level 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
Detect Level 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
Detect Level 6 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
Detect Level 7 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
Detect Level 8 : -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)
Detect Level 9 : -45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15)
Detect Level 10 : -50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15)
Detect Level 11 : -55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15)
Detect Level 12 : -60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15)
Detect Level 13 : -65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15)
Detect Level 14 : -70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15)
Detect Level 15 : -75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15)

05 Forward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)

06 Backward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)

07 ON Detect Time 1~255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)

08 OFF Detect Time 1-255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)

10 Sensitivity Level 0-1

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-683

 Issue 4.0

Default

Item
Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
No

01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0

02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 1

03 Min. detect level 10 (-20dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm)

04 Max. detect level 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm)

05 Forward twist level 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm)

06 Backward twist level 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm)

1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

(Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000)
07 ON detect time
3 (60ms) 3 (60ms) 3 (60ms) 3 (60ms) 3 (60ms)
(Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000
or higher) or higher) or higher) or higher) or higher)

1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

(Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000) (Version 1000)
08 OFF detect time
2 (45ms) 2 (45ms) 2 (45ms) 2 (45ms) 2 (45ms)
(Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000 (Version 3000
or higher) or higher) or higher) or higher) or higher)

10 Sensitivity Level 0 0 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-684 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for
the Call Progress Tone Detector.

Tone Detector Type:

 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
 4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
 5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk

Input Data

Tone Detector Type Number 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk

2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk

Item
Item Input Data
No

01 Detection Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm

1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-685

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data
No

02 Min. Detection Level 0~15

0 = -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
1 = -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
2 = -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
3 = -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
4 = -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
5 = -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
6 = -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)

03 S/N Ratio 0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB)

04 No Tone Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

(0 = not detect)
1~255 = 60~7680ms.
The formula is 30+30N.
When set to N=1, it means 30+30*1=60
When set to N=255, it means
30+30*255=7680

05 Pulse Count 1~255

06 ON Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms)

07 ON Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

08 OFF Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms)

09 OFF Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

12 Frequency No. 1 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)

13 Frequency No. 2 0~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)

2-686 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Default

Item Name Type 1 (DT) Type 2 (BT) Type 3 (RBT) Type 4 Type 5

1 Detect Level 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0

0 (Version 1000)
2 Min. detect level 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm)
1 (Version 3000
or higher)

3 S/N ratio 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 1 0

4 No tone time 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 0

5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 2 2

9 (300ms) 2 (Version 1000)

(Version 1000)
6 ON min. time 12 (390ms) 23 (720ms) 3 (120ms)
45 (1380 ms) 5 (180ms)
(Version 3000 or (Version 3000 or
higher) higher)

5 (Version 1000)
74
7 ON max. time 0 20 (630ms) 13 (420ms) 15 (480ms)
(2256ms)
(Version 3000 or
higher)

8 OFF min. time 1 (60ms) 12 (390ms) 59 (1800ms) 3 (120ms) 2

9 OFF max. time 1 (60ms) 20 (630ms) 232 (6990ms) 13 (420ms) 5

12 Frequency No. 1 1 3 2 3 1

13 Frequency No. 2 2 4 3 4 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-687

 Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out
the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Date Format 0 = American Format 0

(Month / Day / Year)
1 = Japanese Format
(Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format
(Day / Month / Year)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-688 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the
detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.

Input Data

Frequency
Input Data Default
Table No.

1 35 (350 Hz)

2 44 (440 Hz)

3 48 (480 Hz)

4 0, 10~255 62 (620 Hz)

(100~2550 Hz)
5 (0 = Not used) 110

6 0

7 0

8 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-689

 Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SV9100 multiline terminals.

Input Data

Short Ring Tone 1 = Confirmation

2 = Error
3 = Long conversation warning tone

Item
Item Description Default
No.

01 Frequency 1 Refer to Table 2-18 Frequency 1/2 Table 8 for Confirmation Tone
8 for Error Tone
4 for Long Conversation
Warning Tone

02 Frequency 2 Refer to Table 2-18 Frequency 1/2 Table 8 for Confirmation Tone
8 for Error Tone
4 for Long Conversation
Warning Tone

03 Ring Cycle Refer to Table 2-19 Ring Cycle Table 1 for Confirmation Tone
14 for Error Tone
14 for Long Conversation
Warning Tone

 When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.
NOTE

Table 2-18 Frequency 1/2 Table

Data Frequency (Hz) Data Frequency (Hz)

01 392 09 880
02 440 10 988

2-690 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Table 2-18 Frequency 1/2 Table (Continued)

Data Frequency (Hz) Data Frequency (Hz)

03 494 11 1046
04 523 12 1175
05 587 13 1318
06 659 14 1397
07 698 15 1568
08 784

Table 2-19 Ring Cycle Table

Data Ring Cycle (ms)

01 125(On)/Off
02 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
03 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
04 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
05 250(On)/Off
06 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
07 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
08 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
09 325(On)/Off
10 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off
11 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off
12 500(On)/Off
13 500(On)/500(Off)/500(On)/Off
14 1000(On)/Off

Short Ring Frequency Frequency

Short Tone Name Ring Cycle
No. 1 2

1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1

2 Error Tone 8 8 14

3 Alarm Tone for long 4 4 14

conversation call

4 Not defined 0 0 0

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-691

 Issue 4.0

: : : : :

32 Not defined 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-692 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-10 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-10 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to set various data for the DTMF signal detection.

Input Data

DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
3 = Reserved
4 = Reserved
5 = Reserved

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm

1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

02 Start delay time 0~255 (0.25step, 0ms~64ms)

03 Min. detect level 0~15

DTMF Tone 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
DTMF Tone4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)

04 Max. detect level 0~15

DTMF Tone 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 6 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)

05 Twist level 0~9 (1dB~10dB)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-693

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data
No.

06 S/N ratio 0~4 (-5step, 0dB~ -20dB)

07 ON detect time 1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms)

08 OFF detect time 1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms)

Table 2-20 Default Table

Item Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5

01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0
02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0
03 Min. detect level 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm)
04 Max. detect level 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm)
05 twist level 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm)
06 S/N ratio 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm)
07 ON detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)
08 OFF detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-694 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-13 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup - 2
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-13 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup - 2 to set further data for the DTMF signal detection.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Dialed 0 ~ 15[-7dB (1) - 0dB (8) - +7dB (15)] 0dB (8)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-695

 Issue 4.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-14 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup - 3
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 80-14 : MF Tone Receiver Setup -3 to set further data for the DTMF signal detection.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Dialed 0 ~ 13 [-6dB (1) - 0dB (7) - +6dB (13)] 0dB (7)

02 Detect Type 0 = Type 1 (Normal) 0

1 = Type 2 (Improvement of DTMF mis-
detection)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-696 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

 Program: 81
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the COT
(CO blade) Unit.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PCM Encoding Method 0 = -law 0

Specification 1 = A-law

02 Loop Current Detection Time 1~255 75

(8~2040ms) (600ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) 1~255 38

Detection Time (8~2040ms) (304ms)
This is the loop start trunk disconnect
recognition timer.

04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum 1~255 13

Time (8~2040ms) (104ms)

05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum 0~255 82

Time (0,8~2040ms) (656ms)

06 Double Ringing Detection 0~255 13

Minimum Off Time (0,8~2040ms) (104ms)

07 Double Ringing Detection 0~255 50

Maximum Off Time (0,8~2040ms) (400ms)

08 Ringing Signal not Detection 1~255 88

Minimum (8~2040ms) (704ms)

09 Time Ringing Signal Stop 1~255 94

Detection Time (64~16320ms) (6016ms)

10 Continuous Ringing Minimum 0~255 38

Time (0,8~2040ms) (304ms)

11 Continuous Ringing Maximum 0-255 88

Time (0,8~2040ms) (704ms)

12 Caller ID Detection Time 0~255 0

(0~16320ms) (0ms)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-697

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

13 Grounding Time 1~255 9

(16~4080ms) (144ms)

14 Hook Flash 1 Time 1~255 50

(16~4080ms) (800ms)

15 Hook Flash 2 Time 1~255 156

(16~4080ms) (2496ms)

16 Pause Time 1~255 16

(64~16320ms) (1024ms)

17 PFT Idle Detection Time 1~255 47

(64~16320ms) (3008ms)

18 Grounding Start Time 1~255 6

(8~2040ms) (48ms)

19 Grounding Start Give Up Time 1~255 47

(64~16320ms) (3008ms)

20 Loop Reverse Detect Minimum 1~255 13

Time (8~2040ms) (104ms)

21 Loop Reverse Detect Maximum 1~255 107

Time (8~2040ms) (856ms)

22 Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum 1~255 50

Time (8~2040ms) (400ms)
When using dial pulse trunks this
timer is used to set the minimum
value for the system to detect the
disconnect pulse.

23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum 1~255 80

Time (8~2040ms) (640ms)
When using dial pulse trunks this
timer is used to set the maximum
value for the system to detect the
disconnect pulse.

24 On Hook Normal Detect Time 1~255 2

(8~2040ms) (24ms)

25 On Hook Reverse Detect Time 1~255 2

(8~2040ms) (16ms)

26 On Hook Disconnect Detect Time 1~255 188

(16~4080ms) (3008ms)

27 Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps) 1~255 8

(8~2040ms) (64ms)

28 Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps) 1~255 5

(8~2040ms) (40ms)

29 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 25

(32~8160ms) (800ms)

2-698 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

30 Dial Pulse Break Time (20pps) 1~255 4

(8~2040ms) (32ms)

31 Dial Pulse Make Time (20pps) 1~255 2

(8~2040ms) (16ms)

32 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(32~8160ms) (512ms)

33 Charging Pulse Minimum Duration 1~255 9

34 Charging Pulse Minimum Period 1~255 29

Time

35 Charging Pulse Minimum Interval 1~255 6

36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum 1~255 150

Time (16~4080ms) (2400ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-699

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the DID Unit.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 PCM Method Type 0 = -law 0

1= A-law

02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 6

(10~2550ms) (60ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 10

(10~2550ms) (100ms)

05 Hook Flash Time 1~255 25

(8~2040ms) (200ms)

06 Pause Time 1~255 94

(32~8160ms) (3008ms)

07 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 20

(10~2550ms) (200ms)

08 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 3

(100~25500ms) (300ms)

09 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 48

(100~25500ms) (4800ms)

10 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 13

(10~2550ms) (130ms)

11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 31

(10~2550ms) (310ms)

12 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

13 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

2-700 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

15 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

16 Receive DP Inter-Digit Time 1~255 6

(32~8160ms) (192ms)

17 Loop Off Guard Time 0~25 20

(0,100~25500ms) (2000ms)

18 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 16

(4~1020ms) (64ms)

19 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 8

(4~1020ms) (32ms)

20 DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps) 1~255 38

(16~4080ms) (608ms)

21 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 8

(4~1020ms) (32ms)

22 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 4

(4~1020ms) (16ms)

23 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) 1~255 29

(16~4080ms) (464ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-701

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-03 : TLI Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-03 : TLI Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the E&M Tie Line Unit.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 PCM Method Type 0 = -law 0

1= A-law

02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 6

(10~2550ms) (60ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 10

(10~2550ms) (100ms)

05 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

06 Hook Flash Time 1~255 20

(10~2040ms) (200ms)

07 Pause Time 1~255 50

(60~15300ms) (3000ms)

08 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 20

(10~2550ms) (200ms)

09 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 3

(100~25500ms) (300ms)

10 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 48

(100~25500ms) (4800ms)

11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 13

(10~2550ms) (130ms)

12 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 31

(10~2550ms) (310ms)

13 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

2-702 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

15 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

16 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

17 Pause Time after WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 13

(8~2040ms) (104ms)

18 Loop Off Guard Time 0~255 20

(0,100~25500ms) (2000ms)

19 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 32

(2~512ms) (64ms)

20 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 16

(2~512ms) (32ms)

21 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 19

(32~8160ms) (608ms)

22 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(2~510ms) (32ms)

23 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 8

(2~510ms) (16ms)

24 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(32~8160ms) (512ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-703

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for
layer 1 of ISDN BRI.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Wait time for Physical Activation 1~255 100

(Timer 3) (20sec)
(200~5100ms)

02 Detection time for Physical 1~255 5

Deactivation (1sec)
(200~5100ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-704 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic
data for layer 2 of ISDN BRI and PRI.

Input Data

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Timer T200 Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a 1~255 10 (1sec)

second at the end of which transmission of (100~25500ms)
a frame may be initiated.

02 Timer T201 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a 1~255 10 (1sec)

second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
(100~25500ms)

03 Timer T202 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a 1~255 20 (2sec)

second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
(100~25500ms)

04 Timer T203 Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a 1~255 250 (25sec)
second allowed without exchanging
frames. (100~25500ms)

05 N200 Specify the retransmission count. 1~255 3

06 N201 Specify the frame lengths in ocelots. 1~65535 (Byte) 260

07 N202 Specify the maximum number of 1~255 3

transmissions from a TEI identity request
message when the user requests a TEI.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-705

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers
for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).

Input Data

Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1~5

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 T301 Specify the timer value started when 0,180~254 (sec) 180
the ALERT message is received.

02 T302 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 15

the SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also
restarted when INFO is received.

03 T303 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

SETUP is sent.

04 T304 Specify the timer value started when 0~254 (sec). 30

the SETUP ACK is received. Timer is
also restarted when INFO is received.

05 T305 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 30

DISC without progress No. 8 is sent.

06 T306 Specify the timer value started when 0~254 (sec) 30

DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is
sent. This timer is valid for Network
side use only.

07 T307 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 180
SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is
valid for Network side use only.

08 T308 Specifies the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

REL is sent.

09 T309 Specify the timer value started at data 1-254 (sec) 90

link disconnection.

10 T310 Specify the timer value started when 0~180 (sec) 180
CALL PROC is sent.

2-706 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

11 T312 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 6

SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast
data link. This timer is valid only for
Network side use only.

12 T313 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

connection request is sent. Valid range
1 ~ 4 seconds in 1 second increments.
Value of 0 indicates timer not used.

13 T314 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

message segment is received.

14 T316 Specify the timer value started when (T317+1)~254 (sec) 120
RESTART is sent.

15 T317 Specify the timer value started when 1~(T316-1) 60

RESTART is received.

16 T318 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

RES is sent. This timer is valid for user
side use only.

17 T319 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 4

SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid
for user side use only.

18 T320 Specify the timer value when 1~254 (sec) 30

B-channel access: connection is
received, or D-channel access:
DL-ESTABLISH confirmation or
indication is received.

19 T321 Specify the timer value started when 1~254 (sec) 30

STATUS ENQ is received.

20 T322 Specify the timer value upon 1~254 (sec) 4

D-channel failure.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 ISDN Compatibility

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-707

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC)
Filter for each analog trunk port.

Input Data

Trunk Number 1~400

CODEC Filter Type Default

0 = No filter
1 = Type 1: 600 Line loss 0dB (~500m from CO Ex)
2 = Type 2: 600 Line loss 4dB (1~2km from CO Ex) 2
3 = Type 3: 600 Line loss 8dB (~3km from CO Ex)
4 = Type 4: Enable PRG81-17 setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-708 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(Loop) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

02 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(Ground) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

03 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(DID) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

04 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(E&M) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

05 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(OPX) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

06 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(Loop) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

07 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(Ground) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

08 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(DID) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

09 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(E&M) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

10 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(OPX) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

11 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(Loop) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

12 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(Ground) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

13 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(DID) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-709

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(E&M) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

15 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(OPX) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

16 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (Loop) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5000ms

17 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (Ground) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5000ms

18 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (DID) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5000ms

19 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (E&M) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5000ms

20 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (OPX) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5000ms

21 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(Loop) (4ms ~ 1000ms) 160ms

22 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(Ground) (4ms ~ 1000ms) 160ms

23 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(DID) (4ms ~ 1000ms) 160ms

24 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(E&M) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

25 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(OPX) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

26 DP Break Send Time (ALL) 1~250 15

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 60ms

27 DP Make Send Time (ALL) 1~250 10

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 40ms

28 DP Inter-Digit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 7

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 700ms

29 HookFlash Send Time (Loop) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 500ms

30 HookFlash Send Time (Ground) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

31 HookFlash Send Time (DID) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

32 HookFlash Send Time (E&M) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

2-710 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

33 HookFlash Send Time (OPX) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

34 Pause Send Time (ALL) 1~255 3

(1sec ~ 255sec ) 3sec

35 Wink Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

36 Delay Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

37 Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID) 1~255 3

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 300ms

38 Wink Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

39 Delay Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

40 Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M) 1~255 3

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 300ms

41 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 48

Max. Time (DID) 4800ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

42 Receive Wink Duration Min. 1~250 12

Time (DID) 96ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

43 Receive Wink Duration Max. 1~250 45

Time (DID) 360ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

44 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 48

Max. Time (E&M) 4800ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

45 Receive Wink Duration Min. 1~250 12

Time (E&M) 96ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

46 Receive Wink Duration Max. 1~250 45

Time (E&M) 360ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

47 Receive DP Make Min. Time 1~250 3

(ALL) 12ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

48 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1~250 19

(ALL) 76ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

49 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1~250 3

(ALL) 12ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

50 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1~250 25

ALL) 100ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

51 Receive DP Inter-Digit Min. Time 1~250 125

(ALL) 500ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-711

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

52 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 3

Min. Time (E&M) 300ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

53 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 6

Max. Time (E&M) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

54 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 3

Min. Time (OPX) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 300ms

55 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 6

Max. Time (OPX) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

56 Loop Off Guard Time (Loop) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

57 Loop Off Guard Time (Ground) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

58 Loop Off Guard Time (DID) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

59 Loop Off Guard Time (E&M) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

60 Loop Off Guard Time (OPX) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 1~255 5

(OPX) (100ms ~ 25500ms) 500ms

62 Double Between Ringing Send 1~255 5

Time 1 (OPX) 500ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 1~255 25

(OPX) 2500ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

64 Double Between Ringing Send 1~255 30

Time 2 (OPX) 3000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

65 Single Ringing Send Time (OPX) 1~255 10

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 1000ms

66 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1~255 9

(ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

67 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1~255 9

(ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

68 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1~255 9

ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

69 Single Between Ringing Send 1~255 9

Time (OPX) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

70 Guard Time 1 (Loop) 1~255 9

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 900ms

2-712 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

71 Guard Time 1 (Ground) 1~255 9

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 900ms

72 Guard Time 1 (DID) 1~250 3

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 12ms

73 Guard Time 1 (E&M) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

74 Guard Time 1 (OPX) 1~255 40

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 4000ms

75 Guard Time 2 (ALL) 1~250 6

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 24ms

76 Dial Sending Complete Time 1~255 6

(ALL) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

77 ON-HOOK bit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

78 Open Loop Time (Loop) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

79 Open Loop Time (Ground) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

80 Open Loop Time (DID) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

81 Open Loop Time (E&M) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

82 Open Loop Time (OPX) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-713

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when
Program 81-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 42

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 90

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 162

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 42

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 18

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 178

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 220

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 55

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 163

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 42

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 51

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 36

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 210

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 64

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 52

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 176

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 0

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 34

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 172

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 178

2-714 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 164

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 202

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 181

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 170

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 78

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 51

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 78

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 171

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 162

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 182

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 179

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 208

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 227

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 171

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 169

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 60

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 37

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 179

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 162

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 179

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 43

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 167

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 180

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 202

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 48

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 170

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-715

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 45

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 170

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 164

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 74

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 159

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 61

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 79

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 171

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 65

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 194

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 224

Conditions
This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-716 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the CODEC filter data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 178

02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 90

03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 162

04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 186

05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 27

06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 50

07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 42

08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 45

09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 51

10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 173

11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 52

12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 179

13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 77

14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 48

15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 186

16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 160

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 64

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 58

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 174

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 58

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-717

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 135

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 162

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 55

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 90

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 151

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 207

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 115

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 207

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 151

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 29

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 171

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 187

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 42

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 162

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 183

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 50

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 162

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 35

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 59

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 66

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 164

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

2-718 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144

Conditions

 This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4.

 This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-719

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the TLIU (2W) CODEC
(QSLAC) Filter Data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 195

02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 87

03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 162

04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 51

05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 34

06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 162

07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 171

08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 50

09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 179

10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 90

11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 50

12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 163

13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 42

14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 48

15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 36

16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 176

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 64

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 165

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 173

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 43

2-720 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 213

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 170

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 54

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 34

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 190

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 166

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 47

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 50

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 181

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 50

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 208

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 159

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 178

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 169

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 43

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 164

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 171

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 35

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 76

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 59

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 42

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 180

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-721

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144

Conditions

 This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4.

 This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-722 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the TLIU (2W) CODEC
(QSLAC) Filter Data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 9

02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 0

03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 144

04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 9

05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 0

06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 144

07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 9

08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 0

09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 144

10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 9

11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 0

12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 144

13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 9

14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 0

15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 1

16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 144

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 0

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-723

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 1

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 144

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

2-724 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144

Conditions

 This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4.

 This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-725

 Issue 4.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup to define the CODEC filter option data type.

Input Data

1:COIU/082U(COIDB)/002U(COIDB)
2:DIOPU(LD Trunk)
Line Type
3:TLIU(2W)
4:TLIU(4W)

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Option Type 0 = None 0

1 = Type 5: 600Ω Line loss 2dB
2 = Type 6: China standard (200Ω+(100nF//680Ω))
3 = Type7: China seimence tel (160Ω+(150nF//1100Ω))
4 = Type 8: Brazil 900Ω
5 = Type 9: 600Ω Line loss 10dB
6 = Type 10: Reserved
7 = Type 11: Reserved
8 = Type 12: Reserved
9 = Type 13: Reserved
10 = Type 14: Reserved
11 = Type 15: for test

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-726 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

 Program: 82
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user hears
when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1~4), also called
patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program
22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each Range there are three frequency Types: High,
Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type
in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone.
These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 (see below). In
this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for each of the four
Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range.

Input Data

Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)

2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern
7 = Pattern 5 (Trunk Incoming)
8 = Pattern 6 (Trunk Incoming)
9 = Pattern 7 (Trunk Incoming)
10 = Pattern 8 (Trunk Incoming)

Ringing Tone Type Number 1 = High

2 = Mid
3 = Low

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Frequency 1 1 = 520Hz
2 = 540Hz
02 Frequency 2 3 = 660Hz
4 = 760Hz
5 = 1100Hz
6 = 1400Hz
7 = 2000Hz

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-727

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data
No.

03 Modulation 0 = No Modulation
1 = 8Hz Modulation
2 = 16Hz Modulation
3 = Envelope

Default

Incoming Ringing Tone Tone Frequency 1 Frequency 2

Modulation
Number Type (Hz) (Hz)

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 16Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 3 High 2000 760 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 660 16Hz Modulation
Low 1100 540 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 660 8Hz Modulation
Low 1100 540 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 5 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

Intercom Incoming Pattern Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 6 High 760 760 No Modulation

Alarm Sensor Pattern Mid 760 760 No Modulation
Low 760 760 No Modulation

Pattern 7 High 1400 540 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 760 540 16Hz Modulation
Low 660 540 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 8 High 1400 540 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 760 540 8Hz Modulation
Low 660 540 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 9 High 2000 1100 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 2000 540 16Hz Modulation
Low 1100 760 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 10 High 2000 1100 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 2000 540 8Hz Modulation
Low 1100 760 8Hz Modulation

Conditions
None

2-728 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns

 Selectable Ring Tones

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-729

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for special functions on
a DSS console.

Input Data

Item Input
Item Default
No. Data

01 Log In 0~7 1

02 Log Out 0~7 4

03 Emergency Call 0~7 3

LED Pattern 0 : [OFF]

On
Off

LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

2-730 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 7 : [ON]

On
Off

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-731

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the LCA.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Companding Method Type 0 = -law 0

1 = A-law

02 Ringing Frequency 0 = 25Hz 1 (20Hz)

1 = 20Hz
2 = 16Hz

03 Minimum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms)

04 Maximum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20(100ms)

05 Minimum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms)

06 Maximum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20 (100ms)

07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 200 (1000ms)

09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

10 Minimum Off-Hook Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

11 No Detection Time after Off-Hook 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 60 (300ms)

12 No Detection Time after Pulse Dial 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 70 (350ms)

Detection

13 Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal 1~255 (10ms~2550ms) 60 (600ms)

Time

14 Ring, Message Wait Period Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 150 (750ms)

2-732 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-733

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-05 : ISDN BRI Layer 2 Initial Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-05 : ISDN BRI Layer 2 Initial Setup to set the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN/
PRI S-Point

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 T200 1 ~ 255 10

02 T201 1 ~ 255 10

03 T202 1 ~ 255 20

04 T203 1 ~ 255 30

05 N200 1 ~ 255 3

06 N201 1 ~ 65535 260

07 N202 1 ~ 255 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-734 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-06 : ISDN BRI Layer 3 Timer Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-06 : ISDN BRI Layer 3 Timer Setup to set the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN
BRI/PRI S-Point.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 T301 0, 180 ~ 254 180

02 T302 1 ~ 254 10

03 T303 1 ~ 254 4

04 T304 0 ~ 255 20

05 T305 1 ~ 254 30

06 T306 0 ~ 254 30

07 T307 1 ~ 254 180

08 T308 1 ~ 254 4

09 T309 1 ~ 254 90

10 T310 0 ~ 180 30

11 T312 1 ~ 254 6

12 T313 1 ~ 254 4

13 T314 1 ~ 254 4

14 T316 2 ~ 254 120

15 T317 1 ~ 254 60

16 T318 1 ~ 254 4

17 T319 1 ~ 254 4

18 T320 1 ~ 254 30

19 T321 1 ~ 254 30

20 T322 1 ~ 254 4

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-735

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-736 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the CODEC
(QSLAC) filter of each analog port.

Input Data

Station Port 1~ 960

Number

CODEC Filter Type Default

0 = No filter
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2 3
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Direct Station Selection (DSS)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-737

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
Level:
MF

Description

Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume.

There are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.

Input Data

Digital
Item Analog
Description Input Sidetone
No. Sidetone Level
Level

0 -54 (dB) -54 (dB)

1 -48 (dB) -54 (dB)

2 -42 (dB) -54 (dB)

3 -36 (dB) -48 (dB)

4 -30 (dB) -42 (dB)

01 Sidetone Volume
5 -24 (dB) -36 (dB)

6 -18 (dB) -30 (dB)

(default)

7 -12 (dB) -24 (dB)

8 -12 (dB) -18 (dB)

9 -12 (dB) -12 (dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Central Office Calls, Answering

 Central Office Calls, Placing

2-738 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program
82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 58

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 242

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 191

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 44

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 90

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 165

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 168

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 159

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 185

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 246

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 159

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 201

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 221

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 21

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 163

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 201

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 36

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-739

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 163

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 59

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 194

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 196

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 195

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 43

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 38

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 193

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 188

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 37

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 64

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 83

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171

2-740 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 135

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 35

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 52

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 71

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 172

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 43

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 197

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 66

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 97

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 162

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 176

Conditions
This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-741

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone to set the sending and receiving
gain of the Multiline telephone handset.

Input Data

Extension 1~960

Input Data

Item
Item Description Input Default
No.

01 Handset Transmit The handset gain level is set for 1~32 (-3.5dB, .., +58.5dB) 2dB 0
Gain Level sending (transmit). basis
0 = Fixed Value (+12.5db)

02 Headset Receive Gain The headset gain level is set for 1~32 (-3.5dB, ..., +58.5dB) 2dB 0
Level receiving (hearing). basis
0 = Fixed Value (0db)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-742 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the filter data setup
information (when Program 82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 202

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 125

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 164

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 34

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 71

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 69

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 169

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 135

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 248

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 254

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 143

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 168

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 46

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 50

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 170

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 42

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 106

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-743

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 35

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 69

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 162

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 210

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 165

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 202

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 187

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 52

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 163

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 177

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 51

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 208

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144

2-744 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-745

 Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the filter data setup information
(when Program 82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 58

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 242

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 191

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 44

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 90

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 165

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 168

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 159

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 185

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 246

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 159

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 201

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 221

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 21

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 163

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 201

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 36

2-746 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 163

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 59

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 194

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 196

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 195

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 43

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 38

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 193

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 188

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 37

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 64

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 83

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-747

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Name Input Data Default

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 135

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 35

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 52

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 71

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 172

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 43

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 197

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 66

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 97

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 162

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 176

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-748 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

Issue 4.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup to define the CODEC filter option data type.

Input Data

Line Type 1 = SLIU

2 = OPX
3 = SLI

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Option Type 0 = None 0

1 = Type 5
2 = Type 6
3 = Type 7
4 = Type 8
5 = Type 9
6 = Type 10
7 = Type 11
8 = Type 12
9 = Type 13
10 = Type 14
11 = Type 15

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-749

 Issue 4.0

2-750 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

 Program: 84
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic information of the H.323
Trunk.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Number of G.711 audio frames 1~4 3

03 G.711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

05 Number of G.729 audio frames 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

06 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

07 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

08 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

15 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

Self adjusting silent period is not valid by IPLE. If this 3 = Self adjusting
value is set, the system will operate as Setting 3.

16 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-751

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

22 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~ +10dB and self 20

adjustment)
0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dBm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dB (-21dBm)
30 = 10dB (-20dBm)

33 Priority CODEC setting 0~3 0

Priority of voice encoding method. 0 = G.711
2 = G.729
3 = G.722

63 Number of G.722 audio frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

65 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

66 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

67 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

68 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this Program 1 = Enable
checks the sending side address from received RTP
packet at VoIPDB.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-752 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information
of H.225 and H.245.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 H.225 0~255sec 180

02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0~255sec 9

03 H.225 Setup Timer 0~255sec 4

04 H.225 Info Ack. Timer 0~255sec 9

05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0~255sec 10

07 H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0~255sec 5

08 H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count 0~255sec 3

09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0~255sec 5

10 H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer 0~255sec 50

11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0~255sec 50

12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0~255sec 50

13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0~255sec 50

14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0~255sec 50

15 RAS GRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

16 GRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

17 RAS RRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

18 RRQ Retry Count 0~255 3

19 RAS URQ Timer 0~255sec 3

20 URQ Retry Count 0~255 1

21 RAS ARQ Timer 0~255sec 5

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-753

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

22 ARQ Retry Count 0~255 2

23 RAS BRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

24 BRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

25 RAS IRR Timer 0~255sec 5

26 IRR Retry Count 0~255 2

27 RAS DRQ Timer 0~255sec 8

28 DRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

29 RAS LRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

30 LRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

31 RAS RAI Timer 0~255sec 3

32 RAI Retry Count 0~255 2

33 Call Signaling Port Number 0~65535: 1730

0~1719,
1721~65535

35 Fast Start Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0~65535 20001

37 Terminal Type setting 0~255 60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-754 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-06 : PVA Data Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-06 : PVA Data Setting to set up threshold levels of every CD-PVAA slot.

Input Data

Slot Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 RTP Port Number 0~65534 10020

02 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021 It has to be RTP Port Number + 1.

04 Fract Lost Threshold 0~100% 0 The data is sent to the GCD-CP10 if the
value exceeds the defined value.

05 Packets Lost Threshold 0~16777215 0 The data is sent to the GCD-CP10 if the
value exceeds the defined value.

07 Jitter Threshold 0~4294967295 (sec) 0 The data is sent to the GCD-CP10 if the
value exceeds the defined value.

09 Delay LSR Threshold 0~4294967295 (sec) 0 The data is sent to the GCD-CP10 if the
value exceeds the defined value.

16 IMCP Redirect 0=No 0 The VOIP blade supports sending the

1=Yes Internet Message Control Protocol
(IMCP) redirect message.

Conditions
System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-755

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central Firmware
Download for IP phones.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Mode 0 = TFTP 0

1 = FTP

02 File Server IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.1.1~223.255.254.254

03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters None

04 Password Up to 20 Characters None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-756 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data for Ethernet interface ports.

Input Data

Ethernet Interface 1 = CPU

2 = IPLA

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VLAN 0 = Disable (Off) 0

1 = Enable (On)

02 VLAN ID 1~4094 0

03 Priority 0~7 0

Conditions
System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-757

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-10 : ToS Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.

Input Data

1 = Not Used
2 = Not Used
3 = Voice Control
4 = H.323
5 = RTP/RTCP
Protocol Type 6 = SIP
7 = CCISoIP
8 = DT700 MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = NetLink
11 = Video RTP/RTCP

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 ToS Mode 0 = Disable (Invalid) 0 When Input Data is set to 1, Item No.
1 = IP Precedence 07 is invalid. When Data is set to 2,
2 = Diffserv Item No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid.

02 Priority, IP Precedence 0~7 0 1 = Router queuing priority

0 = Low
7 = High

03 Low Delay 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for low delay routing

0 = Normal Delay, Low
Delay

04 Wideband (Throughout) 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for high bandwidth

0 = Normal Throughput routing
1 = High Throughput

05 High Reliability 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for reliability routing

0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability

07 Priority D.S.C.P. (Differentiated 0~63 0 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code

Services Code Point) Point)

2-758 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Conditions
The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-759

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP packet)
encoding parameters.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 3

(10ms steps)

02 G.711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 3

08 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjusting

18 VAD Threshold 0~30 = -19dB~+10dB 20

0 = Adaptec Threshold
1 = -19dB(-49dBm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dBm(-21dBm)
30 = 10dBm(-20dBm)

2-760 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

28 Audio Capability Priority 0 = G.711_PT 0

2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

38 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass 1 = Enable
connection, this Program checks
the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-761

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC options
for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 2

(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)

02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 2

(1 = 10ms, 6 = 60ms)

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjusting

2-762 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

18 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~+10dB) 20

0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dBm)
:
2 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dBm (-21dBm)
30 = 10dBm (-20dBm)

28 Audio Capability Priority 0 = G.711_PT 0

2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726_PT
6 = G.711_Fix
7 = G.729_Fix

33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 3

(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)

39 G.726 VAD Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

49 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass 1 = Enable
connection, this Program checks
the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-763

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

65 VAD Negotiation on SDP 0 = Disable 0

Select whether or not system uses 1 = Enable
SIP negotiation for VAD usage.
When set to '0 = Disable' system
disregards SIP negotiation result
and always enables the VAD. When
set to'1 = Enable' system uses SIP
negotiation and decides VDA usage
according to the result.

66 Voice Band Data Mode (VBD) 0 = Disable 0

Enable or Disable the VBD feature. 1 = Enable
This program has to set '1 = Enable'
when PRG15-03-03 is set '1 =
Special' and also PRG15-03-18 is '1
= Modem'
Related: PRG 15-03-03,
PRG 15-03-18

67 VBD Payload 96~127 97

Setup the Payload Type number
when using VBD.

70 Video Quality Mode 0 = Mode 1 0

This program is not supported for 1 = Mode 2
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program specifies the SIP
trunk video quality mode.
Use this program in conjunction with
84-27-20 for Mode 1 and 84-27-21
for Mode 2 video quality settings.
Mode 1 = CIF (352x288)
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)

71 Video CODEC 0 = H.264 0

This program is not supported for
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program specifies the video
CODEC. At this time only H.264 is
supported.

2-764 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

72 Jitter Buffer Mode for Video 1 = Static 2

This program is not supported for 2 = Self Adjusting
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program sets the jitter buffer
size adjustment. At default this is
set to self adjusting and should only
be changed when directed by
support.

73 Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 70ms

This program is not supported for
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program sets the minimum
value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
This value must be smaller than the
value of the maximum jitter buffer.
This value should only be changed
for if needed for highly congested
networks.

74 Initial Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 140ms

This program is not supported for
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program sets the initial value of
jitter buffer for the video stream.
This value must be smaller than the
value of the maximum jitter buffer
and bigger than the value of the
minimum jitter buffer.
This value should only be changed
for if needed for highly congested
networks.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-765

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

75 Maximum Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 210ms

This program is not supported for
version 1.00 software and will be
supported in a later release.
This program sets the maximum
value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
It is used only when 84-19-72 (Jitter
Buffer Mode for video) is set to 1:
Fixed.
This value must be bigger than the
value of the minimum jitter buffer
and should only be changed if
needed for highly congested
networks.
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-766 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

06 SIP Trunk Port Number 1~65535 Profile 1 = 5060

Profile 2 = 5062
Profile 3 = 5090
Profile 4 = 5092
Profile 5 = 5094
Profile 6 = 5096
With Version 2000 or
lower CPU Software
only two SIP Profiles
are supported.

07 Session Timer Value 1~65535 0

08 Minimum Session Timer Value 1~65535 1800

09 Called Party Information 0 = Request URI 0

1 = To Header

10 URL Type 0 = SIP-URL 0

1 = TEL-URL

11 URL/To HeaderSetting Information 0 = Proxy Server Domain 0

0: If 10-29-12 and 10-29-13 are set 1 = SIP UA Domain
for the Proxy server domain, the value
is put. The value of 10-29-11 is put on
the URL/TO header when not set.
1: Information is acquired and put
from 10-28-01/10-28-02 of the SIP
UA domains.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-767

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

13 E.164 Incoming/Outgoing via SIP 0 = Off 0

Trunk URI
1 = Mode 1
When making an incoming or 2 = Mode 2
outgoing call via SIP trunk, enable or 3 = Mode 3
disable conversion of SIP-URI to from
E.164 format (E.g. +850XXXX) for
PSTN. When making an outgoing call
at SIP trunk, add ‘+’ and International
Access Code set in PRG 10-02-02 to
SIP-URI. When making an incoming
call at SIP trunk, delete ‘+’ and
International Access Code when
matching PRG 10-02-02 to SIP-URI.

15 100rel Settings 0 = Use default settings 0

1 = Use opposite settings (Normal)
Outbound Call:
When set to 0 the 101rel is
included in the supported
header of the invite
message.
When set to 1 the 101rel is
NOT included in the
supported header of the
invite message
Inbound Call:
When set to 0 and the Invite
includes a 101rel in the
supported header of the
invite message the
provisional 1XX (excluding
the 100 Trying) Will contain
a 100rel in the supported
header (which means the
other side must PRACK this
message).
When set to 1 and the Invite
includes a 101rel in the
supported header of the
invite message the
provisional 1XX (excluding
the 100 Trying) Will NOT
contain a 100rel in the
supported header (which
means NO PRACK
required).

16 SIP Trunk SIP-URI E.164 Incoming 0 = Off 0

Mode
1 = Mode 1
2 = Mode 2

2-768 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

17 Call Forward Moved Temporarily 0 = Disabled 0

Support
1 = 302 Return
Input Data 1: When enabled a 302
Moved temporarily response is sent
for external call forward destinations.

18 Keep Alive by OPTION Interval 60~3600 180sec

Timer

19 Keep Alive by OPTION Fail Limit 1~5 1

20 Option Keep Alive User ID Only single byte ping

alphanumeric characters
are allowed.

21 SIP Trunk TLS Port Number 1 ~ 65535 [Profile 1]: 5061

[Profile 2]: 5063
[Profile 3]: 5091
[Profile 4]: 5093
[Profile 5]: 5095
[Profile 6]: 5097

22 TLS Certificate Up to 32 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-769

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the
H.323/SIP phone.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration Information Automatic Deletion 0 = Disable 0

When set to 1, the registration information is 1 = Enable
automatically deleted (for H.323).

02 Keep Alive Message Interval 1~10 minutes 1

Time interval that system sends a Ping to the
terminal.

03 Keep Alive Message Timeout 1~10 seconds 5

Time that system waits for a Ping response from the
terminal.

04 Keep Alive Timeout 1~5 times 3

How many times the system waits for a non
response before determining the terminal is down.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-770 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain to set the Limiter Control Gain configuration of VoIP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 RX Limiter Control Gain 0~30 (-15dBm ~ +15dBm) 15

Gain setting to control limiter in the direction 0 = -15dBm (0dBm)
of IP PCM. 1 = -14dBm
This option adds gain to the voice input from :
the LAN and removes it from the voice output 15 = 0dBm
to highway. :
02 TX Limiter Control Gain 29 = 14dBm 15
30 = 15dBm (0dBm)
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction
of PCM IP.
This option adds the gain to the voice input
from highway and removes it from the voice
output to the LAN.

03 RX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) 15

This option controls the limiter gain for a
(0dBm)
COIU call in the IP to PCM direction.

04 TX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) 15

This option controls the limiter gain for a
(0dBm)
COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-771

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC
information for the SIP extensions.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 2

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disabled 0

Mode
1 = Enabled

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 2

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disabled 0

Mode
1 = Enabled

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

2-772 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjusting

18 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~+10dB) 20

0 = Self Adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dB (-21dBm)
30 = 10dB (-20dBm)

28 Audio Capability Priority 0 = G.711_PT 0

2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726

33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 3

(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)

39 G.726 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

44 iLBC Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disabled 0

Mode
1 = Enabled
Not used by IPLE.

49 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass 1 = Enable
connection, this Program checks the
sending side address from received
RTP packet at VoIPDB.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-773

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

65 Video Quality Mode 0 = Mode 1 0

This program specifies the SIP 1 = Mode 2
station video quality mode when
Peer-to Peer is disabled in 15-05-
50.
Use this program in conjunction with
84-27-20 for Mode 1 and 84-27-21
for Mode 2 video quality settings.
Mode 1 = CIF (352x288)
Mode 2 = VGA (640x480)

66 Video CODEC 0 = H.264 0

This program specifies the video
CODEC. At this time only H.264 is
supported.

67 Jitter Buffer Mode for Video 1 = Static 2

This program sets the jitter buffer 2 = Self Adjusting
size adjustment. At default this is set
to self adjusting and should only be
changed when directed by support.

68 Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 70ms

This program sets the minimum
value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
This value must be smaller than the
value of the maximum jitter buffer.
This value should only be changed
for if needed highly congested
networks.

69 Initial Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 140ms

This program sets the initial value of
jitter buffer for the video stream.
This value must be smaller than the
value of the maximum jitter buffer
and bigger than the value of the
minimum jitter buffer.
This value should only be changed
for if needed highly congested
networks.

2-774 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

70 Maximum Jitter Buffer for Video 0 ~ 1000ms 210ms

This program sets the maximum
value of jitter buffer for the video
stream.
It is used only when 84-19-72 (Jitter
Buffer Mode for video) is set to 1:
Fixed.
This value must be bigger than the
value of the minimum jitter buffer
and should only be changed if
needed for highly congested
networks.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-775

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session
timers, called party information and expire value of invite.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registrar/Proxy Port 1~65535 5070

02 Session Timer Value 0~65535 180

03 Minimum Session Timer 0~65535 180

Value

04 Called Party Info 0 = Request URI 0

1 = To Header

05 Expire Value of Invite 0~256 (seconds) 180s

Arrival of a message is ended
when this time expires and
there is no cut from the caller.

06 Expire Value of Invite (send) 1~3600 (seconds) 180s

The expiration time is set for the
Invite message.

Conditions
These commands are for SIP analog extensions.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-776 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the codec parameters of
the GPZ-IPLE.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

03 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

07 G.729 Audio Frame Number 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

10 G729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

11 G729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-777

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

19 1st Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 0

2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726

20 2nd Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 2

2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT

22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjusting

23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0 = Self adjustment 20

1 = -19dBm (-49dBm)
:
20 = 0dBm (-30dBm)
:
29 = +9dBm (-21dBm)
30 = +10dBm (-20dBm)

27 G.722 Audio Frame Number 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

28 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

29 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

30 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

31 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

32 G.726 Audio Frame Number 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

33 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

34 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

35 G.726 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

36 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

2-778 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

43 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, 1 = Enable
this Program checks the sending side
address from received RTP packet at
VoIPDB.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-779

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-22 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-22 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DT700 Multiline
logon information.

Input Data

Personal ID Index 1~960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 User ID Up to 32 characters No Setting

Input the User ID when using manual or auto
registration (10-46-01).

02 Password Up to 16 characters No Setting

Input the Password when using manual or auto
registration (10-46-01).
 IP Multiline terminals only support
numerical user IDs, not alphanumeric.
03 User ID Omission 0 = Off 0
Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically 1 = On
when log on again.

04 Log Off 0 = Off 1

When the registration mode (10-46-01) is set to 1 = On
manual, and the phone prompts for a login, the
previous user ID appears so the user only has to
enter the password.
When enabled, the extension assigned to the
Personal ID Index can be logged off or overridden
by another IP multiline station or Softphone.
In Manual mode, a user can also log off the IP
phone to allow another user to login with their own
login ID and password. To logoff the IP phone use
the following operation:
Press the "Down Arrow" Soft Key, press the
"Prog" soft key, and then press the "LOGOFF" soft
key.

2-780 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 Nick Name Up to 32 characters No Setting

Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically
when log on again.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-781

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-23 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-23 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for
the DT800/DT700 Multiline Terminal.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

The Expires value of the REGISTER
message which received from DT700
terminal is out of range or when the Expire
value is not set up, in case it assigns the
effective time to the DT700 terminal. The
timer for supervising whether DT700 terminal
is connected or not.

02 Subscribe Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 3600

The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and
receive the terminal operation instructions
between the Main Device and DT700
terminal.

03 Session Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

Set effective time for supervising the Voice
Path.

04 Minimum Session Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

Set minimum value of effective time for
supervising the Voice Path.

05 Invite Expire Timer 0~65535 (sec) 180

Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call
when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DT700
terminal.

06 Signal Type of Service 0x00~0xFF 00

Set Type of Service value which applied to (0~9, A~F)
send SIP Message Packet from DT700
terminal to Main Device.

07 Error Display Timer 0~65535 (sec) 0

2-782 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Digest Authorization Registration Expire 0~4294967295 (sec) 0

Timer

09 Temporary Password (Read Only)

10 Number of Password Retries 0~255 0

Input the number of times an incorrect
password can be entered when the security
key is pressed.

11 Password Lock Time 0~120 0

12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits No Setting

(0~9, , #, P, R, @)

13 Media Type of Service 0x00~0xFF 00

(0~9, A~F)

14 Refer Expire Timer 0~65535 (sec) 60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-783

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-24 : DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-24 : DT800/DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the CODEC of
each type of DT800/DT700 Multiline Telephone.

Input Data

Type 1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 2

Input the amount of audio in the packets when 1 = 10ms
using the G.711 CODEC. 2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

This decides the G.711 type. In North America, 1 = -law
typically u-law is used.

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~4 2

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

2-784 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 20

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 40

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 80

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjusting

18 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~+10dB) 20

0 = Self Adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dB (-21dBm)
30 = 10dB (-20dBm)

23 Echo Canceler Non-Linear Processing Noise 40 ~ 70 70

(not available via telephone programming)

25 Echo Canceler 4W DET 0 = Disable 0

(not available via telephone programming) 1 = Enable

28 Audio Capability Priority 0~3 0

0 = G.711_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT

32 G.722 Audio Frame Number 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

34 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

37 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this 1 = Enable
Program checks the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-785

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-786 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the CODEC with NetLink.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

3 = Self Adjustment

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-787

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~ +10dB) 20

0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dBm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dB (-21dBm)
30 = 10dB (-20dBm)

28 Audio Capability Priority 0~4 0

0 = G.711_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726

33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

39 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~300ms 30

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~300ms 60

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~300ms 120

49 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this 1 = Enable
Program checks the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

2-788 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-789

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-26 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup to set the IP address of IPL and the port.

Input Data

Slot Number 1

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Slot 1 = 172.16.0.20

02 RTP Port Number 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10020

03 RTCP Port Number 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10021

(RTP Port Number +1)

12 Video RTP Port 0 ~ 65534 20020

Sets the starting RTP port used by
standard SIP terminal video.

13 Video RTCP Port 0 ~ 65534 20021

Sets the starting RTCP port used by
standard SIP terminal video.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-790 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-27 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the IPL.

Input Data

Slot Number 1

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 SRTP Mode Select 0 = Mode1 0

06 H.245 Port Number 0~65535 10100

07 Preparation Completion Response Port 0~65535 4000

Number

14 ICMP Redirect 0 = Enable 1

1 = Disable
0 = Voice Packets WILL follow
ICMP redirect messages.
1 = Voice Packets WILL NOT
follow ICMP redirect
messages.
 For Signaling packets and
ICMP refer to PRG 10-12-08.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-791

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

20 Maximum non-MCU Video Channel Mode 1 0~8 0

Note when changing this PRG all DSP
resources are reset when idle. In progress calls
are not affected but until all DSP resources go
idle this change will not take affect.
Sets the number of VoIP DSP resources to
reserve for non-MCU mode 1 video. This
program is used if peer-to-peer is disabled for
standard SIP phones.
VoIP DSP resources are shared between video
and voice calls. The system will always keep 64
resources for voice calls. When changing this
program if resources are exceeded the system
will provide an error message and will not allow
the setting to be changed.

21 Maximum non-MCU Video Channel Mode 2 0~6 0

Note when changing this PRG all DSP
resources are reset when idle. In progress calls
are not affected but until all DSP resources go
idle this change will not take affect.
Sets the number of VoIP DSP resources to
reserve for non-MCU mode 2 video. This
program is used if peer-to-peer is disabled for
standard SIP phones.
VoIP DSP resources are shared between video
and voice calls. The system will always keep 64
resources for voice calls. When changing this
program if resources are exceeded the system
will provide an error message and will not allow
the setting to be changed.

22 Maximum MCU Group Number (Mode 1) 0 = No MCU video channels 0

Note when changing this PRG all DSP reserved.
resources are reset when idle. In progress calls 1 = 4 MCU video Mode 1
are not affected but until all DSP resources go channels reserved.
idle this change will not take affect.
This setting reserves VoIP DSP resources for
mode 1 video conferences. When a DSP
resource is reserved it is not available for SIP
voice calls.
VoIP DSP resources are shared between video
and voice calls. The system will always keep 64
resources for voice calls. When changing this
program if resources are exceeded the system
will provide an error message and will not allow
the setting to be changed.

2-792 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

23 Maximum MCU Group Number (Mode 2) 0 = No MCU video channels 0

Note when changing this PRG all DSP reserved.
resources are reset when idle. In progress calls 1 = 4 MCU video Mode 1
are not affected but until all DSP resources go channels reserved.
idle this change will not take affect.
This setting reserves VoIP DSP resources for
mode 2 video conferences. When a DSP
resource is reserved it is not available for SIP
voice calls.
VoIP DSP resources are shared between video
and voice calls. The system will always keep 64
resources for voice calls. When changing this
program if resources are exceeded the system
will provide an error message and will not allow
the setting to be changed.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-793

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-28 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-28 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to
download for the IP Phone.

Index 1

Terminal Type 1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1

2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT1D/ITL-24PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1
4 = Not used
5 = ITL-**DG-3
6 = ITL-**CG-3
7 = ITL-2CR-1
8 = ITZ-**D-*D/ITZ-**PD-*D/ITZ-**pA-*D/ITZ-**DG/ITZ-**LDG/ITZ-**LD
9 = ITZ-**CG
10 = ITY-6D
11 = ITY-8LDX

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting

02 Firmware File Name Maximum 30 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-794 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-29 : DT800/DT700 CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-29 : DT800/DT700 CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of
the DT800/DT700 when it uses Multicast.

Input Data

1 = Type 1 (Multicast)
2 = Type 2 (reserved)
Type 3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Audio Capability 1 = G.711 A-law 2

2 = G.711 -law
3 = G.729
5 = G.722

02 Number of Audio Frames 1~6 2

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

03 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1

To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this 1 = Enable
Program checks the sending side address from
received RTP packet at VoIPDB.

Conditions

 When using G.711, PRG 84-29-02 only 10ms, 20ms, 30ms and 40ms are used.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-795

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup to set the CODEC information of the PVA-
CCIS over IP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~2 2

1 = 20ms
2 = 30ms

02 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1

1 = -law

03 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~3 2

1 = 20ms
2 = 30ms
3 = 40ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~500ms 30

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~500ms 60

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~500ms 120

2-796 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

17 TX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm ~ +14dBm) 20

0 = -20dBm
1 = -19dBm
:
20 = 0dBm
:
39 = 19dBm
40 = 20dBm

18 RX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm ~ +14dBm) 20

0 = -20dBm
1 = -19dBm
:
20 = 0dBm
:
39 = 19dBm
40 = 20dBm

19 1st Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711_PT 0

1 = G.723_PT
20 2nd Priority of Audio Capability 1
2 = G.729_PT

21 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Inbound (RFC2833)
2 = Outbound (H.245)

22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

2 = Adaptive during
silence
3 = Adaptive immediate

23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0~30 (-19dB ~ +10dB) 20

0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19dB (-49dBm)
:
20 = 0dB (-30dBm)
:
29 = 9dB (-21dBm)
30 = 10dB (-20dBm)

24 Echo Canceler Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

25 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

26 LDP Check Sum Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-797

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
PVA-CCIS CODEC changes require a reset of the GCD-PVAA blade.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-798 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceler Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceler Setup to set the IPLE blade parameters.

Input Data

Type 1 = H.323 Trunk

2 = Networking
3 = SIP Trunk
4 = SIP Extension
5 = CCISoIP
6 = NetLink
7 = DT700/DT800

Input Data

Profile 1~6

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 TDM Echo Canceler Mode 0: Disable 1

Select echo Canceler on/off at 1: Enable
receiving (TDM) side.

02 TDM Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 = Disable 1

(2W)
1 = Enable
Select Echo Compression Mode
for remaining echo. Effective when
84-31-01 = 1

03 TDM Echo Canceler Comfort 0 = Disable 1

Noise Mode
1 = Enable
Normally not used. Select comfort
noise as background noise.
Effective when 84-31-01 = 1

05 TDM Echo Canceler Tail 0~87 (0ms~870ms) 0

Displacement
Normally not used. Effective when
84-31-01 = 1

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-799

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 TDM Echo Canceler Tail Length 1 = 32ms 7

Normally not used. Select length of 2 = 48ms
echo. Effective when 84-31-01 = 1 3 = 64ms
4 = 80ms
5 = 96ms
6 = 112ms
7 = 128ms

07 TDM Echo Canceler Default 0~6 (-9dB ~ +9dB) 5

ERLE Level
0 = -9dB
1 = -6dB
Normally not used. Select length of
2 = -3dB
echo. Effective when 84-31-01 = 1
:
5 = 6dB
6 = 9dB

08 TDM Echo Canceler Echo Type 1 = Line Echo Canceler 1

Select echo canceler type: 2 = Acoustic Echo Canceler
1: Based upon ITU-T G.168
2: Based upon ITU-T G.167
Effective when 84-31-01 = 1

10 TDM TX Level Control 0 = Disable 3

Select transmit level control mode. 1 = TX Control Mode
2 = TX Automatic Level Control
Mode
3 = TX HLC (High Level)

11 TDM TX Voice Level Control 0~16 (-24 ~ +24) 8

Mode
0 = -24dB
Effective when 84-31-10 = 1 1 = -21dB
:
8 = 0dB
:
15 = 21dB
16 = 24dB

12 TDM TX Automatic Level Control 0~12 (-42 ~ -6) 7

Level
0 = -42dBm
1 = -39dBm
Normally not used. Select target
:
gain. Effective when 84-31-10 = 2
7 = -21dBm
:
11 = -9dBm
12 = -6dBm

2-800 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

13 TDM TX HLC Threshold 0~42 (-42 ~ 0) 41

Select HLC threshold level. 0 = -42dBm
Effective when 84-31-10 = 3 1 = -41dBm
:
41 = -1dBm
42 = 0dBm

14 TDM TX Gain Compression 0 = Disable 1

Mode 1 = Enable
Transmit Gain Compression on or
off. Effective when 84-31-10 = 3

15 TDM TX Gain Compression 0~42 (-42 ~ 0) 41

Threshold
0 = -42dBm
Transmit Gain Compression 1 = -41dBm
threshold. Effective when 84-31-14 :
=1
41 = -1dBm
42 = 0dBm

16 TDM RX Level Control 0 = Disable 0

Normally not used. Select receive 1 = RX Level Control Mode
level control mode. 2 = RX Automatic Level Control
Flag

17 TDM RX Level Control Level 0~16 (-24 ~ +24) 8

Normally not used. Select receive 0 = -24dB
voice level. Effective when 1 = -21dB
84-31-16 = 1 :
8 = 0dB
:
15 = 21dB
16 = 24dB

18 TDM RX Automatic Level 0~12 (-42 ~ -6) 7

Control Level
0 = -42dBm
Normally not used. Select target 1 = -39dBm
gain. Effective when 84-31-16 = 2 :
7 = -21dBm
:
11 = -9dBm
12 = -6dBm

26 RTP Echo Canceler Echo Type 0 = Disable 0

Select echo canceler type: 1 = Line Echo Canceler
1: Based upon ITU-T G.168 2 = Acoustic Echo Canceler
2: Based upon ITU-T G.167

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-801

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

37 TDM Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 = Disable 1

(4W)
1 = Enable
Select Echo Compression Mode
for remaining echo. Effective when
84-31-19 = 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-802 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-33 : Fax Over IP Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-33 : Fax Over IP Setup to set up the parameters of the Fax Over IP function.

Input Data

1 = H.323 Trunk
2 = Networking
3 = SIP Trunk
Type
4 = SIP Extension
5 = CCIS over IP
6 = NetLink

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

01 FAX Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable
2 = Each Port Mode

02 T.38 Protocol Mode 0 = R/U 1

1 = U/R
2 = RTP
3 = UDPTL

04 Jitter Buffer (max) 0 ~ 300 160

05 T.38 RTP Format Payload Number 96 ~ 127 100

06 T.38 Fax Maximum Speed 0 = V.27ter, 4800bps 2

1 = V.29, 9600bps
2 = V.17, 14400bps

07 T.38 Data Error Correction Mode 0 = Redundancy 0

1 = FEC

08 T.38 Error protection depth for 0~2 0

Signaling

09 T.38 Error protection depth for Data 0~2 0

10 T.38 TCF Method 1 = VOIPDB 1

2 = G3FE

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-803

 Issue 4.0

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

11 T.38 ECM (Error Correction Mode) 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

12 FAX CODEC 1 = G.711 a-law 2

2 = G.711 u-law
3 = G.726

13 Payload Size 1 ~ 4 (10ms base) 2

14 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 1

2 = Self adjusting

15 Minimum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 80

16 Average Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 120

17 Maximum Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 160

18 FAX RTP Payload Type 0,2,8,96 ~ 127 103

19 FAX over IP Type 1 = Type 1 1

2 = Type 2
• When SIP Trunk is used:
Type 1 = T.38
Type 2 = Path through
• When CCIS is used:
Type 1 = SV9100 Original Mode
(Select Type 1 Mode when
networked between the SV9100
system only.
Type 2 = PBX Compatible Mode
(Select Type 2 Mode when the PBX
(SV9300/SV9500) and SV9100
system are networked. The same
system setting is required on the
CCIS network.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-804 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-34 : VoIPDB DTMF Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-34 : VoIPDB DTMF Setup to set up the basic parameters of the DTMF.

Input Data

1 = H.323 Trunk
2 = Networking
3 = SIP Trunk
Type
4 = SIP Extension
5 = CCIS over IP
6 = NetLink

Item Profile
Item Input Data Default
No. 1~6

01 DTFMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = RFC2833
2 = H.245

02 DTMF Payload Number 96 ~ 127 110

03 DTMF Detection Type 1~5 1

04 DTMF Transmit Type 1~5 1

05 DTMF Relay (inband) Retransmit Type 1~5 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-805

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-35 : VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-35 : VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup to set up the parameters of the DTMF playout
of RFC2833 packet reception from the network.

Input Data

1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
Type 3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 RFC2833 Playout Level 0 = Depends on RFC2833 0

1 = Configuration

02 RFC2833 Playout Level High 1 = -33dBm 28

:
28 = -6dBm

03 RFC2833 Playout Level Low 1 = -33dBm 28

:
28 = -6dBm

04 RFC2833 Playout Transmit Duration 0 = Depends on RFC2833 0

(25 ~ 2000ms)

05 RFC2833 Playout Pause Duration 0 = Depends on RFC2833 0

(25 ~ 2000ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-806 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-36 : VoIPDB DTMF Transmit Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-36 : VoIPDB DTMF Transmit Setup to set up the DTMF transmit parameters.
Input Data

1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
Type 3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 DTMF Transmit Level 1 ~ 61 (-36dB ~ 24dB) 25 (-12dB)

1 = -36dB
2 = -35dB
:
37 = 0dB
:
60: 23dB
61: 24dB

02 DTMF Transmit Duration 30 ~ 2000ms 100

03 DTMF Transmit Twist Level 1 ~ 49 (-24dB ~ 24dB) 25

1 = -24dB
2 = -23dB
:
25 = 0dB
:
48: 23dB
49: 24dB

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-807

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-37 : VoIPDB DTMF Detection Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-37 : VoIPDB DTMF Transmit Setup to set up the DTMF detection parameters.
Index 1

1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
Type 3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 DTMF Detection Minimum Level 0 ~ 31 (-40dB ~ -9dB) 2 (-38dB)

0 = -40dB
1 = -39dB
2 = -38dB
:
31 = -9dB

02 DTMF Detect Twist Positive Level 0 ~ 24dB 5

03 DTMF Detect Twist Negative Level 0 ~ 24dB 0

04 DTMF Detect Minimum Duration 23 ~ 2000ms 30

05 DTMF Transmit Twist Level 0 ~ 9 (-9dB ~ 0dB) 6 (-3dB)

0 = -9dB
1 = -8dB
:
6 = -3dB
7 = -2dB
8 = -1dB
9 = 0dB

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-808 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-38 : VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceler Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-38 : VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceler Setup to set up the echo canceller
parameters.

Input Data

1 = H.323 Trunk
2 = Networking
3 = SIP Trunk
Type 4 = SIP Extension
5 = CCIS over IP
6 = NetLink
7 = DT800/DT700

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

01 Echo Canceler Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

02 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 Echo Canceler Comfort Noise Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

04 --- Not Used ---

05 Echo Canceler Tail Displacement 0 ~ 87 (0ms ~ 870ms) 0

06 Echo Canceler Tail Length 1 = 32ms 7

2 = 48ms
3 = 64ms
4 = 80ms
5 = 96ms
6 = 112ms
7 = 128ms

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-809

 Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

07 Echo Canceler Default ERL Level 0 ~ 6 (-9dB ~ 9dB) 5

0 = -9dB
1 = -6dB
2 = -3dB
:
5 = 6dB
6 = 9dB

08 Echo Canceler Echo Type 1 = Line E. C. 1

2 = Acoustic E.C.

09 --- Not Used ---

10 TX Level Control 0 = Disable 0

1 = Manual
2 = Auto
3 = HLC

11 TX Level Control Level 0 ~ 16 (-24dB ~ 24dB) 8

0 = -24dB
1 = -21dB
2 = -18dB
:
8 = 0dB
:
14 = 18dB
15 = 21dB
16 = 24dB

12 TX Automatic Level Control Level 0 ~ 12 (-42dBm ~ -6dBm) 7

0 = -42dBmm
1 = -39dBm
:
7 = -21dBm
:
11 = -9dBm
12 = -6dBm

13 TX HLC Threshold 0 ~ 42 (-42dBm ~ -0dBm) 41

0 = -42dBmm
1 = -41dBm
:
42 = -0dBm

14 TX Signal Limiter Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

15 TX Signal Limiter Threshold 0 ~ 42 (-42dBm ~ -0dBm) 41

0 = -42dBmm
1 = -41dBm
:
42 = -0dBm

2-810 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

Issue 4.0

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

16 RX Level Control 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable
2 = Auto

17 RX Level Control Level 0 ~ 16 (-24dB ~ 24dB) 8

0 = -24dB
1 = -21dB
2 = -18dB
:
8 = 0dB
:
14 = 18dB
15 = 21dB
16 = 24dB

18 RX Automatic Level Control Level 0 ~ 12 (-42dBm ~ -6dBm) 7

0 = -42dBmm
1 = -39dBm
:
7 = -21dBm
:
11 = -9dBm
12 = -6dBm

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-811

 Issue 4.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-39 : SIP Trunk Message Customization
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 84-39 : SIP Trunk Message Customization to observe SIP Trunk information. This
program is Read Only.

Item
Item Input Data Default Profile 1~6
No.

01~99 Options 1 ~ 99 0 ~ 255 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-812 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

 Program: 90
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Year 00~99 00 (No Setting)

02 Month 01~12 00 (No Setting)
03 Day 01~31 00 (No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-813

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password entry, the
system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:
 Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
 Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0~9, # and )
 Password level

The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level
password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the
Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level
meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs,
and SB level password can access to SB programs only.)

Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Programming or WebPro

Programming to make a backup copy of your system data.
CAUTION

Input Data

User Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 User Name Maximum 10 characters

02 Password Up to 8 digits

03 User Level 0 = Prohibited User

1 = MF (Manufacturer Level)
2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Level 1)

2-814 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Default

User
User Name Password Level Level Description
No.

1 necii 47544 1 (MF) Manufacturer Level - Access to all

system programs.

2 tech 12345678 2 (IN) Installer Level - Access to all IN

level programs.

3 ADMIN1 0000 3 (SA) System Administrator Level

1 - Restricted Access

4 ADMIN2 9999 4 (SB) System Administrator Level

2 - More Restricted Access

5 USER1 1111 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1

6 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1

7 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1

8 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1

Conditions

 More than one extension can be in the programming mode.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-815

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-03 : Save Data
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the USB Flash Drive. This program
should be used after changing the programmed data.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Data Save Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.)

02 DIM Log Save Dial 1 + press Transfer to copy DIM log from SD Drive to USB
drive.

03 Save Statistical Information for Dial 1 + press Transfer to copy RTP Statistical Information file
RTP from SD Drive to USB drive.

Conditions

 When reloading a customer database, the system must be reset (either using Program 90-08 or
power down/power up) before all uploaded programming takes affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-816 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-04 : Load Data
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted USB Flash Drive to the SRAM
and Flash ROM in the system.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Load Data Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel)

Conditions

 After uploading the programming, reset the system and wait a few minutes for the system to reset
completely before accessing any line or special system feature. Otherwise, some unusual LED
indications may be experienced.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-817

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-05 : Slot Control
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) blades (slots 1~24).

Delete allows you to completely uninstall the blade. You should do this if you want to remove a blade and
plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface blade is
being installed in a slot previously used (e.g., changing from a LCA to a DLCA blade), the slot should be
deleted (option 1) first before installing the new interface blade.

Reset allows you to send a reset code.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

NetLink System ID 0 ~ 50 (default = 0)

Input Data

1 = Delete
2 = Reset
Menu Number
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Slot Control Slot Number (1~24)

Conditions

 When you delete or reset a blade, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05. When
reusing the slot for another blade, you must plug the blade in or reset the system before the system
can use the slot again.

 When you delete or reset a blade, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to default.

2-818 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-819

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-06 : Trunk Control
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a blade from
placing outgoing calls (just like placing the blade switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the
blade can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not affected.

This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro but not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

0 = Set Busy Out

Menu Number
1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Trunk Control Trunk Port Number: 001~400

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-820 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-07 : Station Control
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

1 = Hardware Reset
Menu Number
2 = Software Reset

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Extension Control 001 ~ 960

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-821

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-08 : System Reset
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 System Reset Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer key to cancel)

Conditions
After restoring a customer database, the system must be reset using Program 90-08 or by powering down/
powering up before all the restored programming takes affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-822 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to
automatically reset.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Month 00~12 (Note 1) 00

02 Day 00~31 (Note 2) 00

03 Hour 00~23 00

04 Minute 00~59 00

Note 1 If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system

is automatically reset every month on the
predefined day.
Note 2 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets
every day at the predefined time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-823

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate an
alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to
the predefined destination.

Input Data

Alarm Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Alarm Type 0 = Not Set

1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm

02 Report 0 = Not Report (No autodial)

1 = Report (autodial)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

1 2 0 PKG Initialize 1. The PKG failed to 1. PKG not inserted 1. Insert PKG firmly. During ERR
Error. initialize. firmly. 2. Insert PKG firmly. initialization, REC
2. The PKG did not start 2. PKG was 3. Delete slot the PKG is
normally. removed, but not information in recognized.
reinserted firmly. PRG 90-05 and
3. Old PKG data insert the PKG
still reported due again.
to no
initialization.

2 2 0 PKG The unit did not step on a 1. The package is 1. Insert the package When unit is ERR
Mounting regular procedure and it not completely firmly. reconfirmed, REC
Error was pulled out. Or, it is not inserted. the error is
normally inserted. recovered.
2. Try again after
2. The package is initializing the
out of order. system data once
when LED doesn't
blink normally.

3. Exchange packages.

2-824 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

3 2 0 Connection The error occurred when 1. The unit is not 1. Insert the unit firmly. When unit is ERR
fault between communicating with the completely confirmed, the REC
GCD-CP10 package. When the installed. error is
2. The power-supply
and other package is broken, it recovered.
PKGs. recognizes it as a voltage must use
2. The power- another power
communication fault.
supply voltage supply when is in the
of the system is range of ratings or
outside ratings. measuring with the
voltmeter, and
deviating from the
3. The equipment
rated range.
that generates
the noise in the
same power 3. Use the power
supply system supply besides the
as the power equipment with the
supply origin of possibility of the
the system is noise source.
connected, and
it malfunctions
because of the 4. Separate as much
as possible and use
power supply
noise. a main device from
the equipment by
which you seem
4. The equipment may generate the
to which it is radiation noise.
adjacent to of a
main device,
and has put out 5. Ground the chassis
the radiation correctly.
noise exists,
and it
malfunctions
because of the
radiation noise.

5. The chassis is
not properly
grounded.

4 2 0 PKG S/W The unit program could not 1. The package 1. Delete slot Please ERR
Download be downloaded normally. software is not information that exchange REC
Error stored in the corresponds by units, though it
downloaded PRG90-05-01 to is likely to
The unit could not be
USB memory. delete package restore by
started normally.
information that was mounting the
installed before. unit again.
2. The stored
package
software is 2. There is a possibility When the unit
illegal. that the unit program program is
Package is broken though an normally
information that external factor of the downloaded,
was installed noise etc. the error is
before remains. recovered.
3. load into the USB
memory and try
again when you
back up the unit
program.

4. Check with maker on

uncertain points.

5 1 0 Cooling fan The cooling fan does not 1. The cooling fan 1. Confirm the cooling Replace the
error work normally. has stopped fan is turning. cooling fan if it
working. is defective.
2. Verify the cooling fan
2. The cooling fan mounting.
has come off.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-825

 Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

6 0 0 Blocking The link of terminals 1. Terminal 1. Confirm the terminal The error is ERR
connected with the ESI breakdown. connected with recovered REC
package came off. same ESI. If they when
work normally, connecting or
2 Faulty wiring and
confirm the exchanging it.
wiring
breakdown or the
termination.
wiring for the
terminal.
3. External noise.
2. Exchange the
4. ESI package terminal that doesn't
Breakdown. work and the
working terminal,
and confirm it’s
working. An external
factor of the noise
etc. is thought.

3. Confirm wiring and

the installation,etc.

4.Check with
manufacturer if the
problem occurs
again.

7 1 0 Power failure The supply of the 1. The power cable 1. Confirm the power When the ERR
commercial power came off. supply outlet when commercial REC
stopped. the commercial power is
power has not restored, the
2. Power failure stopped. error is
recovered.
3. The power 2. Check with the
supply broke
manufacturer if the
down.
problem occurs
again.

8 1 0 RAM Backup RAM backup battery on the Check the battery The error is ERR
Battery Error GCD-CP10 blade is connector. If it is recovered REC
unplugged or defective. connected correctly, once the
replace the battery. battery is
replaced.

9 --- Reserved ---

10 0 0 ISDN Link Layer1 link of ISDN lines 1. Check 1. Confirm the data of When the ERR
Error came off. connection PRG10-03. connection REC
between main returns
device and ISDN normally, the
2. Confirm wiring and
line. error is
installation of DSU. recovered.
2. DSU breakdown
3. Check with the
manufacturer if the
3. The setting of problem occurs
PRG10-03 does again.
not correspond
to an actual line.

11 0 0 CTI Link Error The link with the CTI server 1. LAN cable 1. Confirm the CTI When the ERR
came off. defective. server, wiring, and connection REC
the connection. returns
normally, the
2. Connected HUB
error is
broken. 2. Check with
recovered.
manufacturer if the
problem occurs
3. The CTI server
again.
doesn't start
normally.

2-826 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

12 0 0 MIS Link Error The link with MIS client PC 1. LAN cable 1. Confirm MIS client When the ERR
came off. defective. PC and connected connection REC
part. returns
normally, the
2. Connected HUB error is
broken. 2. Check with
recovered.
manufacturer if the
problem occurs
3. The CTI server
again.
doesn't start
normally.

13 0 0 Charge The link with the charge 1. Wiring problem 1. Confirm that there is When the ERR
Management management device came in connecting no problem in wiring connection REC
Link Error off. main device with to connect a main returns
charge device with the normally, the
management charge management error is
device. device. (Whether recovered.
ping passes for LAN
connection is
2. PC Problem.
confirmed.)

2. Restart the charge

management
software.

3. Reboot PC, and start

charge management
software.

14 0 0 LAN Link The link with LAN on 1. LAN cable Confirm the operation When the ERR
Error GCD-CP10 came off. defective. of LAN connector, LAN connection REC
cable, and HUB again. returns
normally, the
2. Connected HUB
error is
broken.
recovered.

3. Defective
GCD-CP10.

15 0 0 Network Keep 1. The network connection 1. LAN cable is 1. Confirm that the When the ERR
Alive has been cut. defective. defect is on the connection REC
Network side. returns WAR
normally, the
2. Network Keep Alive 2. Net side trouble.
error is
restoration. 2. Confirm the settings
recovered.
of HUB and the
3. Packet blocked
router, etc.
3. Response notification on by firewall.
network Keep Alive.
4. Repetition of IP
address.

16 0 0 SMDR Link

17 1 0 Denial of The system received an Service outage Confirm that the defect WAR
Service illegal packet. (DOS) is on the Network side.

18~21 --- Reserved ---

22

23

24 1 Voice Mail

25~28 --- Reserved ---

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-827

 Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

29 0 0 Charge The temporary buffer for 1. The charge data 1. Print and delete the When the ERR
Management the charge management in is printed and charge data at the output is REC
Buffer full main device overflowed, not deleted at simple charge restarted, the
and a part of unoutput the simple management. error is
charge data disappeared charge recovered.
because it could not output management. However, the
the charge management 2. Connect the charge
charge
management
data. management
2. The charge data software for the
data after the
is not output to charge management
error occurs is
PC for the software and output
not recorded.
charge the charge data.
management
software.

30 2 0 SMDR Buffer The temporary buffer for 1. Problem of 1. Confirm whether When the ERR
full SMDR in main device wiring to there is problem in output is REC
overflowed, and a part of connect main wiring to connect a restarted, the
unoutput SMDR data device with PC. main device with error is
disappeared because it PC. recovered.
could not output SMDR However, the
data. 2. PC Problem.
SMDR data
2. Execute the
after the error
reactivation of PC.
occurs is not
recorded.

31 1 0 Auto Dial after Auto dialing occurs after Sensor detect an No action needed.
Sensor sensor detection. abnormality and
Detection makes an
emergency call.

32 1 0 Remote Remote watch function No action needed/

watch performs auto dial.
function
performs auto
dial.

33 1 0 Fail to auto Fail to auto dial by security All auto dial trunks No action needed.
dial by function. are busy.
security
function.

34 --- Reserved ---

35 0 0 CS Blocking The link of the CSIU and 1. Outgoing noise. Confirm the following The error is ERR
CS came off. when it happens recovered REC
frequently during when
2. Method of setting
operation. reconnecting
up CS.
or exchanging
it.
1 Confirm CS is
3. Wiring to
normally connected.
connect CSIU
unit with CS.
2. Confirm the wiring
between CSIU-CS is
4. Hard defect of
normal.
CS.

3. Exchange CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
4. Exchange CSIU.

2-828 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

36 0 0 CS error CS detected the problem 1. Outgoing noise. Confirm the following This error has ERR
notification 1 occurring in the air when it happens been REC
synchronous signal frequently during recovered
2. Method of setting
between CS-CSIU, BBIC operation. when it is
reset was executed, and it up CS.
notified.
was restored automatically.
1. Confirm CS is
3. Wiring to
normally connected.
connect CSIU
unit with CS.
2. Confirm the wiring
between CSIU-CS is
4. Hard defect of
normal.
CS.

3. Exchange CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
4. Exchange CSIU.

37 0 0 CS Because CS had not 1. Outgoing noise. Confirm the following This error has ERR
transmission returned the response to when it happens been REC
error. the control signal from a frequently during recovered
main device longer than 2. Method of setting operation. when it is
the fixed time, it was up CS.
notified.
restored automatically
1. Confirm CS is
specifying reset to 3. Wiring to normally connected.
concerned CS with a main connect CSIU
device. unit with CS.
2. Confirm the wiring
between CSIU-CS is
4. Hard defect of
normal.
CS.

3. Exchange CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
4. Exchange CSIU.

38 0 0 CSIU Dch It was restored 1. Outgoing noise. Confirm the following This error has ERR
Error× automatically specifying when it happens been REC
reset to concerned CS with frequently during recovered
a main device because a 2. Method of setting
operation. when it is
main device had detected up CS. notified.
the control signal from a
main device not normally 1. Confirm CS is
3. Wiring to
reaching CS. normally connected.
connect CSIU
unit with CS.
2. Confirm the wiring
between CSIU-CS is
4. Hard defect of
normal.
CS.

3. Exchange CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
4. Exchange CSIU.

39 0 0 CSIU trans- This alarm is integrated

mission error. into Communication fault
between the GCD-CP10
and other PKG, and it is not
used in SV9100.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-829

 Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

40 0 0 CS error noti- CS detected the factor that 1. Outgoing noise. Confirm the following This error has ERR
fication 2. the noise is generated when it happens been REC
between CS-PS, BBIC frequently during recovered
2. Method of setting
reset was executed, and it operation. when it is
up CS.
was restored automatically. notified.
1. Confirm CS is
3. Wiring to
normally connected.
connect CSIU
unit with CS.
2. Confirm the wiring
between CSIU-CS is
4. Hard defect of
normal.
CS.

3. Exchange CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
4. Exchange CSIU.

41~49 --- Reserved ---

50 1 0 System Start The system started. The system was No action needed.
Notification started.

51 0 0 System Data GCD-CP10 Upgrade is No action needed.

change performed or Programming
change is made.

52 0 0 VRS/InMail Provide alarm when the 0 = Not Set, no Have users remove This error can
CF available available space on the alarm provided stored messages, or if be recovered
space VRS/InMail CF card is 1 = Major, when the needed, use InMail when avail.
getting below threshold. avail. space gets Utility to reinitialize CF space on
below 3% back to factory default. VRS/InMail
CF is back
2 = Minor, when the
above 3% or
avail. space gets
10%,
below 10%
depending on
alarm level
setting.

53 0 0 --- Reserved ---

54 2 0 License A new TCP/IP terminal and Maximum 512 Delete license WAR
Management the DSP board were not license information information on an
Table Full able to be added to the on the TCP/IP unnecessary TCP/IP
application license terminal is terminal with PRG
management table. registered, and a 90-44.
new terminal
cannot be
• The license management
registered.
table is registering full.

55 2 0 Regular The regular maintenance The regular Do the maintenance The excess ERR
maintenance exchange day has passed. maintenance exchanges of pertinent on the regular REC
exchange exchange day parts, and set the next maintenance
notification. that had been set regular maintenance exchange day
with PRG 90-51 exchange day with is canceled by
exceeded it. PRG 90-51. changing
PRG 90-51 or
when the
function is
invalidated,
the error is
recovered.

56 --- Reserved ---

2-830 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

57 2 0 IP Collision Collision(01) indicates the An IP address Confirm that the

Error address programmed in programmed in addresses assigned in
10-12-01 has been either 10-12-01, 10- 10-12-01, 10-12-09,
duplicated. Collision (02) 12-09 or 84-26 is and 86-26 are not
indicates the address duplicated duplicated anywhere
programmed in 10-12-09 somewhere on the else on the network.
has been duplicated. same segment of
Collision(03) ~ the network. The
Collision(10) indicates the system will check
addresses programmed in every 5 minutes
84-26-01 have been and is not a
duplicated. (03) is GW1 ~ programmable
(10) is GW8. increment.

58 2 0 Failure of 01: Programming session

Outbound IP is already active.
Connection
02: Not setting of IP
Address or Port.

03: Caller ID does not

match.

10: Cannot get IP Address.

11: Socket Open Error.

12: Socket Port Setting

Error.

13: TCP Session Timeout.

59 --- Reserved ---

60 2 0 SIP 1.The registration of the 1. The system data 1. Confirm the following The error is ERR
Registration SIP trunk to the SIP setting is wrong. system data setting -- recovered
Error server failed. PRG 10-12, 10-28, when normally
Notification. 10-29, 10-30, and 10- REC
connecting it.
2. The router
36.
2.The registration of the setting is wrong.
SIP trunk to the SIP
server failed in the 2.Confirm the setting of
3. LAN link error.
authentication. routers.

3.There is no response 4. Net side trouble.

3.Confirm whether
from the SIP server to abnormality occurs
the SIP registration on the net side.
request.
4. Confirm the
authentication
system data setting.

5. Confirm wiring and

the system data
setting. Inquire on
uncertain points of
the maker.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-831

 Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

61 0 0 SIP extension 1. Failed registration of the 1. The registered 1. Confirm wiring and ERR
trouble SIP extension terminal. port is used by system data setting.
information. other extension.
REC
2. The SIP extension 2. Confirm whether
terminal DSP was not 2. The license is each equipment
acquired: insufficient. such as access
points works
normally.
• At registration of SIP 3. DSP of VoIPDB
extension terminal to not acquired.
SV9100.

• When you cannot

acquire the DSP
resource when it is
sent.

62 --- Reserved ---

63 0 0 SIP-MLT 1. The trouble occurred in 1. The packet loss Confirm whether each WAR
trouble the SIP-MLT relation. occurred on the equipment such as
information. network or the wirings and HUB is
wiring cutting normal.
2. The DSP resource could
occurred.
not be acquired at
incoming/outgoing.
2. DSP of VoIP not
acquired.
3. The negotiation with
VoIPDB failed.

64 1 0 VoIPDB LAN The link of LAN of VoIPDB 1. LAN cable 1. Confirm LAN When the ERR
Link Error. came off. defective. connector and connection REC
wiring. returns
normally, the
2. Connected HUB
error is
broken. 2. Check with maker on
recovered.
uncertain points.
3. Defective
GCD-CP10.

65 0 0 VoIPDB When DSP of VoIPDB GPZ-IPLE 1. Possibility of WAR

trouble notifies Error. defective. defective hardware.
information.
2. Check with maker on
uncertain points.

66 2 0 SIP extension More than the number of Wrong number of 1. Confirm number of When the WAR
License Error. licenses to which the SIP licenses. licenses for SIP number of
extension terminal was extension terminals. registration of
turned on at REGISTER. SIP extension
terminals falls
2. Check with maker on below the
uncertain points. number of
licenses.

67 0 0 SIP illegal The system received an A client or network Check with maker on INF
packet illegal packet. is in an illegal state. uncertain points.
received.

68 2 0 VoIP DSP All 1. Provides alert when all Not enough DSP Install PZ-VMDB with
Busy Alarm DSP resources are being resources in more DSP resources.
used. system.

2. Used to troubleshoot or
alerting when upgrade is
needed.

69 --- Reserved ---

2-832 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

70 2 0 SIP Stack
Reconfig
Report

71 2 0 CID Buffer When the number of CID

Threshold records is over the limit,
CID buffer threshold alarm
(71) can be reported.

72~73 --- Reserved ---

74 2 0 TLS SIP Error 1. License is insufficient 2. 1. Encryption 1. ERR/

Information Error in CA Certificate. license is not REC
installed.
2. WAR
2. Error in CA 2. Failed to validate
Certificate.(PRG 84-14-22) CA Certificate. 3. WAR

4. WAR
3. Error in Server 3. Failed to validate
Certificate (PRG 10-72-01) Server Certificate. 5. WAR

4. Error in Private Key 4. Failed to validate

(PRG 10-72-02) Private Key.

5. Error in Server 5. Failed to

Authentication authenticate
Server.
a. The cert. not yet valid. a and b. The
certificate of PRG
b. The cert. has expired. 84-14-22 is not yet
valid or is expired.
or the certificate
c. Self-signed cert. received from SIP
server is not yet
valid or is expired.
d. Can’t prove server.

c. The certificate
received from SIP
server is Self-
Signed certificate
and same
certificate is not set
at PRG 84-14-22.

d. Can’t prove
server with using a
certificate of PRG
84-14-22

75 --- Reserved ---

76 SIP Server
Keep Alive
Timer

77~79 --- Reserved ---

80 1 0 NetLink start The error occurred when Defective 1. Possibility of ERR

error. NetLink started. GCD-CP10. defective hardware.

2. Check with maker.

81 2 0 NetLink call 1. The trouble occurred in GPZ-IPLE DSP not 1. Confirm wiring and WAR
trouble the NetLink relation. acquired. system data settings.
information.
2. The DSP resource was 2. Check with maker on
not acquired at uncertain points.
incoming/outgoing.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-833

 Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

82 2 0 NetLink The trouble occurred with Exceeds slot 1. Confirm upper slot WAR
Virtual Slot virtual Slot relation. accommodations in number.
accommod. the NetLink system.
error.
• It exceeded the upper slot 2. Check with maker on
accommodation. uncertain points.

• It failed to make a virtual

slot.

83 2 0 NetLink 1. Communication error 1. The Router 1. Confirm LAN WAR

Communicati occurred on NetLink. setting is wrong. connector and
on Error. wiring.
2. Checksum error 2. LAN Link error.
occurred. 2. Check with maker on
uncertain points.
3. Net side error.
3. Index error occurred.

84 2 0 NetLink 1. License error occurred 1. Approaching 1. Confirm license WAR

License Error on NetLink. expiration date information.
of a temporary
license.
2. Expiration date of the 2. Check with maker on
license approaches. uncertain points.
2. A temporary
license was
3. License nullified. nullified.

85 2 0 NetLink node The connection of 1. System ID 1. Confirm the setting WAR

connection Secondary was refused in Repeated. and license
refusal. NetLink. information on
SystemID.
2. SystemID is
• SystemID overlaps. illegal.
2. Check with maker on
uncertain points.
• SystemID is illegal. 3. The number of
licenses is
wrong.
• The license is
insufficient.
4. Insufficient
system
• Memory shortage.
memory.

86 2 0 Data base Because the versions of The versions of 1. Confirm the version WAR
replication DB is different, replication data bases of data bases of
fail. cannot be executed between Primary Primary and
between Primary and and Secondary is Secondary using PC
Secondary. different. PRO.

2. Check with maker on

uncertain points.

87 2 0 Data base Because the error occurred LAN link between Confirm LAN link WAR
replication in the communication Primary and between Primary and
fail. between Primary and Secondary was Secondary.
Secondary, replication disconnected.
cannot be executed.

88 2 0 NetLink Operation began as Operation began as No action is necessary. INF

phase shift. Primary. Primary.

89 2 0 NetLink Operation began as Operation began as No action is necessary. INF

phase shift. Secondary. Secondary.

90 2 0 NetLink It shifted to the node Shifted to the node No action is necessary. INF
phase shift. search mode. search mode.

2-834 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

91 2 0 Primary auto- Primary auto-integration Primary auto- No action is necessary. INF

integration. function operated. integration function
operated.

92 2 0 Primary The Primary compulsion Primary No action is necessary. INF

compulsion specification function was compulsion
specification. executed. specification
function was
executed.

93 2 0 NetLink node Node connection with Node connection No action is necessary. INF
connection with NetLink
detection. Primary was
NetLink Primary was
detected.
detected.

94 2 0 NetLink node Secession of the node Secession of the No action is necessary. INF
secession detected with NetLink node detected with
detection. Primary. NetLink Primary.

95 2 0 Data Base Because Secondary is in Logging in with Log out from Secondary WAR
replication programming mode, the Secondary in the programming mode.
failure. replication of DB cannot be Web Pro or the PC
executed. Pro is possibly the
cause.

96 1 0 Data base Error happened when Lack of resource Delete unnecessary file WAR
recovery fail. DataBase recovery Memory, protected and restore open area,
operation. area, recovery data then try operation
file corruption are again.
possible reasons
Backup/Restore
for this.

97 2 0 DB recovery Start Data base recovery Start Data base No action is necessary. INF
operation operation. recovery operation.
start.
Backup/Restore/Delete

98 2 0 DB recovery Finish Data Base recovery Finish Data base No action is necessary. INF
operation operation. recovery operation.
finish.
Backup/Restore/Delete

99 1 0 NetLink The error occurs when the PRG51-01-01 is set Install PZ-ME50 US. WAR
configuration system tries to start
without PZ-ME50
error. NetLink without MEMDB.
US.

100 1 0 NetLink link This alarm occurs when Primary system Primary system cannot WAR
error. the primary system cannot cannot communicate with
communicate with communicate with Secondary system
secondary system. Secondary system because of Network
because of error.
Network error.

Conditions

 The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at PRG90-50-01.

 System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display Setting is
set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display.

 The priority level (highest -> lowest): Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm 52>
Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-835

 Issue 4.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-836 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Report Method 0 = No Report 0

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this option 1 = E-mail Address
to 1. E-mail address set in PRG 90-11-08.

04 --- Not Used ---

06 SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters No Setting

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP
name (ex: smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your ISP
(Internet service provider) for the correct entry if
needed.

07 SMTP Host Port Number 0~65535 25

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP
host port number. Contact your ISP (Internet
service provider) for the correct entry if needed.

08 To E-mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail
address to where the report should be sent.

09 Reply Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the e-mail
address where replies should be e-mailed.

10 From Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail
address for the station sending the report.

11 DNS Primary Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS
primary address.

12 DNS Secondary Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS
secondary address.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-837

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

13 Customer Name Up to 255 Characters No Setting

When alarm reports are e-mailed, enter a name to
identify the particular system.

14 Change SMTP Client 0 = Off 0

When enabled the system uses the programs in 1 = On
47-18-xx for email server integration.

15 DIMLOG Notification 0 = Off 0

When enabled, the system will send an email 1 = On
notification when a system fault occurs and
DIMLast/DIMDump files are generated. If PRG 90-
11-14 is also enabled the logs files will be attached
to the email.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-838 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. Define the output
port to be used as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can
have up to 50 reports.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used for the System 1 = GCD-CP10
Alarms.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-839

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-13 : System Information Output
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system
information output.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used to print the 1~3 = -- Reserved --
system information. 4 = Not used
5 = USB Memory
04 Output Destination System ID 0~50 0
05 Output Command Dial 1+ press Transfer –
(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-840 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-16 : Main Software Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the
GCD-CP10. Main software information can also be viewed outside of system programming by pressing
Feature and the 3 key on any multiline terminal.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Component
No.

01 Version Number at present format is : ASCII Code

1.XX.XX e.g. (5 Bytes)
1.49.36

02 Software Release Date May 22 2002 17:53:46 ASCII Code

(20 Bytes)

Conditions
This Program is Read Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-841

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-17 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system
blades.

Input Data

Item
Item Display Data Data Format
No.

01 DSP Firmware Version No. 00.00.00.00~15.15.15.15 BCD Code (2 Byte)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-842 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level:
SA

Description

When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is
released from the Dial Block restriction.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Dial Block Release [Release?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Code Restriction

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-843

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Call Traffic Output 0 = Not Measured 0

1 = Measure
02 --- Not Used ---

03 All Line Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
09 Attendant Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

2-844 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

11 Security Sensor Dial Record 0 = Not Recorded 0

1 = Recorded

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Traffic Reports

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-845

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report
output.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

3 = LAN

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Traffic Reports

2-846 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone
from the system.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete IP Telephone [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Transfer

This assignment removes the station number (Press Transfer to cancel.)
association with the MAC address of the IP station.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-847

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the
alarm report to print.

Input Data

Notification Number 1~12

Item Defaul
Item Input Data
No. t

01 Month 00~12 00

02 Day 00~31 00

03 Hour 00~23 00

04 Minute 00~59 00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-848 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the
system alarm report CC Mail setup.

Input Data

CC Number 1~5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-849

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to
change a system program.

Input Data

Program Numbers 1001~9903

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Maintenance Level 1 = MF Level Refer to the Level indication for each individual
2 = IN Level program (located in the upper left corner at the
3 = SA Level beginning of each program).
4 = SB Level

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-850 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the user
programming mode.

Input Data

Extension Numbers 001 ~ 960

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Password Fixed four digits 1111

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-851

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information Maintenance)
access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by
engineering to extract trace level information.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Access Enabling 0 = Disable 0 (Disable)

1 = Enable

02 Username 20 characters SV9100

(alphanumeric)

03 Password 20 characters 12345678

(alphanumeric)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-852 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-34 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware blades installed in
the system.

Input Data

Slot No. 1~24

Item
Item Display Data
No.

01 Pkg Name PKG Name

02 Firmware Version Number 00.00~0F.FF

03 VoIPDB Version DEV/PR/REL-00.00

Used only for GPZ-IPLE
00.00.00.00~
FF.FF.FF.FF

04 DSP Project Number 00000000~

Used only for GPZ-IPLE.
FFFFFFFF

05 Vocallo F/W Version 00.00.00.00~

Used only for GPZ-IPLE.
FF.FF.FF.FF

06 OCT1010ID Version 00.00.00.00~

Used only for GPZ-IPLE.
FF.FF.FF.FF

Conditions
These Programs are Read Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-853

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard
Programming.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Wizard Number 1~250

Item
Item Display Data Default
No.

01 Maintenance Level 0 = All 0

3 = SB (System Administrator B)
4 = SA (System Administrator A)
5 = IN
6 = MF

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-854 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to show the data for the firmware update feature.

The following firmware is available to update with this feature:

 main.bin
 Dspdbu.bin
 dsp.bin

Input Data

Item
Item Display Data
No.

Year: 0~99

Month: 0~12

01 Firmware Update Schedule Time Day: 00~31

Hour: 00~23

Minute: 00~59

02 Update mode 0 = Non Active

1 = Activated

03 Update Report 256 characters max.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-855

 Issue 4.0

Sample Report

Result Report Display

Update Update is successful with the Update Time.

Success

Update Fail Update failed. Drive A (Compact Flash) was not available.

Update Fail Update failed. The file, main.up, does not exist on drive A.

Update Fail Update failed. The scheduled time has expired.

Conditions
These Programs are Read Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-856 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-37 : Set Temporary License
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-37 : Set Temporary License to set the effective days of the temporary license.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Set Number of Days for Temporary 00~10 days 0

License
00 = Temporary license is invalid

Conditions
Switch reset is required for changes to take effect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-857

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each User
Programming Feature

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Time Setting 0 = Off 1

1 = On

02 Change of Music On Hold 0 = Off 1

Tone
1 = On

03 Automatic Night Service 0 = Off 1

Pattern
1 = On

04 Weekly Night Service 0 = Off 1

Switching
1 = On

05 Text Data for Night Mode 0 = Off 1

1 = On

06 Holiday Night Service 0 = Off 1

Switching
1 = On

07 DISA User ID Setup 0 = Off 1

1 = On

08 Mail Box Setup 0 = Off 1

1 = On

09 Text Messages Setup 0 = Off 1

1 = On

10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 0 = Off 1

1 = On

11 Abbreviated Dial Number 0 = Off 1

and Name 1 = On

12 Night-mode Switching Other 0 = Off 1

Group 1 = On

2-858 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

13 DSS Key Assignment 0 = Off 1

1 = On

14 Doorphone Ringing 0 = Off 1

Assignment
1 = On

15 Extension Numbering 0 = Off 1

1 = On

16 Extension Name 0 = Off 1

1 = On

17 Night-mode switching Own 0 = Off 1

Group
1 = On

18 Call Forward-Immediate/No 0 = Off 1

Answer/Both Ring
1 = On

19 Call Forward-Busy 0 = Off 1

1 = On

20 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Off 1

1 = On

21 Internal Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Off 1

(PRG 15-02-03) 1 = On

22 Display Language Selection 0 = Off 1

(PRG 15-02-01) 1 = On

23 Toll Restriction Override 0 = Off 1

Password
1 = On
(PRG 21-07)

24 User Programming 0 = Off 1

Password
1 = On
(PRG 90-28)

25 Programmable Function Key 0 = Off 1

(PRG 15-07) 1 = On

26 Virtual Extension Ring 0 = Off 1

Assignment
1 = On
(PRG 15-09)

27 One Touch Key Assignment 0 = Off 1

(PRG15-14) 1 = On

28 Trunk Name 0 = Off 1

(PRG 14-01) 1 = On

29 Automatic Transfer per 0 = Off 1

Trunk
1 = On
(PRG 11-10-6,7)

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-859

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

30 SPD Area No. 0 = Off 1

(PRG 24-04) 1 = On

31 Telephone Data Copy 0 = Off 1

1 = On

32 Dial in Name 0 = Off 1

(PRG 22-11-03) 1 = On

33 LCD Line Key Name 0 = Off 1

Assignment 1 = On
(PRG 15-20)

34 IntraMail Station Mailbox 0 = Off 1

Options
1 = On
(PRG 47-02)

35 UC User Information Setting 0 = Off 1

(PRG 20-57) 1 = On

36 Setting the function key for 0 = Off 1

BTH handset
1 = On

37 Multi-Device Group Setup 0 = Off 1

(PRG 20-63) 1 = On

38 Ten Key Backlit Control 0 = Off 1

(PRG 15-02-74) 1 = On

Conditions
Switch reset is required for changes to take effect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-860 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Virtual Loop Back [Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

Reset
(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-861

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS
Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address.

 This program is available only through PC Programming and Web Pro.

NOTE

Input Data

Server Information 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 0 = IPv4
Server Address Type 1 = IPv6 0
3 = Fully Qualified Domain Name

02 IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Server Address –
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)

03 Port Number 0~65535 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-862 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-42 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-42 : DT800/DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware
version and firmware version of the DT800/DT700 MLT Terminal.

Input Data

1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1
2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT-1D/ITL-24PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1
4 = Not Used
5 = ITL-**DG-3
Terminal Type 6 = ITL-**CG-3
7 = ITL-2CR-1
8 = ITZ-**D-*D/ITZ-**PD-*D/ITZ-**pA-*D/ITZ-**DG/ITZ-**LDG/ITZ-**LD
9 = ITZ-**CG
10 = ITY-6D
11 = ITY-8LDX

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Software Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

02 Hardware Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-863

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT800/DT700
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT800/DT700 to delete the terminal license
information delivered to the DT800/DT700 terminal.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Terminal License [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-864 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license
information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

000~000~000
License Delete Code –
999~999~999

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Terminal License [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-865

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-45 : Temporary Password Change for DT800/DT700
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for DT800/DT700 to change the Temporary
Password that is set in the Encryption function.

This program is available only via telephone programming and WebPro, not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF
Temporary Password Change Request 00.00.00.00
Change? (Yes :1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-866 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone to set the button kit information
on a new telephone on the SV9100 system.

Input Data

Extension Number 001 ~ 960 (except virtual extension)

Item
Item Input Data
No.

Type A Key Kit:

0 = No Setting
1 = Not Used
2 = Type A for Overseas with Cursor Key
3~9 = Not Used
10 = Type A without Cursor Key (Retrofit)
11~12 = Not Used

Button Kit Information of

01 Multiline Telephone Type B Key Kit:
0 = No Setting
1 = Not Used
2 = Type A for Overseas with Cursor Key
3 = Type B with Cursor Key
4~9 = Not Used
10 = Type A for Overseas without Cursor Key (Retrofit)
11 = Type B without Cursor Key (Retrofit)
12 = Not Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-867

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone to set the protection mode of
each multiline (IP) telephone.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming and Web Pro.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Release Protection Mode Release? (Yes : 1) None

02 Initialize Protection Password Initialize? (Yes : 1) None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-868 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display.

Input Data

Index Number 01~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Alarm Display Telephone Up to eight digits No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-869

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance
exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.

Input Data

System ID 0~50

Index 1~10

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Display Name Up to 16 characters Refer to table

02 Year 00~99 00

03 Month 01~12 00

04 Day 01~31 00

Index Default

01 Power battery

02 Backup battery

03 Cooling fan

04~10 --- No setting ---

2-870 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-871

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming and Web Pro.
NOTE

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes)

02 Save New Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-872 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

System ID 0~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear? (1 = Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-873

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-54 : PC/Web Programming
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Web Pro TCP Port Number 0-65535 80

The port number of TCP of the Web programming of SV9100 is
set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the Web
Pro to the logout of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in
the system after data is changed in the setting.

02 PC Pro TCP Port Number 0-65535 8000

The port number of TCP of the PC programming of SV9100 is
set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the PC
professional to the logout of the user of the PC professional
who is logging in the system after data is changed in the
setting.

03 PC/Web Programming setting - Web Programming TCP 0~65535 443

Port (HTTP) 0 = HTTP
The port number of TCP of the Web programming (HTTPS) of access is not
SV9100 is set. When TCP port is changed, new TCP port is available.
applied after logout of all users logged in to Web Pro.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-874 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-55 : Free License Select
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Start Free License 0 = Stop

1 = Start

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-875

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-56 : NTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NTP Synchronize 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

02 Server Address IPv4 form: No setting

Up to 39 characters. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-876 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the flash memory on the
GCD-CP10 and to make the recovery data.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Backup Recovery Data [Backup?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-877

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the flash memory of
the GCD-CP10. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Restore Recovery Data [Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-878 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level:
SA

Description

Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the flash
memory of the GCD-CP10.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Recovery Data [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-879

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1/PRI/
BRI/CD-CCTA packages.

Slot No. 1~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Link Status – = No link N/A

0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot

Conditions
This Program is Read-Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-880 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-61 : Manual Slot Install
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Install to manually install any package. If another package is already
assigned, the new package cannot be assigned.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Slot No. 1~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Install 0 = None 0
1 = Router
2 = PVA-NAT
3 = Server Blade

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-881

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-62 : Security ID Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to display the security ID of the GCD-CP10.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Display Data
No.

01 Security ID 0~9 and A~F (32 digits or less)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-882 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-63 : DT800/DT700 Control
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-63 : DT800/DT700 Control to adjust settings of the DT700 and DT800.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Priority Timer 0~255 80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-883

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-64 : SNMP Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-64 : SNMP Setup to configure the SNMP function.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 SNMP 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

02 Community Name Max. 12 characters Public

03 Target Host 1 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0

04 Target Host 2 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0

05 Target Host 3 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0

06 Target Host 4 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0

07 Target Host 5 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0

08 Domain Name Max. 255 characters None

09 Trap Set Message 0 = Not Accept 0

When set to Not Accept, the trap 1 = Accept
message is sent to the SNMP
application for Major and Minor
alarms. When set to Accept, trap
messages are not sent until the
SNMP application makes a request.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-884 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication
password.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Password Up to 16 characters nec-i

Sets the authentication password when
the 1st Party CTI application is connected
to the system via a NAT router. If a
password is not set, the system does not
certify it.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-885

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup to automatically adjust the analog trunk CODEC Filter
settings.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Adjustment Start No Setting 1~400

Related PRGs:
14-01-07
81-07-01
21-01-05
21-01-06
21-06-06
21-05-07

02 1 Digit Data Dial (1 Digit) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-886 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-69 : Outbound IP Connection Setup
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-69 : Outbound IP Connection Setup to set the outbound IP connection information.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Port Number 1~65535 8000

Assign the port number used for Outbound
IP Connection programming.

02 IP Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Assign the IP Address that the system will
use for TCP establishment request to I.E.
the IP address of the PC with the waiting PC
Programming.

03 Caller ID Maximum of 16 digits None

Assign Caller ID number of the system to (0~9, , #)
compare with the received Caller ID.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-887

 Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-73 : Line Load Control
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-73 : Line Load Control to set the Line Load Control settings.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Line Load Control 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 CPU Load Factor (Low Level 30~100% 90

Restriction)

03 Surveillance Seconds (Low Level 1~10% 6

Restriction)

04 CPU Load Factor (High Level 30~100% 95

Restriction)

05 Surveillance Seconds (High Level 1~10% 3

Restriction)

06 CPU Load Factor (High Level 30~100% 50

Restriction)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-888 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

Issue 4.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-77 : LAN Link Speed Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 90-77 : LAN Link Speed Information to provide information about the LAN Link Speed &
Duplex mode.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 LAN Link Speed of CPU 0 = No Link 0

This program shows the speed & 1 = 1Gbps, Full Duplex
duplex mode of CPU LAN Link. 2 = 1Gbps, Half Duplex
(This is a read only program) 3 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
6 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex

02 LAN Link Speed of VoIP 0 = No Link 0

This program shows the speed & 1 = 1Gbps, Full Duplex
duplex mode of VoIP DB LAN Link. 2 = 1Gbps, Half Duplex
(This is a read only program) 3 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
6 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-889

 Issue 4.0

2-890 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

 Program: 92
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal,
port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied. .

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

Source Number  For Trunk Base :

Trunk Port Number 1~400
Enter the extension, trunk, group or other
number from which the data is to be  For Trunk Group Base :
copied. Trunk Group Number 1~100

 For Extension Base :

Extension Number (up to eight digits)

 For Department Group Base :

Department Group Number 1~64

 For DSS :
DSS Console Number 1~32

01 Destination Number (From)

Enter the first extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied.

Destination Number (To)

Enter the last extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied. If the information is being
copied only to one extension, trunk, group
or other number, enter the information
entered in the Destination Number (From)
entry.

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-891

 Issue 4.0

The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs:

Trunk Port Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

14-01 Trunk Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Trunk Name
(Item 01).

14-02 Analog Trunk Data Setup

14-04 Behind PBX Setup

14-08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks

14-09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk

21-03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

21-12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk

21-21 Toll Restriction for Trunks

21-22 CO Message Waiting Indication

22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup

22-03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup

22-05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk

22-08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG

31-05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker

81-07 Analog Trunk CODEC Filter Setup

Trunk Group Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

35-03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Extension Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Copy all data except extension
Extension) name (Item 01).

15-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup

2-892 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program
Program Name Note
No.

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension

15-07 Programmable Function Key

15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order

Setup

15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for

Extension

15-17 CO Message Waiting Indication

15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options

15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment

15-25 DESI-less Page Setup

20-06 Class of Service for Extension

20-29 Timer Class for Extension

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

21-11 Hotline Assignment

23-02 Call Pickup Groups

23-03 Ringing Line Preference

23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

24-03 Park Group Assignment

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

82-14 Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone

Department Group Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Group Name
(Item 01).

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-893

 Issue 4.0

DSS Console Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode

30-03 DSS Key Assignment

Door Box Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

32-02 Door Box Ring Assignment

Conditions

 Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys whether
or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion
when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays
as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommended to either clear these non-existent keys, or copy only from
an extension that has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the
programming is being copied.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-894 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers. However, the
extension number of the first port is not deleted.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Extension No. Delete Yes: 1 [Dial 1] + Transfer key (Only press Transfer
key is canceled)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-895

 Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside
line.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Source Number Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied.

02 Destination Number (From) Enter the first port number where the information is to be
copied.

03 Destination Number (To) Enter the last port number where the information is to be
copied. If the information is to be copied only to one port,
enter the information entered in the Destination Number
(From) entry.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-896 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 1st Extension Number

Up to eight characters.
02 2nd Extension Number

The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.

Program
Program Name
Number

11-02 Extension Numbering

12-05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions

13-03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions

13-06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name

15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup

15-02 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension

15-07 Programmable Function Key

15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-897

 Issue 4.0

Program
Program Name
Number

15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension

15-13 Loop Key Data

15-14 Programming One-Touch Keys

15-17 CO-Message Waiting Indication

15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options

15-19 System Telephone book Setup for Extension

15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment

15-25 DESI-less Page Setup

16-02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions

20-06 Class of Service for Extension

20-29 Timer Class for Extensions

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extension

21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extension

21-07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup

21-10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions

21-11 Hotline Assignment

21-13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension

21-15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-18 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for

Extension

21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension

21-20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension

21-23 Out Going Key Sized Virtual Extension Priority Setup

22-04 Incoming Ring Group Setup

22-06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode

23-02 Call Pickup Group

23-03 Ringing Line Preference

23-04 Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension

24-03 Park Hold Group Assignment

24-06 Fixed Call Forward

2-898 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program
Program Name
Number

24-07 Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise

24-08 Call Forward for Centrex

24-09 Call Forward Split Settings

26-04 ARS Class of Service

26-07 LCR Cost Center Code Table

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

41-02 Agent Extension Assignment for Group

41-17 Login Mode Setup

42-02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup

43-33 Print Table for Extension

43-37 Fixed Call Restrict Table Setup

82-14 MLT Handset/Headset Gain Control

90-28 User Programming Password Setup

92-05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-899

 Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each
extension to allow Extension Data Swap.

Input Data

Extension 1~960

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming

01 Password Fixed four digits (No 11-15-12

Password required per station when using setting at default)
the station swap feature.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-900 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-06 : Fill Command
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension
group or each table. .

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Source Number Each extension port = 1~960 (PRG 11-02)

Each virtual extension port = 1~512 (PRG 11-04)
02 Destination Number (From)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PRG 11-06)
03 Destination Number (To) Each extension group = 1~64 (PRG 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PRG 11-08)
Each group = 1~64 (PRG 11-17)

The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.

Program
Program Name
Number

11-02 Extension Numbering

11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering

11-06 ACI Extension Numbering

11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number

11-17 Group Pilot Number

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-901

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-902 Program 92 : Copy Program

Issue 4.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-07 : Delete Command
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each extension
group or each table. .

This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
 Programming.
NOTE

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Destination Number (From) Each extension port = 1~960 (PRG 11-02)

Each virtual extension port = 1~512 (PRG 11-04)
02 Destination Number (To)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PRG 11-06)
Each extension group = 1~64 (PRG 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PRG 11-08)
Each group = 1~64 (PRG 11-17)

The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.

Program
Program Name
Number

11-02 Extension Numbering

11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering

11-06 ACI Extension Numbering

11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number

11-17 Group Pilot Number

SV9100 Programming Manual 2-903

 Issue 4.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-904 Program 92 : Copy Program

 Program: 93
Program 93: System Information
93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information to display day/night mode for night mode service
group.

Input Data

Night Mode Service 1~ 32

Group default = 1

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Day/Night Mode 1 = Mode 1 None

Read only. 2 = Mode 2
Indicates current day/night 3 = Mode 3
mode per night mode 4 = Mode 4
service group. 5 = Mode 5
6 = Mode 6
7 = Mode 7
8 = Mode 8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 3-905

 Issue 4.0

Program 93: System Information

93-02 : Trunk Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-02 : Trunk Information to display the setting of each trunk.

Input Data

Trunk No. 001~400

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Automatic Transfer to 0 = Disable Disable 11-10-06

Transfer
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates Automatic Trunk
Transfer setting status.

02 Trunk Port Disable by 0 = Disable Disable 11-10-27

Service Code
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates the Trunk Port
Disable (Busy Out) status.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

3-906 Program 93: System Information

Issue 4.0

Program 93: System Information

93-03 : Extension Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-03 : Extension Information to display the settings of each extension.

Input Data

Extension 1~960

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Call Forward - All/No 0: = Call Forwarding off None 11-11-01

Answer/Both Ring 11-11-03
1 = Call Forwarding with
Read only. Both Ringing 11-11-04
11-11-05
Indicates Call Forward - 2 = Call Forwarding when
All/No Answer/Both Ring No Answer
setting status per 3 = Call Forwarding All
extension. Call

02 Call Forwarding 0-9, *, #, P, R,@ None 11-11-01

Destination for Both 11-11-03
Ring, All Call, No Answer
(Up to 24 digits)
11-11-04
Read only. 11-11-05
Indicates Call Forward-All/
No Answer/BothRing
destination number set per
extension.

03 Call Forward-Busy 0:Call Forward-Off None 11-11-02

Read only. 1:Call Forward-Busy or No 11-11-04
Indicates Call Forward- Answer
Busy setting status per 2:Call Forward-Busy
extension.

04 Call Forwarding Busy 0-9, *, #, P, R,@ None 11-11-02

Destination. 11-11-04
(Up to 24 digits)
Read only.
Indicates Call Forward-
Busy destination number
set per extension.

SV9100 Programming Manual 3-907

 Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Call Forwarding – 0:Disable None 11-11-07

Follow-Me
1:Enable
Read only.
Indicates Call Forward-
Follow-Me setting status
per extension.

06 Call Forwarding Follow- Extension Number None 11-11-07

Me Destination. (Up to 8 digits)
Read only.
Indicates Call forwarding
follow-me extension
number set per extension.

07 Do Not Disturb 0 = No setting None 11-11-08

Read only. 1 = DND External
Indicates DND setting 2 = DND Intercom
status per extension. 3 = DND Transfer
4 = DND All

08 Message Waiting (Set) Extension Number (Up to None 11-11-09

Read only. 8 digits) 11-11-10
11-11-11
Indicates extension
number which you set
Message Waiting.

09 Message Waiting (Rcv) Extension Number (Up to None 11-11-09

Read only. 8 digits) 11-11-10
11-11-11
Indicates extension
number when left Message
Waiting

10 Alarm Clock 1 0 = Disable None 11-11-12

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Alarm Clock 1
setting status.

11 Preset time at Alarm 1 Time set in Alarm Clock 1. None 11-11-12

Read only. When PRG93-03-10 is "0",
Indicates the time set in [00:00] is indicated.
Alarm Clock 1.

12 Alarm Clock 2 0 = Disable None 11-11-12

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Alarm Clock 2
setting status.

13 Preset Time at Alarm 2 Time set in Alarm Clock 2. None 11-11-12

Read only. When PRG93-03-12 is "0",
Indicates the time set in [00:00] is indicated.
Alarm Clock 2.

3-908 Program 93: System Information

Issue 4.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

14 Forced Intercom Ring 0 = Disable(Voice) None 11-11-15

(ICM Call Type) 11-11-16
1 = Enable(Signal)
Read only.
Indicates ICM Call Type
per extension.

15 BGM 0 = Disable None 11-11-18

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates BGM setting
status per extension.

16 Key Touch Tone 0 = Disable None 11-11-19

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Key Touch Tone
setting status per
extension.

17 Dial Block 0 = Disable None 11-11-33

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Dial Block setting
status per extension.

18 Repeat Dial 0 = Disable None

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Repeat Dial
setting status per
extension.

19 Headset Mode Switching 0 = Disable None 11-11-65

Read only. 1 = Enable
Indicates Headset Mode
Switching setting status
per extension.

20 Headset Ringing Mode 0 = Disable None 11-11-43

Switching
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates Headset Ringing
Mode Switching setting
status per extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 3-909

 Issue 4.0

Program 93: System Information

93-04 : Redial List
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-04 : Redial List to display the redial list of each extension.

Input Data

Extension 1~960

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Redial Data Dial Data : 1~9, 0, , #, None 15-02-13

Read only. P,R,@ 15-02-39
Indicates the number (Up to 24 digits)
stored in Outgoing call
history.

02 Name Up to 12 characters None 15-01-01

Read Only.
13-04-02
Indicates the name stored
in Outgoing call history.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

3-910 Program 93: System Information

Issue 4.0

Program 93: System Information

93-05 : Department Group Information
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-05 : Department Group Information to display the settings of each department
group.

Input Data

Department Group 1 ~ 64

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Set Automatic transfer at 0 = Disable None 11-11-25

Department Group Call
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates Automatic
transfer setting status per
Department Group.

02 Set Delayed Transfer at 0 = Disable None 11-11-28

Department Group Call
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates Delayed transfer
setting status per
Department Group.

03 Set DND at Department 0 = Disable None 11-11-30

Group Call
1 = Enable
Read only.
Indicates DND setting
status per Department
Group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

SV9100 Programming Manual 3-911

 Issue 4.0

Program 93: System Information

93-06 : IP Address List for 1st Party CTI Connection
Level:
IN

Description

Use Program 93-06 : IP Address for 1st Party CTI Connection to display the settings of each
department group.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 IP Address of the 1st IP Address: None

Party CTI Client
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Read only.
Indicates IP Address of 1st
Party CTI client.

02 Availability of 1st Party 0 = Not Available None

CTI Connection
1 = Available
Read only.
Indicates Availability of 1st
Party CTI client
connection.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

3-912 Program 93: System Information

 ®
SV9100
Programming Manual

NEC Corporation of America

Issue 4.0